JP2020018584A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving a role of state switch means.SOLUTION: A displacement direction of a slide displacement member 370 goes along a flow-down direction of game balls, so that a rolling mode of game balls can be changed by displacing the slide displacement member 370 in the state that game balls are approximate to or in contact with the slide displacement member 370. Thus, a role of the slide displacement member 370 can be improved. For example, while game balls are flowing leftward, the slide displacement member 370 is slid and moved rightward in the state that the game balls are upon it and load rotating the game balls in a forward direction of rolling is given to the balls, so that game balls can be accelerated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 20

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with large winning parts that can configure a plurality of types of flow paths of game balls toward a ball detection hole (Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2017-185021

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening / closing plate (state switching means). The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the role of a state switching unit.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a route forming unit configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a passed unit configured to allow a game ball flowing down the route forming unit to pass through. State switching means configured to be changeable between an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the path configuration means and a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the path composition means, Is configured such that the direction of displacement generated in the state change is along the flowing direction of the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the role of the state switching means can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning device, a collecting gutter, and a distribution device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning device, a collecting gutter, and a distribution device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a distribution device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a distribution device. It is a front view of a receiving member and a distribution device. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus and distribution apparatus in the XVI-XVI line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus and distribution apparatus in the XVII-XVII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus and distribution apparatus in the XVIII-XVIII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus and distribution apparatus in the XVII-XVII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus and distribution apparatus in the XVIII-XVIII line of FIG. It is a front view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the sorting device when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXII in FIG. 16. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the distribution device when viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16. FIG. 2A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main control device, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a correspondence relationship between a first hit type counter and a big hit type in a special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second hit random number counter and the hit in the ordinary symbol. It is the figure which showed the time change of the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device of the 1st round in each big hit type, and the operation pattern of the slide displacement member of the distribution device. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a rear perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit showing an example of operation of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of the 1st operation unit. FIG. 5 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of a first operation unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in a production standby state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in an effect standby state. 41 is a side view of the first operation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40. FIG. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in an intermediate effect state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in an intermediate effect state. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in an overhang state. It is a rear view of the 1st operation unit in an overhang state. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a displacement amount and a displacement angle of a supported member according to a rotation displacement of a rotation member. FIGS. 7A and 7B are schematic diagrams illustrating the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the supported member on the driven side when the rotating member rotates in a tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. It is a schematic diagram which shows the change of the angle accompanying rotation of a rotating member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back case and a 2nd operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a back case and a 2nd operation unit. 28A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and the center frame taken along the line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. is there. 33A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and center frame taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. is there. 30A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and the center frame along the line LIVa-LIVA in FIG. 30, and FIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit and the center frame along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. 30. is there. It is an exploded front perspective view of a raising / lowering reversal effect device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a raising / lowering reversal production device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, a vertically reversing member, an intermediate arm member, a direct acting plate member, and a shaft rotating member. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the upside-down reversing member, the intermediate arm member, the direct acting plate member, and the shaft rotating member taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in (a) of FIG. 57, and (b) of FIG. FIG. 11B is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the upside down member, the intermediate arm member, the direct acting plate member, and the shaft rotating member taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. (A) to (c) are front views of the rendering device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a part of composition of a 3rd operation unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of a third operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a part of composition of a 3rd operation unit. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of a third operation unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. (A) And (b) is a rear view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. (A) And (b) is a front view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. (A) And (b) is a front view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm members, the driving mode of the drive motor, and the output of the detection sensor in chronological order. FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit along a line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. (A) to (d) are schematic front views of the operation units, which schematically explain an example of a combination operation of the operation units in a time series. (A) to (d) are schematic front views of the operation units, which schematically explain an example of a combination operation of the operation units in a time series. It is a front perspective view of a distribution device. It is a front view of a variable winning device and a distribution device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the distribution device when viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16. FIG. 74 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize device and the distribution device along the line LXXV-LXXV in FIG. 73. FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of a middle member, a slide displacement member, a lower member, and a detection sensor of the distribution device along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. (A) to (d) is a front perspective view of a middle member of the distribution device. It is a top view of a middle member, a state switching device, a slide displacement member, and a lower member. (A) is sectional drawing of a middle member, a slide displacement member, and a lower member in the LXXIXa-LXXIXa line of FIG. 78, (b) is a middle member, slide displacement member, and a lower member in the LXXIXb-LXXIXb line of FIG. 78 is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, the slide displacement member, and the lower member taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 78. (A) And (b) is a side view of a slide displacement member and a ball riding on the upper surface of the ball guide. (A) is a front view of the rotating member, (b) is a rear view of the rotating member, and (c) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81 (a). It is. It is a front view of a 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of a 1st operation unit. It is a front view of a 1st operation unit. It is a rear view of a 1st operation unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of the extended part of a guide long hole, a dish-shaped lid part, a detection sensor, and a transmission gear cam. (A) And (b) is a rear view of the extended part of a guide long hole, a dish-shaped lid part, a detection sensor, and a transmission gear cam. It is a rear view of the extension part of a guide slot, a dish-shaped lid part, a detection sensor, and a transmission gear cam. It is a front perspective view of a 1st decoration rotation member and a 2nd decoration rotation member. (A) And (b) is a schematic front view which shows a guide slot, a rectangular box part, and an overhang decoration part typically. (A) And (b) is a schematic front view which shows a guide slot, a rectangular box part, and an overhang decoration part typically. It is a front schematic diagram which shows a guide long hole, a rectangular box part, and an overhang decoration part typically. FIG. 86 is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit along a line XCIII-XCIII in FIG. 85. It is a front view of the 2nd operation unit in an overhang state. FIG. 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit along a line XCV-XCV in FIG. 94. It is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, a vertically reversing member, an intermediate arm member, a direct acting plate member, and a shaft rotating member. It is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, a vertically reversing member, an intermediate arm member, a direct acting plate member, and a shaft rotating member. It is a front perspective view of a raising / lowering reversal effect device. (A) is a front perspective view of the intermediate arm member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member. It is a schematic diagram of a 3rd operation unit which shows displacement of a metal bar and an intermediate arm member typically. It is a front schematic diagram of a 3rd operation unit. It is a front view of an outer side rotation member and an intermediate arm member. (A) is a rear view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member, and (b) is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. It is a front view of the 3rd operation unit. It is a front view of the 3rd operation unit. FIG. 106 is a sectional view of a third operation unit along a line CVI-CVI in FIG. 105; FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit along a CVII-CVII line in FIG. 104. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in 2nd Embodiment in the line corresponding to XVI-XVI line of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in 3rd Embodiment in the line corresponding to XVII-XVII line of FIG. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams of a third flow path component, a positive change detection sensor, a normal detection sensor, and a slide displacement member schematically showing the configuration on the downstream side of the third flow path component in the fourth embodiment. It is a top view. 110A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component, the positive change detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member along the line CXIa-CXIa in FIG. 110A, and FIG. FIG. 7B is a schematic cross-sectional view of a third flow path component, a probability change detection sensor, a normal detection sensor, and a slide displacement member along line CXIb-CXIb). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the distribution device in a 5th embodiment in a line corresponding to XVII-XVII line of Drawing 15. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in 6th Embodiment in the line corresponding to XVII-XVII line of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the distribution device in a 7th embodiment. FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device along the line CXV-CXV in FIG. 114. It is a front schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between a guide long hole and a rotating member in 8th Embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between a guide long hole and a rotating member in 9th Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the near side of the drawing is referred to as a front (front) side, and the far side of the drawing is referred to as a rear (back) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left (left). ) Side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of ball guiding nails (shown below the center frame 86. In the upper half of the game area, Are not shown), a windmill (not shown), rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit. 80 and the like, and its peripheral edge is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

  The base plate 60 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and allows a player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are provided in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws and the like are provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by.

  The base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof can be shielded so as to be invisible to the player.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be properly used depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability-change jackpot, a 4R probability-change jackpot, and a 4R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “4R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after four rounds of jackpots, and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. In the high-probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability increases during a predetermined number of changes (100 changes in the present embodiment), and the second symbol hit probability described later increases. This includes a game state in which a ball can easily enter the winning opening 140. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300 described later in the first round of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game changes by 100 times. During the number of times, it is in a high probability state. If it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is reduced to the time-saving state for 100 times of change.

  During probable change or during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed. Then a long time is set. When the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 140 as compared to when the electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during probable change or during working hours, the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 140a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 140a is opened during the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is opened per hit, are not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared with the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 (start winning) as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and outputs the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that varies and displays the second symbol when the ball of the through gate 67 passes through as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 so as to fill an opening 511a of the rear case 510 described later, and the center frame 86 is arranged to border the window of the base plate 60. It is established. That is, when viewed from the front, the center frame 86 appears to be disposed so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are spaced apart from each other in the front-back direction. Have been.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of, for example, a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower portions are displayed. Are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of “」 ”), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is held for a predetermined time. Only the operating state (opened).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, during the probability change and during the working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 140.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of hitting is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 140a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. May be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). The number of through gates 67 is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in front view, a second winning opening 140 from which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is also one of winning ports in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 140 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 is different from the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 140, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured to have three prize balls to be paid out when a prize is awarded, and to have five prize balls to be paid out when a ball is awarded to the second winning opening 140.

  The second winning port 140 is provided with an electric accessory 140a. The electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged). State), so that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the variation of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is opened (increased) is increased. Further, during the probable change and during the working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer than during the normal working hours. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 140 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is always in a state capable of winning.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winning accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery are obtained, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, when the ball is passed through the through gate 67 during the probable change or during working hours, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 tends to be opened, and the second winning opening 140 is easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, the pachinko machine 10 can aim at the first winning opening 64 by “right-handing” or the second winning opening 140 by “left-handing”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with a method of shooting a ball in accordance with the playing state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Need to be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the trouble of changing the way of hitting the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided substantially at the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position may be the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. The present invention is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 140 is guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the out port 71. The out-opening 71 is provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged (not shown). ).

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and an opening / closing plate 65b of a specific winning opening 65a (FIG. 11). Solenoid 209 composed of a solenoid with a large open port for opening and closing the front side with the lower side as an axis and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected thereto, and the MPU 201 is connected to these via an input / output port 205. It transmits various commands and control signals.

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 631, 731, 782, 861.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300. FIGS. 6A and 6B are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 6A illustrates a closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b in which the opening / closing plate 65b is closed so as to regulate the flow of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a. In FIG. An open state of the opening / closing plate 65b in which the opening / closing plate 65b is opened so as to allow the ball to flow down is illustrated. Note that FIG. 2 is appropriately referred to in the description of FIG. 5 and FIG.

  In the open state of the opening and closing plate 65b (see FIG. 6B), the variable winning device 65 receives the ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b, and opens the opening and closing plate 65b so that it can be guided to the specific winning opening 65a. The upper surface of the opening / closing plate 65b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the rear side.

  Since the electric accessory 140a is disposed above the left and right central portions of the opening / closing plate 65b (see FIG. 2), the ball that lands on the opening / closing plate 65b is limited to a ball that deviates from the electric accessory 140a and flows down. . That is, the landing of the ball on the opening / closing plate 65b does not occur at the left and right central portions, but mainly at the left and right outer portions of the electric accessory 140a. In other words, the arrangement of the ball that lands on the opening / closing plate 65b is limited to a position closer to the left and right outer sides of the opening / closing plate 65b.

  Note that the arrangement of the ball after landing on the opening / closing plate 65b is not limited to this. That is, depending on how the ball flows after landing on the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball may be arranged near the left and right center positions of the opening / closing plate 65b.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric accessory 140a from the front side is curved so as to secure a space on the side of the opening / closing plate 65b (see the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). ) Is formed as a curved surface that projects downward from the lower end of the front end portion facing the rear surface side), so that the ball that bounces near the left and right center positions of the opening / closing plate 65b and the front design member 141. It is possible to reduce the degree of losing momentum due to collision. Thereby, the possibility that the ball is arranged near the left and right center position of the opening / closing plate 65b can be increased.

  The center of the radius of curvature of the lower curved portion of the front design member 141 may be located at the front or the rear. In the present embodiment, by forming the radius of curvature in the lateral view below the front side, a larger space on the side of the opening / closing plate 65b can be secured. In addition, since the left and right widths of the front design member 141 are reduced toward the lower side at the left and right end portions, a space between the front design member 141 and the open / close plate 65b can be easily secured on the left and right sides.

  In the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball that has landed on the opening / closing plate 65b is guided to the specific winning opening 65a almost without omission. On the front side of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that is inclined downward and rearward is disposed at an upper and lower position where the ball can be guided to the ball passage hole 163b.

  The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right end portions of the lower surface portion 163a so that the ball rolled to the left and right outer sides by the lower surface portion 163a can move over with less resistance. A guide plate portion 163a2 is formed on the left and right sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 in order to reduce the flow resistance of a ball that has landed on the opening / closing plate 65b on the left and right sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1.

  The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-like portion extending frontward and leftward and rightward inward from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner wall portions of the receiving member 163, and has a front end surface that is displaced rearward toward the left and right inward. It is formed.

  Accordingly, when the ball rolling on the opening / closing plate 65b comes into contact with the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided to flow down along the slope of the inclined surface. 163a1 can be guided with little resistance. Therefore, when the opening / closing plate 65b starts the closing operation in a state where the ball rides on the opening / closing plate 65b, the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b is performed even if the ball is disposed on the left and right sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1. The degree of inhibition can be reduced.

  That is, for example, the flow of the sphere is deteriorated, and the closing of the opening / closing plate 65b is delayed, or the ball that has flowed backward due to the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b rebounds on the rear wall of the receiving member 163 and hits the opening / closing plate 65b again, By applying a load in the direction (front side) to open the opening / closing plate 65b, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the opening / closing plate 65b is unintentionally opened or malfunctions occur.

  When the opening / closing plate 65b operates from the open state to the closed state, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed by a rising operation. That is, the ball that has landed on the opening / closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning opening 65a by the operation of the opening / closing plate 65b. The riding ball is guided to the specific winning opening 65a almost without omission.

  At this time, if the arrangement of the balls on the opening / closing plate 65b is shifted left and right or the number of balls is large, the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b may be delayed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the shapes of the lower surface portion 163a, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 are devised, the flow of the ball guided to the specific winning opening 65a is retained. Therefore, the quickness of the closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b can be maintained.

  Instead of devising the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening / closing plate 65b on which the ball rides in the open state is formed in a planar shape (see FIG. 6B). Therefore, the ball that has landed on the opening / closing plate 65b in the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b once flows backward, and then flows in the left / right direction by the action of the shape of the receiving member 163, and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the collision of the ball on the opening / closing plate 65b.

  That is, even if a plurality of balls land on the opening / closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls temporarily move rearward in parallel, so that collision of the balls on the opening / closing plate 65b can be avoided. Therefore, the rolling surface of the opening / closing plate 65b has a shape having a left-right inclined surface like the lower surface portion 163a, and the rolling surface on the opening / closing plate 65b is compared with the case where the left and right flows are formed on the rolling balls. Since the possibility of irregular movement of the ball can be reduced, unintended operation failure can be prevented.

  The receiving member 163 is provided with a contact surface portion 163a3 that comes into contact with the rotating front end portions at the left and right ends of the opening / closing plate 65b when the opening / closing plate 65b is in a closed state, and that enhances the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b. I have. The contact surface portion 163a3 is formed as a pair of left and right, and is formed so as to be capable of surface contact instead of point contact by a shape design according to the shape of the opening / closing plate 65b. Therefore, it is easy to stabilize the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b, In addition, since the load at the time of contact is received on the surface, stress concentration can be avoided, so that durability can be improved.

  In addition, an auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is formed below the contact surface portion 163a3 and has a surface shape that is substantially parallel to the opening / closing plate 65b that is disposed to face with a slight gap. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is provided as a fail safe when contact between the contact surface portion 163a3 and the opening / closing plate 65b becomes defective for some reason.

  In the present embodiment, the fixed member 161 that restricts the flow of the ball is disposed on the front side of the contact surface portion 163a3, and the ball is basically configured not to collide with the contact surface portion 163a3. However, for example, if the pivotal tip of the opening / closing plate 65b that comes into contact with the contact surface portion 163a3 is missing, there is a possibility that the repeatability of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state may not be maintained.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the normal contact between the opening / closing plate 65b and the contact surface portion 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front / rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening / closing plate 65b and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4. This makes it possible to maintain the stability of the arrangement of the opening / closing plate 65b. Thereby, the reproducibility of the arrangement of the open / close plate 65b in the closed state can be improved.

  Note that the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening / closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since the contact surface portion 163a3 comes into contact with the opening / closing plate 65b when the shape is normal, there is a disadvantage that the load is easily accumulated, but the area for dispersing the load can be enlarged, and the opening / closing plate 65b can be enlarged. , The magnitude of the local load applied to the contact surface portion 163a3 can be reduced.

  When the opening / closing plate 65b operates from the open state to the closed state, the game ball being received by the opening / closing plate 65b can be received in a manner of being pushed into the opening / closing plate 65b by the shape of the front design member 141 described above. .

  That is, in a state in which the ball is received (for example, a state in which the ball slides sideways between the pivotal tip of the opening / closing plate 65b and the opening frame portion of the specific winning opening 65a), the ball contacts the lower shape of the front design member 141. In the case of contact, it can be made to flow down to the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being guided to the curved shape. This makes it easier to avoid a situation in which a ball that has deviated from the opening / closing plate 65b falls on the front side of the third flow path component 336, so that it is easy to secure a view to the third flow path component 336. can do.

  In the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball does not land on the opening / closing plate 65b. Therefore, in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 65b is located on the left and right sides of the electric accessory 140a. Is limited to

  Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the arrangement of the balls flowing down without being guided to the specific winning opening 65a in the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b can be limited to the left and right outer positions with respect to the electric accessory 140a. Accordingly, a field of view can be ensured below the left and right end portions of the electrically driven accessory 140a at the left and right inner positions below the electrically driven accessory 140a.

  Next, the configuration of the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a (the side on which the ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a flows) will be described. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. FIGS. 7 and 8 show a state in which the components other than the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65 are removed from the components provided on the base plate 60.

  As shown in FIG. 8, at the rear position of the variable winning device 65 on the back side of the base plate 60, the balls having entered the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 2). Collecting trough 150 in which a path for flowing the gas to a ball discharge path (not shown) is formed.

  The collecting gutter 150 includes a groove-shaped portion forming a flow path, and a front side portion facing the base plate 60 in the groove-shaped portion is opened. When this open portion is closed by the base plate 60, a path for flowing the sphere to the sphere discharge path is completed.

  The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path portion 151 that forms a flow path of a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64, and a second flow path portion 152 that forms a path of a ball that has entered the second winning opening 140. And a plurality of third flow path portions 153 that respectively form left and right flow paths of a ball that has entered the general winning opening 63 disposed on both the left and right sides.

  The first channel portion 151 is configured as a channel inclined downward and leftward from the position behind the first winning opening 64, and the second channel portion 152 is inclined downward and rightward from the position behind the second winning hole 140. It is configured as a flow path. The third channel portion 153 is configured as a channel extending below the general winning opening 63.

  Therefore, in a front view, while the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are arranged at the left and right central positions of the game area, the flow of the ball entering the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is as follows. , From the center in the left and right direction to the left and right sides. Accordingly, a space can be provided below the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 described later can be arranged using this space.

  FIG. 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300, and FIG. 10 is a base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is shown, other parts are not shown, and other configurations to be assembled to the base plate 60 are omitted. The ground of the base plate 60 is visible. In FIG. 9, for convenience of description, the center frame 86 is illustrated in a state where the center frame 86 is assembled to the base plate 60.

  The fixing of the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the distribution device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is provided in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is provided in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  In the sorting device 300, the insertion hole 311 is fastened and fixed to the variable winning device 65 at the upper part, and the insertion hole 331 is fastened and fixed to the collecting gutter 150 at the left and right parts. That is, unlike the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 that are directly fixed to the base plate 60, the presence or absence of the distribution device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

  In other words, the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 in the present embodiment can be used as they are depending on whether the distributing device 300 is provided or not. Thereby, regardless of the presence or absence of the distribution device 300, the variable winning device 65 and the common gutter 150 can be shared.

  Next, details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable prize device 65 is configured to be able to receive a ball from the game area through the specific prize port 65a, and the distribution device 300 configures a flowing path of the ball received by the variable prize device 65. In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player is changed based on the detection result of the ball flowing down the flow path of the distribution device 300, which will be described in detail later.

  FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like, and a fixed member arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161. A front design member 162 fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161 and a receiving member 163 arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161 and fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161 so as to be able to receive a ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a. And an intervening member 164 that is disposed on the back side of the receiving member 163 and is fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163 and intervenes as a connecting portion with the sorting device 300; and is disposed on the back side of the receiving member 163. And a state switching device 165 configured to be capable of switching the open / close state of the opening / closing plate 65b depending on the presence or absence of energization.

  The fixed member 161 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a front surface formed of a flat surface except for a through hole for screw insertion, a fastening position with the front design member 162, and a specific winning opening 65a. . On the other hand, the shape of the fixed member 161 on the back side has a three-dimensional shape that extends to the back side inside the thin portion that is in contact with the base plate 60 at the outer peripheral portion.

  In particular, the boundary 161a with the thin portion is formed in a horizontally long substantially elliptical frame shape, and a through hole large enough to dispose the boundary 161a is formed through the base plate 60. That is, the boundary portion 161a is a portion that is inserted into the through hole of the base plate 60.

  Inside the boundary portion 161a, a specific winning opening 65a, and a horizontally long plate extending slightly rearward from the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a in a horizontally elongated plate shape parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a. And a pair of left and right substantially T-shaped extended support plates 161b including a vertically long plate-like portion extending downward at an intermediate position of the horizontally long plate-like portion.

  The extension support plate 161b functions to support both a range behind the specific winning opening 65a and a flow path of the distribution device 300 described later. A projecting support portion 161c projecting from the horizontally long plate-like portion of the extension support plate 161b, a projecting support portion 161d projecting from the vertically long plate-like portion of the extension support plate 161b, and a lower edge of the boundary portion 161a The projecting support portion 161e projecting from the upper surface has a function as a portion for supporting the distribution device 300, and will be described later in detail.

  Inside the boundary portion 161a, the symmetrically projecting portion 161f projecting in a symmetrical shape below the right and left center position of the specific winning opening 65a comes into contact with the ball flowing down the distribution device 300 and guides the ball flowing down. Has functions.

  A plurality of through holes 161g for inserting a fastening screw screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged inside and outside the boundary 161a. A plurality of fastened portions 161h each having a female screw portion for screwing a fastening screw inserted into the receiving member 163 are arranged inside the boundary portion 161a.

  The to-be-fastened portion 161i having a female screw portion for screwing the fastening screw inserted into the interposition member 164 is disposed outside the boundary portion 161a at a cut (left and right center position) of the boundary portion 161a. That is, of the through holes formed in the base plate 60, a connecting portion between the through hole for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for inserting the second winning opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 9). ), The fastened portion 161i is provided.

  The front design member 162 is formed of a light transmissive resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape so as to make the distance to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) uniform. The ball is allowed to flow down in a range on the back side of the front design member 162 and on the front side of the fixed member 161.

  On the back side of the front design member 162, there are provided a plurality of female screw portions which are provided at positions matching the through holes 161g of the fixed member 161 and which are formed so that the fastening screws inserted into the through holes 161g can be screwed therein. It includes a fastened portion 162a, and a plurality of extending portions 162b and 162c extending rearward in a shape that covers the fastened portion 162a from above.

  The extended portions 162b and 162c can prevent a ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened portion 162a, so that the durability of the fastened portion 162a is reduced. Can be improved.

  Further, since the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162b and 162c are formed as inclined surfaces, the flow path of the ball can be restricted. That is, the upper surface of the extending portion 162b (two locations on the left and right sides) extending near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined downward and leftward and outward. The ball riding on the portion 162b can be suppressed from flowing toward the specific winning opening 65a. That is, the ball riding on the extending portion 162b falls downward on the left and right outer sides of the extending portion 162b, and then flows down toward the out port 71 along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2).

  In addition, since the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162c (two locations at the left and right ends) extending at the left and right ends are formed as inclined surfaces that incline down toward the left and right inner sides, a ball flowing on the extending portion 162c is formed. The downflow path can be combined with the downflow path of the sphere riding on the extension 162b. Thereby, compared with the number of flowing balls, the range in which the flowing balls are arranged can be narrowed (the arrangement density of the balls can be increased). (A space that is not configured).

  Although the front design member 162 shown in FIG. 11 is described in a plain color and has good visibility on the back side, the front design member 162 does not need to be formed in a plain color. For example, a sticker with a pattern or character may be attached to the front side of the front design member 162 to decorate it, or a groove may be formed in the front design member 162 with a geometric pattern, and light may be applied to the groove. By doing so, the geometric pattern may emerge and be visually recognized. Further, the front design member 162 may be configured to be non-transparent after being plain or having the above-described decoration added thereto.

  The receiving member 163 is formed in a horizontally long frame shape (or box shape) whose front side is opened from a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the above-described guide plate portion 163a2, contact surface portion 163a3, and auxiliary contact surface 163a4. A lower surface portion 163a that forms a flow lower surface inside the frame, a ball passage hole 163b that is provided as a through hole through which a ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, and a position that matches the fastened portion 161h of the fixed member 161. A plurality of insertion holes 163c through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to the to-be-fastened portion 161h is inserted from the rear side, and a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted through the interposition member 164 is screwed. And a plurality of fastened portions 163e having female screw portions into which fastening screws inserted into the state switching device 165 are screwed.

  The lower surface portion 163a is formed as a left and right inclined surface which descends toward the left and right outer sides with the left and right center portions as vertices. Since the lower surface 163a1 is provided, the sphere flowing down the rear end of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is disposed so as to pass through the ball passage hole 163b with low resistance.

  The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 engaged with the back side of the receiving member 163. That is, the detection sensor SE1 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

  The intervening member 164 is formed of a light transmissive resin material, has a main body 164a having a light refracting surface that is inclined downward toward the rear, and a through-hole formed at an upper portion of the main body 164a to be fastened to the receiving member 163. A pair of insertion holes 164b through which fastening screws to be screwed into 163d can be inserted, a light emitting board 164c in which LEDs are arranged above the insertion holes 164b, and left and right ends on the lower end side of the main body 164a. A pair of fastened portions 164d formed with a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted into the distribution device 300 can be screwed, and a fastened portion of the fixed member 161 formed through the upper portion of the main body portion 164a. And an insertion hole 164e through which a fastening screw screwed into the portion 161i can be inserted.

  The light emitting board 164c is disposed in such a manner that the surface on which the LEDs are arranged is directed obliquely forward and upward. In an assembled state, the position directly above the specific winning opening 65a in front view (see FIG. 6), and the second winning It is located just below the mouth 140. From such an arrangement, the light from the light emitting substrate 164c easily enters the field of view of the player who desires to enter the second winning opening 140 or the specific winning opening 65a and looks at the location obliquely downward and downward.

  Therefore, by controlling to turn on the LED of the light emitting substrate 164c when a ball entering the second winning port 140 or the specific winning port 65a is detected, the ball entering the second winning port 140 or the specific winning port 65a is controlled. Can be easily grasped by the player as to whether or not the game has occurred.

  From the above configuration, the intervening member 164 is fastened and fixed to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. Thereby, the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 can be firmly fixed as compared with a case where only the fastening and fixing of the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 are performed. In addition, since the arrangement of the distribution device 300 connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164 can be stabilized, the distribution of the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 to the distribution device 300 can be stabilized. Relative displacement can be suppressed.

  The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion portions 165a into which fastening screws to be screwed into the to-be-fastened portions 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, and has a plurality of openings for wiring passage and heat dissipation. A lower case portion 165b formed in a deep bottom box shape whose upper side is opened, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case portion 165b, and a plunger engaged with the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c. A sliding portion 165d that slides and is rotatably supported by the lower case portion 165b in such an arrangement that the tip of the rotation protrudes from the front end of the lower case portion 165b, and is rotated by the sliding displacement of the sliding portion 165d. It has a moving part 165e and an upper lid part 165g that is fastened and fixed to the lower case part 165b by fastening screws inserted into the plurality of insertion holes 165f.

  The rotating tip of the rotating portion 165e is recessed so that the rod-shaped portion can be engaged, and a transmission projection 65c projecting rightward from the right end of the opening / closing plate 65b enters the recessed portion. Engaged. The transmission protrusion 65c is disposed at a position eccentric from a metal shaft rod 65d that forms a rotation axis of the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing plate 65b. With this configuration, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 65b can be caused with the rotation of the rotating portion 165e.

  13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the distribution device 300. 13 illustrates a perspective view of the distribution device 300 as viewed from above, and FIG. 14 illustrates a perspective view of the distribution device 300 as viewed from below.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the distribution device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 164 d of the interposition member 164 is formed so as to be inserted therethrough. A middle member 330 having a pair of insertion holes 331 that are fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the up-down direction and formed to penetrate a fastening screw screwed into the female screw portion of the collecting gutter 150; A substrate 350 housed between the member 330 and the upper member 310 and provided with a light emitting means 351 such as an LED on the front side is housed at a position between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310, and the state is determined depending on whether or not electricity is supplied. Switching device 360 configured to be switchable, and a slidable sliding device that is disposed below the middle member 330 and that slides back and forth between a front position and a rear position as the state of the state switching device 360 is switched. The displacement member 370 is disposed below the middle member 330 so as to sandwich the slide displacement member 370 between the displacement member 370 and the middle member 330. And a lower member 380 having an insertion hole 381 to be formed.

  Before describing the details of the configuration of each unit, an overview of the functions of the distribution device 300 will be described. The distribution device 300 is a device that forms a flow-down path in which the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flows down.

  The sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 163b flows down in the order of the inside of the upper member 310, the flow path components 334, 335, 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the inside of the lower member 380. The ball that has flowed down from the lower member 380 is discharged to a ball discharge path (not shown).

  The ball flowing down inside the distribution device 300 is configured so that the player can visually recognize the ball, and the flow-down mode allows the player to obtain not only a mere staging effect to entertain the eyes of the player, but also a player. An effect related to game profit, such as causing a change in profit.

  The difference in the manner in which the spheres flowing down inside the distribution device 300 flow down is mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. In other words, the location of the slide displacement member 370 when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380 causes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes.

  Therefore, the line of sight of the player is easily gathered at a place where the ball naturally flows down from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380 (a place where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged as described later). The device is designed on the premise of concentration.

  Next, the configuration of each part of the distribution device 300 will be described in detail. The upper member 310 is a U-shaped thin member formed of a light-transmitting resin material and has a U-shape in a top view, and includes the above-described insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 penetratingly formed to receive a ball, and a mark. A pair of colored (in this embodiment, red) transparent seal members 313, a pair of upper surface portions 314 extending from the lower edge of the opening 312 to the front side along the outer peripheral portion, and a middle member A plurality of insertion cylinder portions 315 having through holes through which fastening screws to be screwed into 330 can be inserted; a fastened portion 316 having a female screw into which the fastening screw inserted into the middle member 330 can be screwed; A pair of front and rear long projecting portions 317 that are elongated in the front-rear direction and protrude downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310 and are arranged side by side, and downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310. Is a long part in the left and right direction A pair of left and right inner protruding portions 318 disposed between the pair of front and rear long protruding portions 317, and a horizontally long portion protruding downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310. It includes a pair of left and right outer protrusions 319 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the pair of front and rear long protrusions 317, and a housing recess 320 formed as a recess having a size capable of disposing the upper portion of the substrate 350.

  The opening 312 is a passage-like portion (tunnel-like portion) that plays a role of receiving a ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and flowing the ball downward, and an upper front edge portion of the sensor SE1 ( The shape is such that it is cut along an inclined surface so as to be flush with the rear surface of the plate (see FIG. 12). Thus, the upper front edge of the opening 312 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the detection sensor SE1.

  Further, the opening 312 is formed with such an opening degree that does not enter the inside of the ball passage hole 163b when viewed in the opening direction of the ball passage hole 163b. Thereby, the flow resistance at the time of guiding the ball passing through the ball passage hole 163b to the opening 312 can be reduced.

  The seal member 313 functions as a member that attracts the player's attention by being brilliantly visually recognized by receiving light emitted from the light emitting unit 351 of the substrate 350, and will be described in detail later.

  The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is inclined in accordance with the flow path of the sphere below the upper member 310. The first upper surface portion 314a disposed on the front side of the opening 312 is formed to be inclined downward toward the front side, and is connected to the front end of the first upper surface portion 314a and disposed on the left and right inner side. 314b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the left and right inner sides. The left and right intervals between the left and right second upper surface portions 314b are configured to be longer toward the near side, so that the visibility of the player who visually recognizes the ball between the second upper surface portions 314b can be secured.

  A counterbore for receiving the screw head of the fastening screw is formed on the upper surface side of the insertion cylindrical portion 315. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the player from visually recognizing the screw head of the fastening screw while inserting the fastening screw from above.

  The insertion tube portion 315 is arranged at a position that matches the fastened portion 332d having a female screw portion formed on the middle member 330. In particular, the to-be-fastened portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion cylinder portion 315 also serves as a support portion for supporting the rotating portion 363, which will be described in detail later.

  The fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is arranged such that the screw portion is upward and the screw head is downward. For this reason, the screw head is configured to be less noticeable to a player who is obliquely viewed from above, while the fastened portion 316 is arranged on the near side. Thus, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the distribution device 300 from being deteriorated due to the fastening screw, while the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 are fixed with strength.

  The fastening portion 316 is formed only on the right side because the insertion tube portion 315 is already disposed at two locations on the rear side, so that the fastening position on the front side is sufficient at one location, and the screw head faces downward. The reason for this is that the distributing device 300 can be improved in appearance by omitting the disposing device if it is unnecessary even if it is not noticeable and unnecessary. Note that the arrangement of the fastened portions 316 is not limited to this. For example, they may be provided on the left side, or may be provided on a left and right pair.

  The arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is set as a position that avoids the flow path of the ball and minimizes the deterioration of the appearance of the distribution device 300, which will be described in detail later.

  The lower surface portions of the front and rear long projecting portions 317, the left and right inner projecting portions 318, and the left and right outer projecting portions 319 formed in a pair each have the same location as a reference, and the lower the location, the farther the location is from the location. Formed as a surface. The curved surface has different shapes at the front and rear long projecting portions 317, the left and right inner projecting portions 318, and the left and right outer projecting portions 319, and there is an intention to control the flow-down state of the sphere based on the difference in the shapes.

  The middle member 330 includes a pair of the above-described insertion holes 331, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (substantially box shape) having a lower bottom portion on the rear side, and a frame shape (substantially having a lower bottom portion on the front side). A pair of front frame-shaped portions 333 formed in a box shape), a pair of first flow path forming portions 334 that are recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame-shaped portions 333 and constitute a flow path of a ball, A pair of second flow path forming parts 335 connected to the front end of the flow path forming part 334 to form a flow path of a sphere and recessed on the front side of the front frame-shaped part 333; A pair of third flow path components 336 which are connected to left and right inner ends of the front frame 335 to form a flow path of the sphere, and are recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame 333.

  Further, the middle member 330 has a left and right elongated shape behind the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and is formed to penetrate the lower bottom and functions as a discharge path for a ball. A partition plate portion 338 formed in a long plate shape in the front-rear direction so as to partition the third flow path component portion 336 left and right, and a left and right long rectangular shape from a lower side surface at a rear end portion of the third flow channel component portion 336. A pair of positioning projections 339 projecting as shape projections.

  The rear frame-shaped portion 332 does not form a ball flow path unlike the front side portion that forms a ball flow path, and is mainly configured as a portion that supports the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame-shaped portion 332 is formed as a through-hole 332a formed vertically at the front end at the center in the left-right direction and configured to allow the slide displacement member 370 to be arranged, and a through-hole elongated in the left-right direction. A plurality of guide holes 332b formed through the lower bottom portion to guide the slide displacement of the guided portion 362c of the state switching device 360, and a plurality of female screw portions formed with a fastening screw inserted into the lower member 380 so as to be screwable therein. It includes a fastened portion 332c and a cylindrical fastened portion 332d having at its upper end a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted into the insertion cylindrical portion 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed.

  Since the front frame-shaped portion 333 is subjected to light diffusion processing on the inside of the frame and on the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom portion, the visibility of the rear side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 is reduced. The front frame-shaped portion 333 is formed in a substantially square frame shape in a top view, and an insertion hole 333a formed as a counterbore hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted. Is provided.

  The first flow path forming section 334, the second flow path forming section 335, and the third flow path forming section 336 are parts forming flow paths of the spheres, respectively, so that the flow direction of the spheres, the inclination angle, and the like are different. It is designed, but details will be described later.

  The opening 335a whose front side is opened at the connection position between the second flow path forming section 335 and the third flow path forming section 336 can enter the symmetrically protruding section 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable winning device 65. It is a gap for That is, the symmetrically protruding portion 161f is arranged so as to enter the inside of the flow path through the opening 335a so as to be able to contact the ball flowing down the distribution device 300.

  The discharge holes 337 are partitioned by a partition plate portion 338, and are configured as a pair of left and right sides, and are formed in a size that allows a ball to be discharged through at least two paths. That is, it has a left and right length at least twice the diameter of the sphere. In the present embodiment, since the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side on the lower member 380 disposed below the discharge holes 337, the discharge holes 337 are arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the spherical through holes of the detection sensors SE1. May be designed.

  The partition plate portion 338 has a function as a guide portion for guiding the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in addition to the function of partitioning the third flow path forming portion 336 as described above, and the details will be described later. The positioning projection 339 is fitted to the projection 383a of the lower member 380, and is a portion for avoiding a positional shift between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, which will be described in detail later.

  The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T-shape in which the lower portion 353 is longer in the left and right direction than the upper portion 352, and the lower portion 353 has a concave portion for positioning at the lower end on the left end side. A section 354 is provided.

  The recessed portion 354 is positioned in the left-right direction by engaging with the corresponding portion as the internal shape of the middle member 330, and the left and right long lower portion 353 is moved back and forth to the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330. The upper portion 352 is accommodated in the accommodating concave portion 320 of the upper member 310 so that the upper portion 352 is prevented from dropping upward, so that the arrangement is fixed. The details will be described later together with the intention of disposing the light emitting means 351.

  The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361 and a tip of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so as to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction. A sliding portion 362 engaged with the plunger and slidingly displaced together with the plunger; and a rotating portion 363 which is rotatably supported by being inserted into the left-side fastened portion 332d, and which rotates with the sliding displacement of the sliding portion 362. , Is provided.

  The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a recessed to receive the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 from above, an overhang portion 362b projecting rightward from the right side, and a lower surface. And a guided portion 362c projecting downward from the front-rear central portion and having an elongated oval cross section in the left-right direction.

  Since the disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above from the direction in which the concave portion 362a is formed, the slide portion 362 can be prevented from dropping upward. Therefore, the arrangement of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disk portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the middle member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disk portion 361a with an adhesive or the like.

  The guided portion 362c is a portion for preventing the displacement direction of the slide portion 362 from being shifted from the left-right direction by being inserted into the guide hole 332b of the middle member 330. In particular, in the present embodiment, the slide portion 362 can be maintained long by engaging the guided portion 362c and the guide hole 332b because it is formed to be long in the left-right direction. The cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be, for example, a circle or a rectangle.

  The rotating portion 363 is formed in a substantially L-shape when viewed from above, and is formed in a vertically long tubular shape at the L-shaped connecting portion and has a size large enough to allow the fastened portion 332d of the middle member 330 to be inserted. A supporting cylindrical portion 363a having a hole, an upper cylindrical portion 363b projecting upward from a short-side end portion of the L-shape and being inserted into a through hole of the overhang portion 362b; A lower cylindrical portion 363c protruding downward from the side distal end portion in a cylindrical shape and inserted through the concave portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370.

  With the above-described configuration, the rotating portion 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder 363a as a central axis. The displacement of the rotating portion 363 is caused by a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger slides and the slide portion 362 is displaced in the left-right direction, and the upper cylindrical portion 363b inserted through the through hole of the overhang portion 362b is displaced. The lower cylindrical portion 363c is displaced, and as a result, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced.

  The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is supported so as to be slid in the front-rear direction at a position between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 in the vertical direction, and includes a lower bottom portion and a lower member of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330. 380, a thin plate portion 371 sandwiched and supported from above and below, an upper projecting portion 376 projecting upward from the thin plate portion 371 in a pair of right and left, and a left and right center behind the upper projecting portion 376. And a recess 378 formed at the projecting end of the projecting portion projecting upward at the portion and formed so as to be able to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

  The thin plate portion 371 has a pair of left and right supported holes 371a formed in the rear half and a front-rear end portion at the left and right center portions, and a left-right width shorter than an arrangement interval of the upper protruding portions 376. A recess 372 to be recessed, a pair of lower protrusions 373 projecting downward in a ridge shape along the edge of the recess 372, and a protrusion along left and right edges in the rear half. A plurality of upper and lower protruding ridges 374 protruding in both vertical directions in a strip shape, and a cylindrical protruding portion 375 protruding downward in a columnar shape from the rear end and inserted into the guide elongated hole 386 of the lower member 380. Prepare.

  The lower protruding ridge 373 and the upper and lower protruding ridges 374 are portions supposed to face and slide with the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 arranged on the upper and lower sides. This is a ridge for reducing the contact area between the member 330 and the lower member 380. Since the displacement resistance of the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced by reducing the contact area, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the slide displacement member 370 from becoming slow.

  The upper projecting portion 376 is a columnar portion having a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed so as to pass through the placement through-hole 332a and to enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332. The width of the gap between the left and right inner sides of the upper projecting portion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330. With this configuration, the displacement of the upper projecting portion 376 can be guided by the partition plate portion 338.

  In other words, the upper protruding portion 376 is arranged so as to sandwich the partition plate portion 338 in the gap between the left and right inner sides, and is configured such that displacement in the left and right direction is suppressed by contact with the partition plate portion 338. Thereby, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be guided well, and the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-back direction.

  The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole in the left-right direction so as to correspond to the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 necessary for causing the slide displacement member 370 to be displaced in the front-rear direction. You.

  The projecting portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed is configured to enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 through the placement through hole 332a, so that the lower column of the rotating portion 363 is formed. The portion 363c can be easily inserted into the concave portion 378.

  As described above, the shape of the placement through-hole 332a has a shape including the entire range in which the upper projecting portion 376 to be inserted and the projecting portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed are arranged inside. Designed as a through hole.

  The lower member 380 includes the above-described insertion hole 381, a plate-like portion 382 formed in a long thin plate shape on the left and right, and a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) detection sensors below the plate-like portion 382. A sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape that enables the SE1 to be arranged side by side.

  The sensor holding frame portion 389 has an opening formed on the rear side surface into which the detection sensor SE1 is inserted, and the upper and lower side surfaces through which a ball passing through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 is opened, and other portions are closed. Formed.

  The plate-like portion 382 has through holes formed at positions matching the through holes of the detection sensor SE1 in the same manner as the through holes formed in the sensor holding frame portion 389 in the up-down direction. A projecting portion 383 projecting upward in a longitudinally elongated projecting shape at an intermediate position of the SE1 and a pair of projecting portions projecting left and right away from the front end of the projecting portion 383. And a pair of guide projections 384 projecting at a position rearward of the projection 383 at a position that can be inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370, and the guide projections 384. A pair of guide protrusions 385 formed as long protrusions in the front-rear direction at both left and right outer sides, and a long guide-like hole 386 extending colinearly with the protrusion 383 in a top view. , Curved surface protruding rearward on the front side Includes a curved surface portion 387 which is formed by Jo, an insertion hole 388 formed through the fastening screw is threaded insertable to the fastened portion 332c of the middle member 330, a.

  The ridge 383 is formed as a ridge having a slightly smaller left and right thickness than the width of the left and right gaps of the recess 372 of the slide displacement member 370. The slide displacement member 370 sandwiches the protrusion 383 between the recesses 372. Be placed. That is, the ridge 383 functions as a guide that guides the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370.

  The projecting portion 383a is designed such that the left and right inner ends are located at positions equivalent to the left and right outer ends of the positioning projecting portion 339 of the middle member 330. That is, the right and left outer ends of the positioning protrusion 339 are abutted against the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a, so that the left and right of the middle member 330 with the lower member 380 as a reference. The position in the direction can be appropriately determined. At the same time, the rear side surface of the front portion of the frame of the lower member 380 (the portion connecting the protruding portion 383 and the protruding portion 383a on the front end side) and the front side surface of the positioning protruding portion 339 are brought into contact with each other, thereby lowering the lower portion. The position of the middle member 330 in the front-rear direction with respect to the member 380 can be appropriately determined.

  Accordingly, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a displacement between the third flow path component 336 as the configuration of the middle member 330 and the detection sensor SE1 as the configuration of the lower member 380.

  The guide projecting portion 384 is formed in a left-right elongated oval shape, is inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370, and limits the displacement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to a displacement in a range where the guide protrusion 384 is arranged inside the supported hole 371a.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the collision between the slide displacement member 370 and the ridge 383, so that, for example, the forward end of the displacement is determined by the position where the slide displacement member 370 collides with the ridge 383. The durability of the ridge portion 383 can be improved as compared with the configuration. Therefore, the guide effect by the ridge portion 383 can be continued for a long time.

  The guide projecting portion 384 does not immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 even if it is broken, but functions as a portion for preventing collision with the projecting ridge 383. For this reason, the guide projection 384 is usually designed with sufficient strength so that it can be used for a set period of time (for example, three years) in a state where the guide projection 384 is not damaged. The strength of the guide projection 384 and the projection 383 may be designed in consideration of use in a state where the slide displacement member 370 collides. That is, the life of the guide projecting portion 384 may be set to be shorter than the set period (for example, two years), and the remaining period may be designed to withstand the strength of the projecting portion 383. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in shape can be improved.

  The guide protrusion 385 is arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the left and right width of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, and is formed so that the thin plate portion 371 can be arranged in the gap. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement on the left and right inner sides of the guide ridge 385. Thereby, the displacement in the front-rear direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be made small in the lateral displacement.

  The guide slot 386 is a slot formed with a left and right width that allows the cylindrical projection 375 of the slide displacement member 370 to be inserted. The direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is restricted in the front-rear direction by the cylindrical projection 375 being guided by the guide elongated hole 386.

  The curved surface portion 387 is a contact surface for guiding the flow of a sphere flowing down below the middle member 330. In the present embodiment, the flow of the ball that has entered the out port 71 is guided, but the details will be described later.

  A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being noticeably visually recognized. Further, the insertion holes 388 are arranged on the left and right sides and on the back side of the range where the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged. This can reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 388 obstructs the field of view of the sphere passing near the detection sensor SE1 or passing through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

  As described above, the slide displacement member 370 has a plurality of portions, namely, the guide protrusion 385 for the thin plate portion 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371 a, the recess 372, and the lower protrusion 373. It is displaced in the front-rear direction by being guided by the ridge portion 383, the guide long hole 386 for the cylindrical protrusion 375, the partition plate 338 for the upper protrusion 376, and the like. Thus, the load at the time of guidance can be shared among a plurality of positions, so that the load can be locally prevented, and the slide displacement member 370 and the guide portion for guiding the slide displacement member 370 can be prevented from being damaged. Can be.

  As can be seen from this, the slide displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by at least a plurality of members of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, in the slide displacement member 370, at least the pair of upper projecting portions 376 are guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed portion 372 is guided by the projecting ridge portion 383 of the lower member 380.

  Therefore, if the assembly between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor and the dislocation is large, the movement of the slide displacement member 370 is hindered. Here, it is preferable that the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 have a small displacement as a part that continuously configures the flow path of the sphere, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is good, A small displacement can be guaranteed.

  In other words, when the displacement of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes excessively large, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is not performed favorably. Therefore, by detecting that the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is defective, In addition, it is possible to control to execute the error notification on the assumption that the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 may be defective.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a state where the relative positions of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are in a poor state, and it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player suffers an unexpected disadvantage.

  Next, details of the internal structure of the distribution device 300 will be described. Here, a configuration related to the flow of the sphere inside the distribution device 300 and a configuration that enters the flow path of the sphere will be mainly described.

  15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15, and FIG. FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize device 65 and the distribution device 300 along the line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15, and FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize device 65 and the distribution device 300 along the line XVIII-XVIII of FIG.

  In FIGS. 15 to 18, when shown, the opening / closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state arranged at a front position. First, the details of the flow path of the sphere flowing down inside the distribution device 300 will be described.

  When the open / close plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6B), the ball that has landed on the open / close plate 65b rolls on the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b. The sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 163 b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310, and is guided to the first flow path component 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path forming section 334, the subsequent second flow path forming section 335, and the succeeding third flow path forming section 336 are all configured as inclined flow paths that are inclined downward, and the connected flow paths are connected to each other. Are formed in a spiral shape forming an angle of 90 degrees in a top view.

  That is, the first flow path forming part 334 is formed as an inclined flow path for causing the sphere to flow toward the front side in the front-rear direction, and the second flow path forming part 335 is based on the flowing direction of the sphere flowing down the first flow path forming part 334. The third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the sphere to flow down in the left-right direction rotated by 90 degrees, and the third flow path configuration part 336 is the same as the previous rotation direction based on the flow direction of the sphere that flows down the second flow path configuration part 335. It is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the sphere to flow down the back side in the front-rear direction rotated by 90 degrees in the direction.

  In this manner, by forming the flow-down path in a spiral shape having a bending angle of a right angle, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the flow velocity of the sphere increases as it goes downstream. More specifically, when the sphere flowing down the first flow path component 334 accelerates toward the front side, the downward flow in the subsequent second flow path component 335 has no longitudinal component. It is possible to realize a flow-down mode in which the influence of the acceleration in the configuration section 334 is suppressed. Further, in the third flow path forming section 336 following the second flow path forming section 335, the flow is directed backward in the backward direction opposite to the acceleration direction in the first flow path forming section 334. It is possible to realize a flow-down mode in which the influence is suppressed.

  Therefore, for example, unlike the flow-down mode in which the ball constantly flows down in the same direction (for example, the left direction) from the beginning, it is possible to easily avoid an excessive increase in the ball's flow-down speed on the downstream side. In other words, it is possible to make the flow velocity of the ball uniform over the entire flow path, to keep the player's attention to the ball high, and to easily avoid the situation where the player loses sight of the ball. It has the effect of being able to do so.

  Further, for example, it is possible not to form the second flow path component 335, but it is easier to prevent clogging of the ball and backflow by forming the second flow path component 335. When the second flow path component 335 is not formed (when the length of the second flow path component 335 in the left-right direction is 0), that is, the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 are In the case of connection, it is necessary to reverse the flowing direction of the sphere at the connection point by 180 degrees from the flow on the near side to the flow on the rear side. In this case, the switching angle of the ball flowing direction is large, and in particular, it is necessary to reverse the velocity direction back and forth, so it is difficult to smoothly flow the ball down, and the ball tends to stay, clog, and backflow, May occur.

  On the other hand, if the switching angle in the downflow direction is 90 degrees or less as in the present embodiment (90 degrees in the present embodiment), the reversal of the velocity direction of the ball does not occur, so that the ball flows down smoothly. Stagnation, clogging, and backflow of the ball can be easily avoided.

  The flow path shape at the connection end of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 will be described. At the connection end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, the above-mentioned symmetrically projecting part 161f is provided as a part for guiding the flow of the sphere in a manner to bend the flow direction of the sphere. Is done.

  The symmetric protruding portion 161f is formed such that a portion arranged on the downstream side of the sphere retreats from the path of the sphere than a portion arranged on the upstream side of the sphere. For example, the left and right widths of the symmetrically protruding portions 161f disposed to face each other are formed to be longer than the left and right widths of the partition plate portions 338 disposed adjacent to each other. In addition, the rear end portions on the left and right ends of the symmetrically protruding portion 161f that are arranged to face each other are disposed on the front side of the flow path side surface of the second flow path configuration portion 335 near the opening 335a (FIG. 17). reference).

  Thereby, when the ball collides with the symmetrically protruding portion 161f, it is possible to prevent the ball from being excessively decelerated or the ball from flowing backward.

  Further, at the connection end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the first flow path forming part 334, the side wall part 334a formed at the front left and right ends of the middle member 330 bends the flowing direction of the sphere. It is formed as a part that guides the flow of the sphere in an embodiment.

  At the upstream end of the first flow path component 334, the first flow path component 334 projects upward from the flow lower surface of the first flow path component 334 in a curved surface shape (see FIG. 16) whose arrangement decreases toward the front side. Curved protrusion 334b is formed as a portion for guiding the flow of the ball in a manner to bend the flow direction of the ball.

  In other words, the ball that has passed through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b, flows down the first flow path component 334, and contacts the side wall 334a during the flow, so that the flow direction can be switched. The flowing direction is switched by flowing down the flow path forming section 335 and abutting on the symmetrically protruding section 161 f during the flowing down, and flows down the third flow path forming section 336 to reach the discharge hole 337.

  The side wall portion 334a is formed in a shape capable of engaging with the projecting support portion 161d of the fixed member 161 and aligning the same. That is, the side wall portion 334a is supported so as to be sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and the displacement in the left and right direction is regulated, so that the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 are aligned in the left and right direction. It can be performed.

  A description will be given of the inclination angle and the length ratio of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 in the longitudinal direction. Regarding the inclination angle in the longitudinal direction, the first flow path component 334 has an inclination angle to the horizontal of about 7 degrees, the second flow path component 335 has the inclination angle to the horizontal of about 5 degrees, The flow path forming part 336 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path configuration section 334, and set to a slightly gentle common inclination angle in the second flow path configuration section 335 and the third flow path configuration section 336.

  Regarding the length, each of the flow path components 334 to 336 has a front frame-shaped portion 333 formed in an outer square shape as an inner side surface in a top view, and the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame-shaped portion 333. It is formed so that a large square having the outer side surface. Here, in the present embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 is set to 21 mm, and the length of one side of the above-described large square is set to 45 mm. It is formed.

  Therefore, since the clearance with the flow path is 1 mm in total on both sides of the sphere, the sphere flows down in a state where there is almost no displacement in the width direction with respect to the generally used sphere having a diameter of 11 mm. . This is a small clearance, considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is about 19 mm. Can be suppressed.

  Among the parts constituting the ends of the flow path components 334 to 336 arranged on a square surrounding the periphery of the square front frame part 333, the upstream end of the first flow path component 334 is Since only the curved protrusion 334b to be configured is arranged inside (front side) of the apex of the square, the first flow path configuration section 334 is connected to the second flow path configuration section 335 and the third flow path configuration section 336. Shorter than that.

  Speaking from the actually measured values in a top view, the flow path formed by the second flow path configuration part 335 and the third flow path configuration part 336 has substantially the same length (33 mm at the center of the sphere), and the length is The length is about 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path component member 334 (22 mm between sphere centers).

  From the above-described ratios of the inclination angle and the length in the longitudinal direction of each of the flow path components 334 to 336, it can be explained that the time required for a sphere to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is not constant. That is, the passage time through the first flow path forming part 334 having the maximum inclination angle and the shortest flow path length is equal to the second flow path forming part 335 having the slanted angle and 1.5 times the path length. And the time required to pass through the third flow path component 336.

  In the present embodiment, with such a configuration, the arrangement shifts to the rear side when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, and a part is hidden by the non-transparent resin portion of the detection sensor SE1. From the state in which the visibility of the ball is deteriorated, the ball can be displaced to the front side at an early stage, and the state can be switched to a state close to the player and in which the visibility of the ball is high. This makes it easier to avoid a situation where the player loses sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

  Further, when the visibility of the ball is high, slowing down the flow speed of the ball eliminates the need for the player to quickly move his or her line of sight toward the ball. Eye fatigue) can be reduced.

  When attention is paid to the sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 having high visibility, the sphere flows down in the left-right direction along the second flow path component 335. In comparison with the case, when the ball flows down in the front-rear direction along the third flow path component 336, the displacement amount of the ball in front view becomes smaller, so that the game burden of the player who pays attention to the ball is reduced. , Can be minimized when focusing on a sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336.

  In other words, since the length and the inclination angle are equal, the time required for the sphere to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow path component 336 Are equivalent, but the amount of displacement of the sphere in front view is different, and as a result, the apparent velocity of the sphere flowing down (the displacement velocity of the sphere in front view) flows down the third flow path component 336. The sphere that flows is slower than the sphere that flows down the second flow path component 335.

  The flow path of the ball changes only at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 where the game load is minimized and the ball is easily noticed, and the flow path of the ball in other portions is the flow path component 334 to 336. It is common in. Accordingly, the line of sight of the player tends to be naturally concentrated on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and the game burden on the player who concentrates the line of sight can be effectively reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the opening 335a is formed on the front side surface of the second flow path component 335 in order to ensure the visibility of the player who pays attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336. (See FIG. 17), it is possible to prevent the line of sight toward the third flow path component 336 from being obstructed by the meat of the second flow path component 335.

  Further, in the symmetrically protruding portion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a, only a portion necessary for contacting and guiding the flowing ball is formed, and the formation of a shape portion on the upper and lower sides is omitted. Is done. In other words, the symmetric protruding portion 161f is formed as a thin plate-like portion vertically, and a space is secured on the upper and lower sides (see FIG. 18). Therefore, the possibility that the line of sight toward the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is obstructed by the symmetrically protruding portion 161f, as compared with the case where the symmetrically protruding portion 161f is formed with a vertical thickness. It can be lowered, and visibility can be improved.

  Further, it is configured such that spheres deviating from the opening / closing plate 65b and heading toward the out port 71 are gathered toward the field of view centered on the rear end of the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in the present embodiment, the ball that enters the out port 71 flows down below the third flow path component 336, contacts the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and is discharged downward.

  Therefore, assuming a line of sight for observing the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 from the obliquely upper front side, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down the back side of the third flow path configuration part 336. Therefore, the sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336 and the sphere entering the out port 71 are visible before and after the ball, so that the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is noticed. The total number of spheres that enter the field of view increases.

  In other words, whether the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a and flows down the third flow path forming portion 336 or the ball that does not enter the specific winning opening 65a but enters the out opening 71, Enters the field of view focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

  Therefore, irrespective of the ease with which the ball is directed to the specific winning opening 65a, that is, regardless of the nail configuration (the so-called good or bad gauge) implanted in the base plate 60, many of the shot balls (other winning openings 63, The rear end of the third flow path component 336 (the part that attracts the player's attention) is located at the position where the balls (excluding the balls that have entered the balls 64 and 140) and the position where the third flow path constituent part 336 overlaps. Thereby, the line of sight can be efficiently guided to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 by the flowing sphere.

  As described above, the visibility at the position closer to the front side is improved, but in this embodiment, the visibility at the position closer to the back side is reduced except for the rear end of the third flow path component 336. It is configured to lower.

  For example, a light diffusion processing surface 333b for generating a light diffusion effect in a shape following the prism is formed on the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330. In FIG. 17, a portion visually recognized in a saw-tooth shape is the light diffusion processing surface 333 b, which is formed over substantially the entire inner periphery of the inner surface and vertically.

  When the effect of light diffusion occurs, light is diffused in multiple directions, so that the entire surface is visually recognized as shining. And the visibility on the back side deteriorates. According to the present embodiment, visibility is deteriorated in a state where light is emitted from the light emitting unit 351 of the substrate 350. Conversely, when light is not irradiated, at least as compared with a state where light is irradiated. Visibility can be improved.

  On the other hand, if there is a shielding object between the light and the light, the shadow of the shielding object is visually recognized as a black point, and the position of the shielding object can be easily determined.

  A processing surface similar to the light diffusion processing surface 333b is also formed in other portions. For example, there are a light diffusion processing surface 319a formed on the rear side surface of the left and right outer projecting portion 319, a light diffusion processing surface 332e formed on the rear side surface of the front portion of the rear frame portion 332 (FIG. 17). reference).

  The processing surface formed in the same shape is a plate-like portion extending on the back side of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310, and is formed on the front frame-like portion 333 of the middle member 330 in the assembled state. The light diffusion processing surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the portion to be covered and the light diffusion processing surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the front part of the middle member 330 before the rear frame portion 332 are exemplified. Is done.

  With these configurations, in the present embodiment, light diffusion is performed on the back surface, the lower surface, the inner surface of the vortex, and the upper surface of the vortex of the flow channel formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow channel components 334 to 336. The processed surface is formed, and the effect of changing the visibility by light irradiation is achieved.

  In a state where the light diffusion processing surface is not irradiated with light, the direction is changed in the left-right direction from the third flow path component 336 with the player's eyes paying attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 from the front side. The sphere can be hidden by the front frame 333 to make it harder to see immediately.

  Further, with a player's line of sight observing a ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 as viewed obliquely from above, let's see the ball that has passed through the detection sensor SE1 held by the sensor holding frame 389 and has dropped. However, since the line of sight passes through the light diffusion processing surface 340, the light is irradiated on the light diffusion processing surface 340, so that it is difficult to identify the sphere after passing through the detection sensor SE1 and falling. .

  In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the profit obtained for the player is controlled to be changed depending on how the ball flows down the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

  Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the behavior of the sphere at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 in order to grasp how the ball has flowed from the rear end of the third flow path component 336. In addition, the power to pay attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 can be further improved.

  On the other hand, when the light is emitted from the light emitting unit 351, it is possible to configure a state where the shadow of the sphere is easily recognized as a black point. As described above, by switching between the light irradiation and the non-light irradiation depending on the situation, it is possible to switch between good and bad visibility of the ball. Further, depending on the presence or absence of the sphere on the front side of the black point, a situation where the black point is hidden by the sphere and a situation where the black point can be seen without being hidden by the sphere can be configured.

  As described above, the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed in the vicinity of the flow path components 334 to 336, but the flow formed by the flow path components 334 to 336 is consistent. It is formed on the side that does not come into contact with the ball that flows down the road.

  This can prevent the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 from being scraped due to contact with the sphere, and maintain the shapes of the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 for a long period of time. And the effect of light diffusion can be maintained.

  Furthermore, by contacting the sphere with the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340, it is possible to prevent the sphere from flowing down and prevent the sphere from being decelerated. In addition, by ensuring the visibility inside the flow path, the visibility of the sphere is reduced while the sphere is flowing down the flow path formed by the flow path components 334 to 336. That can be avoided.

  The light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the setting of the size of the prism, it is possible to achieve the effect of causing the effect of light diffusion and the effect of decelerating the ball by collision with the ball.

  In the front frame-shaped part 333 of the middle member 330, the formation of the light diffusion processing surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the part to be fastened 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and the visibility is maintained high without any countermeasure. there is a possibility. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the visibility is reduced by the fastening screw.

  That is, by utilizing the fact that the fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is non-transmissive, it can be used as a blindfold at a place where it is difficult to form the light diffusion processing surface 333b. When the front frame-shaped portion 333 is irradiated with light, the light diffusion processing surface 333b shines brightly, and the fastening screw reflects and shines light where the light diffusion processing surface 333b is not formed. The visibility of the back side of the front frame portion 333 in the line of sight from the front side can be reduced, including the portion where the formation of the processing surface 333b is omitted.

  The light diffusion processing surface 332e of the middle member 330 is formed on the back side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336. For this purpose, besides making the surface brilliantly shine, a substrate 350 disposed on the back side is provided. And causing the state switching device 360 to function as a blindfold. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is arranged on the back side of the substrate 350 (see FIG. 17), the substrate 350 is blindfolded, and it is easy to prevent the state switching device 360 from being visually recognized by a player.

  The substrate 350 is accommodated in a form supported by the rear frame-shaped portion 332 of the middle member 330. The substrate 350 is disposed with a gap between the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 at the left and right central portions, and slides into the gap. The displacement member 370 is disposed (see FIG. 18). That is, the substrate 350 is arranged at a position where the slide displacement member 370 is sandwiched between the slide displacement member 370 and the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332.

  More specifically, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower portion 353 is sandwiched between the rear frame portions 332 at the left and right ends from the front and rear (see FIG. 17). In this supporting portion, the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 is provided with a thick portion 332f having a large thickness (see FIG. 16). Then, the slide displacement member 370 can be arranged in the gap (see FIG. 18).

  As shown in FIG. 18, the upper portion 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310, and is disposed to face the light diffusion processing surface 164 f formed on the interposition member 164 in front and rear.

  Therefore, when the light is emitted from the light emitting means 351 disposed on the upper portion 352, the light diffusion processing surface 164 f of the interposed member 164 can produce an effect of glittering brilliantly. Can be reduced in the visibility of the range.

  Here, when the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper part 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion processing surface 164f, the light diffusion processing surface 164f has a cross-sectional shape following the prism along the surface. Since the light is formed in the entire vertical direction, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as light having a wide vertical width. Therefore, it can be seen from the player's point of view that the light is emitted above and below the specific winning opening 65a.

  In addition, in the field of view from the front side, the light diffusion processing surface 164f is disposed at the center on the left and right sides of the receiving member 163. Therefore, if it is formed at least in the arrangement gap of the pair of detection sensors SE1, a sufficient effect can be obtained.

  The lower portion 353 of the substrate 350 is disposed so as to irradiate light toward the seal member 313 and a portion disposed below the seal member 313 and in which a ball flows down, which will be described in detail later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19 and FIG. 20, switching of the flow path of the ball passing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and its significance will be described. In the description of FIGS. 19 and 20, FIGS. 15 to 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15, and FIG. 20 is a cross-section of the variable prize device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. FIG. 19 and 20, in the case shown, the opening / closing plate 65b is illustrated in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is illustrated in a state disposed at a rear position.

  Here, the four left and right detection sensors SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389, the flow of the sphere to each detection sensor SE1, and the function of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

  The four detection sensors SE1 are two sets arranged symmetrically, and include a positive detection sensor SE11 having a common function and a normal detection sensor SE12. The probable change detection sensor SE11 is provided on the inside in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is provided on the outside in the left-right direction.

  The functions of the four detection sensors SE1 are different from those of the detection sensors SE1 arranged behind the opening / closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 disposed behind the opening / closing plate 65b is a ball entry sensor for paying out a prize ball. That is, when it is detected that the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a has entered the detection sensor SE1 behind it, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, ten for one detection) of the winning ball is paid out. It is paid out to the player side by the control device 111 (see FIG. 4).

  On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389 is not a detection sensor for paying out prize balls, but as a detection sensor for changing the game state after the end of the big hit game by detecting the incoming ball. Function.

  In addition, as described later, in the present embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 disposed on the sensor holding frame portion 389 is used for switching whether or not to shift to the positive change state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor for switching the presence or absence of the next jackpot acquisition.

  When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so that the thin plate portion 371 covers the upper part of the certainty detection sensor SE11, and the through hole of the certainty detection sensor SE11. The passage of the sphere to is prevented. Therefore, the ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is guided to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 as guided by the upper projection 376 of the slide displacement member.

  Since the upper side 376a of the upper protruding portion 376 has a front side surface 376a facing the sphere formed in an arc shape with a concave channel side, the flowing sphere smoothly flows toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. Can be.

  On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 retreats backward from above the probability change detection sensor SE11, and the slide displacement member 370 moves to the through hole. A ball is allowed to pass.

  That is, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the arrangement (front position or rear position) of the slide displacement member 370. Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through-hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 during the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is controlled to be the probability change state. In other words, when the ball is not detected as passing through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 and passes only through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the normal state (or the time reduction state). ).

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the jackpot type includes the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot. In order to realize this, in the present embodiment, different operation patterns are prepared as operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 for each big hit type.

  In other words, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operation pattern such that the ball easily passes through the through-hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 in the case of the probability change jackpot. It is controlled to operate in an operation pattern that makes it difficult to pass through the through-hole of the positive change detection sensor SE11 and to easily pass through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. The details of the control will be described later.

  As described above, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is directly connected to the profit obtained by the player, and the arrangement naturally draws the attention of the player. On the other hand, an illegal act of illegally switching the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 has been found not a little, and a measure against it has been emphasized.

  As a premise, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360 is energized. That is, when power is not supplied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the plunger and the slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are disposed on the right side by an urging spring (not shown), and the lower column portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 faces the front. By being disposed on the side, the slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the front position.

  On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and the slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left by the electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the concave portion of the slide displacement member 370). The slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the rear side position by the rearward displacement of the portion inserted into the setting portion 378). This is a normal operation mode, and the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 correspond one-to-one.

  The person who performs the above-mentioned misconduct inserts a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the sorting device 300 from the ball payout opening or a gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1), for example. By pressing the thin metal wire against the slide displacement member 370 and pushing the slide displacement member 370 to the back side, there is a possibility that the state in which the ball can enter the positive change detection sensor SE11 may be illegally created. is there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the thin plate portion 371 is disposed below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming section 336 as the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 (see FIG. 18), It is difficult to press against the front end of the thin plate portion 371 when pressing the slide forming member 370 through the thin metal wire through the road forming portion 336, and press against the upper projecting portion 376. The front side surface 376a of the upper protruding portion 376 has a curved surface shape that allows the load to escape to the left and right sides as described above, so that even if a thin metal wire is pressed, the load can escape to the left and right sides. Thus, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the slide displacement member 370 is illegally displaced to the rear side position.

  Further, in addition to the path leading to the slide displacement member 370 being wound not in a straight line but in a spiral shape, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 itself is far from the front side surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to the rear side. Since they are separated (about 10 cm), it is difficult to make the thin metal wires reach the slide displacement member 370 in the first place.

  From these configurations, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the state switching device 360 can be improved. That is, in the related art, in many cases, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is maintained by mechanically devising the mechanism for transmitting the driving force (displacement regulation) in response to the above-described misconduct. Is limited in the configuration of the state switching device 360. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the condition required for the state switching device 360 can be partially omitted by configuring the slide displacement member 370 such that a load is hardly applied in the first place, and the state switching device 360 can be freely designed. The degree can be increased.

  When a pressing load is applied to the slide displacement member 370 with a thin metal wire creeping through the third flow path component 336, the thin metal wire itself flows down the sphere trying to flow down the third flow path component 336. Therefore, it is difficult to make the sphere reach the positive change detection sensor SE11.

  As described above, depending on whether the ball passes through the through hole of the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, the profit obtained by the player greatly changes. It is desirable to avoid.

  In the conventional model, it is usual to configure the normal detection sensor SE12 to restrict the ball in the state where the ball is allowed to enter the positive change detection sensor SE11. However, in the present embodiment, the positive change detection is performed. In the state where the ball is allowed to enter the sensor SE11 (see FIGS. 19 and 20), no movable member is provided to restrict the ball from entering the normal detection sensor SE12, and the ball is also entered into the normal detection sensor SE12. This is a configuration that can be performed.

  Even with such a configuration, if at least one ball passes through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 when ten balls flow down, the probability change state after the jackpot game is secured. In the present embodiment, from such a concept, by omitting the disposition of the movable member that opens and closes the normal detection sensor SE12, the material cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced. In addition, as a result of not disposing the movable member, there is a good effect that maintenance due to failure or malfunction of the movable member is not required, and the service life of the pachinko machine can be extended beyond the life of the movable member.

  On the other hand, as a device for guiding the ball to the detection sensor SE1 on the appropriate side as a device different from the movable member, the flow channel shape and the arrangement of the fixed protruding portions 317, 318, and 319 are used. And shape are devised. That is, a mechanism that prevents a ball larger than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is located at the rear side position is fixedly arranged inside the flow path (that is, the protrusion). It is intended to be realized by the shape of the set portions 317, 318, 319). This will be described below.

  First, a device of the flow path shape will be described. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal in the lateral direction toward the center in the left-right direction (toward the partition plate 338). (See FIG. 15).

  The inclination angle is set so that the angle and the direction are the same as the inclination of the second flow path component 335 in the longitudinal direction. It is possible to reduce bouncing of the ball when the ball flows in (bouncing away from the partition plate portion 338).

  Due to the inclination in the short direction, the arrangement of the spheres flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 can be brought closer to the partition plate part 338 side. Therefore, the ball when flowing down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336 toward the detection sensor SE1 can be disposed on the side close to the partition plate 338, and the slide displacement member 370 is located at the rear position. In the arrangement state, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a situation in which the ball erroneously passes through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 disposed apart from the partition plate portion 338) may occur.

  Also, regardless of the inclination of the lower bottom surface 336a in the lateral direction, the flow path formed by the flow path components 334 to 336 has a left-right direction path formed only by the second flow path component 335. Since the inclination direction is the left / right center side (partition plate part 338 side), the speed in the left / right direction is generated in the left / right inward direction. This also makes it possible to reduce the possibility that a ball may accidentally pass through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 disposed apart from the partition plate 338).

  Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed projections 317, 318, and 319 will be described. It is the left and right inner protruding portions 318 that the spheres that have flowed down the third flow path forming portion 336 are first arranged close to each other. The left and right inner protruding portions 318 are the smallest protruding portions among the protruding portions 317, 318, and 319, but are located on the front side of the center of the detection sensor SE1 and on the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Since it is located on the front side more, it comes into contact with the ball passing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 without sliding while sliding on the partition plate 338.

  The protruding distal end surfaces of the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are configured as curved surfaces that are concave downward when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the protruding portion is more left and right than the front end side of the protruding portion. It is formed so as to extend outward and downward, and its front and rear ends are connected to form a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, the sphere that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and abutted on the left and right inwardly protruding portions 318 receives a load in a direction in which the left and right outward components and the downward component are mixed, and flows down. .

  On the other hand, since the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are formed in a small size, the flowing direction of the ball is not determined by the load received from the left and right inner protruding portions 318 as being downward or left and right outward, but is merely a momentum. It functions as an attachment. Since the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are arranged on the upstream side of the slide displacement member 370, the above-described force is generated regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

  The flow of the ball after coming into contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318 will be described separately. In a state where the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front side position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while abutting on the upper projecting portion 376 and the front and rear long projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 18). And flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side.

  The projecting end of the front and rear long projecting portion 317 has the same use as the upper projecting portion 376. That is, since the curved surface is formed as a curved surface for switching the flowing direction of the ball, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is substantially the same as the radius of curvature of the front side surface 376 a of the upper projecting portion 376. As a guide, the upper protruding portion 376 forms a curved surface starting from the left and right inner sides and ending at a position rearward of the center position of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 when viewed from above (see FIG. 17). The long protruding portion 317 has a curved surface whose start point is the ceiling surface of the flow path and whose end point is a position close to the end point position (rear end position) of the front side surface 376a at the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 when viewed in the left-right direction. (See FIG. 18).

  Here, the upper side surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward and leftward and outward, and the ball that is urged right and left outward by contact with the left and right inwardly protruding portion 318 takes advantage of the momentum. Since the ball flows down in the left and right outward directions, the ball can smoothly flow down.

  Further, the left and right outer protrusions 319 are formed above the sphere flowing down in the left and right directions, so that the sphere can be smoothly formed by suppressing the ball from jumping. Since the purpose of the left and right outer projections 319 is not switching of the ball flowing direction but suppression of ball bouncing, the shape of the left and right outer projections 319 is significantly different from that of the front and rear long projections 317. It is formed as a curved surface having a large radius of curvature formed from above SE11 to above the normal detection sensor SE12.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the left and right outer protrusions 319 are disposed on the front side of the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (that is, the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), the left and right outer protrusions 319 are provided. When the setting portion 319 and the ball are in contact with each other in the vertical direction, the center of the ball is more likely to be located on the rear side than the thickness center of the left and right outer protrusion portions 319. Therefore, when the left and right outer protrusions 319 and the ball abut in the vertical direction, a load having a backward component can be easily applied to the ball, so that the ball flows backward to the front side. Can be prevented.

  With these configurations, it is possible to easily prevent clogging of a ball or backflow of a ball when a plurality of balls flow down.

  When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper protruding portion 376 are retracted behind the front and rear long protruding portion 317. Flows in contact with

  The front-rear long protruding portion 317 has a protruding end portion (curved surface) whose normal shape passes through the center of the third flow path forming portion 336, and the center of the through hole of the positive change detection sensor SE11. Since the center of thickness is arranged immediately behind the position, it is easy to apply a load in which the component in the left-right direction is suppressed to the ball in contact. This load functions as a load for causing the ball to flow obliquely downward and forward because the protruding tip of the front and rear long protruding portion 317 has a concave curved surface shape (see FIG. 20).

  Therefore, the sphere that has not gone to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner protruding portions 318 receives the load from the front and rear long protruding portions 317 obliquely downward and forward, and flows toward the positive change detection sensor SE11.

  Here, depending on the contact point at the time of collision with the front and rear long protruding portion 317, there is a concern that the ball may rebound to the front side (backflow may occur), but in the present embodiment, as described above, the left and right inward collision occurs. Since the ball is urged obliquely downward and to the right and left outside by contact with the setting portion 318, even if the ball rebounds to the front side, the ball does not move toward the lower bottom rear end of the third flow path component portion 336 (see FIG. 20) or However, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the collision only occurs with the rear side surface (see FIG. 19) of the front frame-shaped portion 333 and the backflow of the third flow path component 336 occurs.

  What is unique in this embodiment is that, even when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position and the ball flows to the positive detection sensor SE11, the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front position and the ball flows to the normal detection sensor SE12. As in the case, the ball is displaced leftward and rightward by the load from the left and right inner protrusions 318. This use will be described later.

  The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be slidable at a front position and a rear position. When the ball is flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 toward the slide displacement member 370, the slide displacement member 370 is moved. When the 370 performs the closing operation (the operation from the rear position to the front position), there is a possibility that a forward load is applied to the sphere, and the load in the direction in which the third flow path component 336 flows backward (forward) is applied to the sphere. May be given.

  In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, if control is performed so that the closing operation is completed before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the sliding displacement member 370 in operation can be eliminated, so that the ball can flow backward. Can be reduced.

  In addition, the front surface of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 is formed as a curved surface facing left and right outer sides, or the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are arranged so as to collide with the ball without causing a third problem. The action of guiding the sphere that has reached the rear end of the flow path component 336 to the left and right sides can be produced. Thereby, the backflow of the sphere can be made hard to occur.

  In addition, since the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 (the operation from the front position to the rear position) is not the operation in the direction opposing the ball but the operation away from the ball, for example, the ball is Even if the operation is performed while riding on the thin plate portion 371, a load that pushes the ball back to the front side is less likely to occur. Therefore, in the opening operation, even if the control is executed at an arbitrary timing without considering the arrangement of the sphere, it is considered that the backflow of the sphere does not easily occur.

  When the sphere rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the upper surface of the slide displacement member 370 (before flowing to the left and right outer sides), the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 suppresses the rotation with respect to the sphere. Since a load is applied in the direction (the direction in which the ball is rolled backward), the rotation of the ball can be stopped, and the flow of the ball can be stopped and the ball can be easily dropped.

  Therefore, when the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371 and the slide displacement member 370 is opened, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 with the current rolling force. And the ball can be easily guided to the positive change detection sensor SE11.

  The appearance of the distribution device 300 from the player's perspective in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment including the above-described distribution device 300 will be described. Hereinafter, as an example, the case where the angle of the line of sight with respect to the horizontal direction is different will be described separately.

  FIG. 21 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 in the direction of the arrow XXII in FIG. 16, and FIG. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII in FIG. 16.

  As a premise, a player operating the pachinko machine 10 can play a game in a desired posture except for gripping and rotating the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, the player plays the game with the head sufficiently separated from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a line of sight (see FIG. 22) in a horizontal direction or a direction inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal. Alternatively, the game may be played by bringing the head closer to the pachinko machine 10 and viewing the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight (see FIG. 23) in a direction inclined downward by about 30 degrees from horizontal. In general, the former can secure a wider field of view, but it is difficult to notice small parts, while the latter has a narrower field of view, but small parts in the field of vision are more noticeable.

  FIG. 21 is shown as a reference, and hereinafter, description will be mainly given by comparing FIG. 22 and FIG. 21 to 23 show the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b for convenience.

  In FIG. 21, the light emitting means 351 is illustrated by imaginary lines. Although the light emitting means 351 is arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), only the left half is shown for easy understanding. Since the functions of the light emitting means 351 arranged at the top are as described above, the three light emitting means 351 in the left half part arranged in the lower part 353 will be described here.

  First, the upper light emitting unit 351 emits light toward the seal member 313. As described above, since the seal member 313 is formed to be red and transparent, when light is emitted from the light emitting unit 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. Thereby, the player's attention to the seal member 313 and its surroundings can be improved. Since the seal member 313 is disposed right above the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 18), the third flow path component 336 can be noticed.

  Note that the formation of the light diffusion processing surface 332e is omitted on the front side of the upper light emitting unit 351 (see FIG. 18). Accordingly, it is possible to avoid that the light from the light emitting unit 351 is visually recognized as being extended in the vertical direction by the light diffusion processing surface 332e, and the periphery of the seal member 313 can be illuminated intensively.

  Note that the light emission control is not limited at all. For example, during the big hit game, control is performed so that the seal member 313 is irradiated with light in a situation where it is desired to pay attention to a ball flowing down the third flow path component 336. By doing so, the attention can be paid to the seal member 313, and the line of sight can be naturally guided to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 disposed below the seal member 313.

  Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side respectively correspond to the positions directly above the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12. That is, the control of the light emitting means 351 is performed such that when the ball enters the certainty detection sensor SE11, the light emitting means 351 disposed directly above the certainty detection sensor SE11 emits light, while the ball is transmitted to the normal detection sensor SE12. By controlling the light-emitting means 351 disposed directly above the detection sensor SE12 to emit light when the ball has entered, it is possible to notify the player of the ball passage location.

  The light emitted from the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed to the light diffusion processing surface. That is, the light-emitting means 351 on the left and right center sides are disposed to face the light diffusion processing surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light-emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides are disposed to face the light diffusion processing surface 319a (see FIG. 17). ing. The light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 332e are formed above and below each part.

  Therefore, the position where the light from the light emitting unit 351 is visually recognized is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting unit 351, and is formed as a range extending vertically (as a band-like light extending vertically). Visible). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes, the visibility of light from the light emitting unit 351 can be improved.

  The angle (5 degrees) of the downward inclination from the horizontal in FIG. 22 is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 can be visually recognized. However, since the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-back direction, it is difficult to grasp a change due to the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in this view.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when viewed in the direction at an angle of 30 degrees from horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is narrower, so that it is compared to the direction viewed in FIG. Thus, the difficulty of confirming the switching of the flow-down mode of the sphere at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 increases. However, in this view, it is easy to grasp the displacement of the upper protruding portion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

  Since the arrangement through-hole 332a of the middle member 330 is formed as an opening having a minimum size enough to allow the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 to pass through, the inside of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 is formed. Can be hidden such that the state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) disposed at the position is difficult to visually recognize.

  During the actual jackpot game, a plurality of balls are guided to the specific winning opening 65a during the round game, and flow down the flow path components 334 to 336 in order. When a plurality of spheres are arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 at the same time, the line of sight toward the back sphere may be obstructed by the front sphere.

  For example, when a plurality of spheres are arranged in the third flow path component 336, those spheres are arranged at the same position in FIG. Therefore, the ball on the back side is hidden by the ball on the near side.

  When the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12, the ball flows from the rear end of the third flow path component 336 to the left and right directions. After deviating in the left-right direction from the third flow path component 336, the visibility is reduced by the light diffusion processing surface 333b of the front frame-shaped part 333. It is preferable to grasp the flow path from the downstream end position (the position of the ball P1) of the second flow path component 335 to the upstream end position (the position of the ball P2) of the third flow path component 336. If there is a sphere (a sphere that is slightly shifted in the left-right direction from the third flow path component 336), the sphere hides a sphere that is coming off the rear end of the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction.

  In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the positive change detection sensor SE11 or to the normal detection sensor SE12 can be determined by determining whether the flow direction of the ball has switched to the left or right outside at the rear end of the third flow path component 336. It is possible by visually recognizing it, and it is only necessary to pay attention to the inside of the third flow path component 336 and the vicinity of the right edge. In contrast, in the present embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path component 336 and the second flow path component 335 on the upstream side in the direction of the line of sight, the inside of the third flow path component 336 and the right The sphere is configured to be able to flow down along a path including the periphery (movement from the position of the sphere P1 to the position of the sphere P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the sphere flowing down the upstream side, a situation may occur in which it is difficult to grasp whether the sphere has flowed to the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

  Also, in the line of sight of FIG. 23, the sphere flowing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and the sphere flowing through the second flow path component 335 are clearly separated in the vertical direction, so that the upstream side It is easy to avoid the situation where the ball is blindfolded. On the other hand, as the vertical width of the flow path visually recognized at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is smaller, the area of the sphere that can be visually recognized in the direction is reduced.

  In particular, the sphere that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path component 336, once flowing down diagonally to the right, goes to the positive change detection sensor SE11 regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, as described above. The flow path is switched between the flow path and the flow path toward the normal detection sensor SE12. For this reason, the area of the sphere visually recognized at the switching position becomes smaller as compared with the case where the sphere flows downward just as the sphere flows downward or the direction in which the sphere flows downward is switched to the right.

  As another mode of switching, it is assumed that the switching position is located on the more upstream side, such as in the case where the flow path of the sphere flows down just below or when the ball switches to the right. For example, in a case where the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are not formed and the sphere heading toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 flows down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336, the switching position is at least the third flow path. The position is behind the center line of the component 336.

  On the other hand, when the switching position is displaced to the right from the rear of the center line of the third flow path component 336 as in the present embodiment, the sphere moves below the lower bottom of the third flow path component 336. By dropping (falling by the vertical difference between the upper surface of the lower bottom portion of the third flow path component 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), the sphere is added to the third flow path component 336 itself. In addition to the action of partially concealing the ball, the sphere is displaced to the left and right outside the range visually recognized through the third flow path component 336, so that the sphere is partially hidden by the front frame portion 333.

  Therefore, since the area of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 becomes visible from the viewpoint of the player, it becomes difficult to grasp which flow path the ball has flowed down. Become. Thereby, the attention power for the ball flowing down near the rear end of the third flow path component 336 can be further improved.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in a plurality of directional views (see FIGS. 22 and 23) described as directional views for identifying the flowing direction of the sphere flowing down the rear end of the third flow path component 336. Each has its strengths and weaknesses. Thereby, even if the method of visually recognizing the distribution device 300 is used, it is possible to allow the player to adjust and select a favorite visual recognition method, instead of requiring the player to perform a one-sided game, and to provide a wide variety of game modes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of playing the game.

  Although securing the player's view can be achieved by various methods, in the present embodiment, in particular, a gap is formed between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310, so that the third flow path component portion is formed. Since the roof 336 can be in a state where it has been removed, the third flow path component 336 can be easily viewed.

  22 and 23, the visibility on the front side of the distribution device 300 will be described. Although not shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 (see FIG. 5) are arranged on the front side of the distribution device 300, so that the light is transmitted depending on the thickness of the member. Since less light is emitted, the field of view is obstructed.

  23 can be more easily recognized in the direction view of FIG. 23 than in the direction view of FIG. 22 because the range in which the field of view is blocked by the front design member 162 is smaller than in the direction view of FIG. There is.

  The fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are basically formed in a flat shape as described above, and are configured so that refraction of light hardly occurs (see FIG. 12). This can prevent the visibility of the distribution device 300 from being deteriorated.

  The portion which cannot be formed into a flat shape in function is formed so as to have a small influence on visibility. For example, the protruding support portions 161c to 161e for positioning and engaging the distribution device 300 do not obstruct the player's line of sight facing obliquely downward, so that the player sees the flow path components 334 to 336. (Upper rear, left and right outer, left and right lower, etc.).

  Further, for example, the symmetrically protruding portion 161f is formed at the center height of the sphere, and is formed to be thin with a minimum thickness in terms of strength (see FIG. 18). Thereby, even if the symmetrically protruding portion 161f is disposed between the ball and the eyes of the player, it is possible to prevent the entire ball from being hidden, so that the ball flowing down the flow path forming portions 334 to 336. Visibility can be ensured.

  The sphere that has deviated from the specific winning opening 65 a flows down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, and flows down toward the out opening 71. The effect of the ball flowing down to the out port 71 on the field of view will be described.

  FIGS. 22 and 23 illustrate an example of the arrangement of the spheres flowing down to the out port 71 with the opening / closing plate 65b in the open state. While the opening / closing plate 65b is open, the ball flowing down from above the opening / closing plate 65b rides on the opening / closing plate 65b and is guided to the specific winning opening 65a side. The ball is deviated to the left and right of 65b. These balls flow down between the extending portion 162b and the extending portion 162c, and are guided by the inner rail 61 and flow down to the out port 71.

  As shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, in the player's eyes, the arrangement of the spheres flowing through the inner rail 61 is below the respective flow path components 334 to 336, so that the spheres flowing through the inner rail 61 cause the respective spheres to flow. The visibility of the ball flowing down the components 334 to 336 can be prevented from being reduced.

  On the other hand, the flow of the ball flowing down the inner rail 61 is, like the flow of the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335, a mode in which the ball flows at a gentle angle toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area. In the same manner as a ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335, an effect of guiding the line of sight of the player to the left and right center positions of the game area is exerted. This effect guides the player's line of sight to the out port 71 and also to the third flow path component 336. That is, since the left and right positions of the out port 71 and the third flow path forming portion 336 are set to the same position (left and right center position), the player moves his or her line of sight up and down, and the out port 71 and the third flow path. The gaze is guided to a state where both of the components 336 can be visually recognized.

  Therefore, the ball hitting toward the game area is likely to efficiently enter the specific winning opening 65a (whether there is little wasted ball during the jackpot game) or deviates from the extended portion 162b and the extended portion. The effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the third flow path component 336 by the flowing ball irrespective of whether the flowing ball between the ball and the ball 162c frequently occurs (whether the wasteful ball during the jackpot game frequently occurs). Can be played.

  That is, when the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the line of sight of the player can be guided to the third flow forming unit 336 in a state where the ball flows down the second flow forming unit 335, and the ball is moved to the specific winning opening 65a. In the case where the player deviates, the line of sight of the player can be guided to the third flow path component 336 while flowing down the inner rail 61.

  The ball heading to the out port 71 usually has no effect in the game as a useless ball, but in the present embodiment, by configuring as described above, the ball heading out port 71 To the third flow path component 336.

  In the closed state of the opening / closing plate 65b, the ball flows on the front side of the opening / closing plate 65b and passes through the front side of the second flow path forming section 335, so that the visibility of the second flow path forming section 335 can be reduced. There is.

  On the other hand, the second winning opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a are arranged above the left and right center position of the specific winning opening 65a, and the third flow path forming portion 336 is arranged below the left and right center position of the specific winning opening 65a. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down by the second winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a, so that the ball is prevented from flowing down on the front side of the third flow path forming portion 336. can do. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the visibility of the vicinity of the third flow path component 336 and its rear end portion is reduced by a ball flowing down the front side of the opening / closing plate 65b.

  In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be secured by the formation length of the flow path components 334 to 336. An attempt is made to avoid an increase in space. That is, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the player's eyes, the arrangement interval between the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 as a guide of the arrangement of the third flow path component 336. Are formed short.

  In addition, since the slide displacement member 370 is disposed below and behind the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), as shown in FIG. In this case, it is visually recognized that the slide displacement member 370 is disposed so close to the outer shape of the specific winning opening 65a as to bite.

  In addition, the flow path of the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a formed in the left and right elongated shape and has passed through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 disposed at the left and right ends thereof has a symmetrical flow path configuration. Through the parts 334 to 336, it is collected below the left and right central sides of the specific winning opening 65a. This makes it possible to shorten the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370, as compared to the case where the ball flows down the left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, since the structure required as the flow path of the sphere can be a structure in which the left and right lengths become shorter toward the lower side, it can be easily arranged near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61. it can.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, although the design concept is such that the specific winning opening 65a is disposed close to the out opening 71, the specific winning opening 65a does not have a structure in which a ball flows down directly from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path forming portion 335, but has a second flow path. By adopting a structure in which the ball flows down backward from the left and right inner ends of the flow path forming section 335 by the third flow path forming section 336, the out port 71 (disposed on the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface section 387). Opening) can be formed directly below the second flow path component 335. Thus, the vertical interval between the specific winning opening 65a and the out opening 71 is reduced.

  In this manner, the vertical winning width 65a and the slide displacing member 370 in the player's eyes can be reduced in the vertical arrangement width and the left and right width, so that in the design of the game area where the size in front view is limited to a certain standard, Since the vertical width of the area occupied by the winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

  For example, as in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a can be arranged near the lower end of the gaming area, so that the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in a symmetrical gaming area.

  Next, an example of the flow of the ball after entering the distribution device 300 and the operation pattern of the movable role (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) in consideration of the flow will be described.

  First, as a premise, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 flows down the first flow path forming section 334, the second flow path forming section 335, and the third flow path forming section 336 in order (see FIGS. 16 and 17). The time required for a sphere to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 can be set arbitrarily. In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 in about 0.3 seconds. Designed.

  That is, after entering the specific winning opening 65a, it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the first flow path component 334, 0.3 second to pass through the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path. It is configured so that it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the configuration unit 336.

  Therefore, even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a immediately after the opening and closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, the ball is disposed at the rear end of the third flow path forming unit 336 for 0.9 seconds. The configuration is such that the sphere does not reach the detected sensor SE1. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening / closing plate 65b is opened, the ball cannot pass through the position of the slide displacement member 370 and cannot pass through the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. The operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 can be designed without fear of erroneous winning of the ball.

  Therefore, for example, in order to prevent erroneous winning in the V winning sensor as generally seen in a pachinko machine equipped with a V-variable attacker, a control for releasing the opening / closing plate for a short time at the start of the round game R (the operation of the opening / closing plate is not possible). Control with naturalness) can be made unnecessary. Thereby, the operation mode of the opening and closing plate for opening and closing the specific winning opening becomes a natural operation, and it is possible to provide the player with an environment in which the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the pachinko machine provided with the V-variable attacker in the above example, a ball entering immediately after the V-variable attacker is opened tends to cause an erroneous prize, but in the variable prize device 65 of the present case, as will be described later, immediately after opening. On the contrary, since a favorable effect (for example, an effect of hiding the operation of the slide displacement member 370 with the ball) is generated by the entering ball, it is possible to eliminate the necessity for preventing the ball from entering immediately after opening. .

  The time required for the passage of the sphere can be arbitrarily set depending on the length and inclination of each of the flow path components 334 to 336, the shape of the inner wall of the flow path (smooth or irregular shape, etc.).

  The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main control device 110, and FIG. 24B schematically shows a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. FIG. 24C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the fixed value data, a first random number table 202a, a first random type selection table 202b, and a second random number table 202c are stored. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which a big hit determination value of a first hit random number counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is stored. When the value of the first random number counter acquired based on the winning start matches one of the determination values defined in the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24 (b)) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is the big hit type. , And the type of the winning opening that triggered the special symbol lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the winning start is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The big hit type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when a special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery (a lottery based on a ball entering the first winning opening 64), the value of the first hit type counter C2 falls within the range of “0 to 9”. Is defined in association with the jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24B).

  In the case of the jackpot A1, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  The jackpot A2 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “10 to 19” (see 202b2 in FIG. 24B).

  In the case of the jackpot A2, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  The jackpot B1 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “20 to 39” (see 202b3 in FIG. 24B).

  In the case of the jackpot B1, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  The jackpot B2 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “40 to 49” (see 202b4 in FIG. 24B).

  In the case of the jackpot B2, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  The jackpot C1 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “50 to 79” (see 202b5 in FIG. 24B).

  In the case of the jackpot C1, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  The jackpot C2 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “80 to 99” (see 202b6 in FIG. 24B).

  When the jackpot C2 is reached, the jackpot game of four rounds is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  As described above, in the case of a jackpot in a lottery of the special symbol 1 (a lottery based on a ball entering the first winning opening 64), in any case, a four-round jackpot game is selected. For this reason, it is not possible to expect a large amount of prize balls as compared with a case where a lottery is won in a lottery of a special symbol 2 described later. On the other hand, the four-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than the fifteen-round jackpot game, so that the launch of a ball aiming at the subsequent jackpot acquisition can be started earlier.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 is a lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second winning opening 140), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 99”, and the big hit is obtained. a is defined in association with each other (see 202b7 in FIG. 24B).

  When the jackpot a is reached, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 operates in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). It is controlled to be displaced.

  As described above, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entering the second winning opening 140), in any case, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is selected. Therefore, the player who wins the special symbol 2 lottery can obtain a larger amount of payout prize balls compared to the case where the special symbol 1 lottery is won. Motivation for performing a game for performing the second lottery (a game in which a ball is fired so as to enter the second winning port 140) can be increased.

  In addition, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed at the operation pattern X, there is little possibility that the disadvantage to the player will increase even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not secured. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern as an operation pattern which has a disadvantage that the visibility to the slide displacement member 370 is slightly deteriorated, but has an advantage that a ball can easily enter the specific winning opening 65a, the lottery of the special symbol 2 is performed. By setting the operation pattern of the jackpot variable prize device 65 in the third operation pattern, it is possible to reduce the influence of disadvantages and highlight only the advantage that the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened. .

  That is, the possibility that the jackpot game in the lottery of the special symbol 2 is prolonged can be reduced, so that a jackpot game that is comfortable for the player (the time efficiency of payout of prize balls is good) can be realized.

  In addition, the setting of the jackpot type of the special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, as the jackpot type of the special symbol 2, a jackpot type in which the slide displacement member 370 is displacement-controlled by the operation pattern Y may be provided. The jackpot type may be provided in a small ratio (for example, about 20%).

  Accordingly, the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370 can be improved, so that it is possible to prevent the player from playing the jackpot game casually. That is, the player can visually recognize the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370, disappoint the player at the timing of the displacement operation, and enhance the interest of the player.

  As described above, during the probable change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a in the case of the hit of the normal symbol is increased. It is set to be longer (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 140, so that the lottery of the special symbol 2 is easily performed. Therefore, once the special symbol can be shifted to the certainty change state, the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot, and when the jackpot is obtained, the special symbol is easily changed to the jackpot a (a jackpot with a good profit balance). This makes it easier for the player to obtain a large amount of prize balls. This allows the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the certain symbol change state, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 24 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 24C). In addition, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as the determination value to be the hit of the ordinary symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 24C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, referring to the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning opening 67 and the second random number table 202c, and win the normal symbol hit. Is determined. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is specified for each display mode.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the time change of the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 in the first round and the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 in each jackpot type.

  When the big hit is determined in the special figure hit determination, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) starts controlling the big hit game (of the determined type) after the end of the special figure change display (symbol change effect). Hereinafter, the operation control of the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 performed when the big hit game is provided will be described. In the description of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 is appropriately referred to.

  In this control example, the driving mode differs only in the first round due to the difference in the jackpot type, and the driving mode is the same in the second and subsequent rounds. Therefore, the driving mode of the first round for each jackpot type will be described.

  In the case of the jackpot A1 or the jackpot A2, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to hold the open / close plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. , And after the elapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state where a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so that the opening operation for 0.2 seconds is performed at 1.0 second intervals, and the opening / closing plate 65b operates for a long time.

  In addition, the initial opening time is longer than a period in which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game balls are continuously fired, and a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls is used. The period is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, a round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of winning a pachinko ball) ) Is satisfied, the open / close plate 65b is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so as to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R is completed.

  The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set in order to limit the number of balls entering one side of the specific winning opening 65a to one while the opening / closing plate 65b is opened. This is a setting of an opening time for preventing a plurality of balls from continuously entering the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a (hereinafter, also referred to as “balls with open balls”). It is not intended to limit the number of balls to one. That is, even if the opening time is 0.2 seconds, the ball reaches one ball at each of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a, and the ball may enter the specific winning opening 65a at once.

  In the case of the jackpot A1, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the open / close plate 65b. In the present embodiment, at the same time as the open / close plate 65b is displaced to the open state, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position. Drive control is performed so as to be displaced to the rear side position.

  Therefore, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 19), passes through the front side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the certainty detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 20). .

  At this time, since the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on one side is limited to one, the visibility of other balls is not reduced. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  In the case of the jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the open / close plate 65b. In the present embodiment, at the same time as the open / close plate 65b is displaced to the open state, the slide displacement member 370 is moved from the front position. The drive control is performed so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position after 0.8 seconds have elapsed.

  As described above, the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17) is set to about 0.9 seconds. The slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position.

  Therefore, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17), passes over the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17). .

  At this time, since the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on one side is limited to one, the visibility of other balls is not reduced. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes the normal detection sensor SE12.

  The concept that 0.8 seconds as the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is shorter than the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336, It is set from the idea of a time longer than the time required to reach 336.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, the ball passes through the second flow path component 335 and reaches the third flow path component 336 approximately 0.6 seconds after the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. Even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of 0.2 seconds as the opening time of the opening / closing plate 65b, the sliding displacement member is not moved until the ball reaches the third flow path forming portion 336. 370 can be displaced.

  Therefore, as long as the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball arranged in the third flow path forming portion 336 regardless of the ball entry timing ( See FIG. 22). Thereby, the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be prevented from being conspicuous, and the attention force on the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 as the ball entering the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Can be improved.

  The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, since the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be generated before the ball reaches the third flow path forming portion 336, the possibility of the line of sight being blocked by the ball is low, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is reduced. Can be visually recognized by the player.

  However, even in this case, since the second flow path forming portion 335 is arranged close to the front plate portion of the fixed member 161 and is arranged on the front side of the slide displacement member 370, the player's eyes Are easily collected on the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. That is, by displacing the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 (for example, by displaying “attention to the flowing sphere!” On the third symbol display device 81), the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is changed. Can be easily prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is configured to be divided at the center on the left and right, if the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is on one side of the left or right, the ball is generated. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized by observing the rear side of the third flow path component 336 on the other side (see FIG. 22) without being blocked by the flowing ball.

  As described above, in the case of the jackpots A1 and A2, the number of spheres arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is limited to one, so that attention to the spheres is improved. In addition to the above, it is possible for the player to easily recognize whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

  In the case of the jackpot B1 or the jackpot B2, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to hold the open / close plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. , And after the elapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state where a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 second. In the second operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so that the opening operation for 1.0 second is performed at 1.0 second intervals, and the opening / closing plate 65b is operated for a long time.

  In addition, the initial opening time is longer than a period in which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a when the game balls are continuously fired, and a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of game balls is used. The period is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, a round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of winning a pachinko ball) ) Is satisfied, the open / close plate 65b is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so as to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R is completed.

  The opening time of 1.0 second in the second operation pattern is set as a time during which a plurality of balls can enter the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a while the opening and closing plate 65b is open. This is a setting of an open time for allowing a plurality of balls to enter the ball continuously on one side of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a (hereinafter, also referred to as “ball entry with a ball”).

  In the present control example, the interval between the launches of the spheres is set to 0.6 seconds. Therefore, even if the interval between the spheres of the sphere does not change from that at the time of launch, the opening / closing plate 65b is opened once in 1.0 second. In the meantime, two balls can enter the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening / closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 second, the next ball is connected to each of the flow path components 334 before two balls pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336. Entering 球 336 can be regulated.

  In the case of the jackpot B1, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. In the case of the big hit B2, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the big hit B1, the sphere that has passed through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 passes through the positive change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the big hit B2, the sphere that has passed through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is the normal detection sensor SE12. Pass through.

  At this time, the appearance of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is different between the case where one sphere is disposed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides and the case where there are two (or more) spheres. When one ball is arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, similarly to the case of the big hits A1 and A2, the visibility of the other balls is not reduced. The person can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  On the other hand, when two (or more) balls are arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the upstream ball is arranged on the line of sight of the player who views the downstream ball. Thus, the visibility of the ball on the downstream side may be reduced. Therefore, the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can improve the attention power of the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336. .

  In the case of the jackpot C1, the jackpot C2, or the jackpot a, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening / closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to hold the open / close plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. , And after the elapse of the opening time OP, the first round game R is started.

  That is, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state where a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a. The open / close plate 65b is operated for a long period of time up to the operation time T1.

  Then, in the first round of the round game R, a round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) of winning a pachinko ball) ) Is satisfied, the open / close plate 65b is displaced to the closed state to drive and control the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so as to close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round game R is completed.

  In the present control example, the open / close plate 65b maintains the open state during the first round of the round game R, so that a situation may occur in which a plurality of balls enter the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a with a ball. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening / closing plate 65b is not limited, unlike the second operation pattern, before the two spheres pass through the respective flow path components 334 to 336, the next spheres The ball may enter the flow path components 334 to 336. Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, the visibility of the sphere arranged on the downstream side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is higher in the third operation pattern than in the sphere arranged on the upstream side. It is easy for the situation to drop.

  In the case of the jackpot C1 or the jackpot a, the MPU 201 controls the drive of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. In the case of the big hit C2, the MPU 201 controls the driving of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the jackpot C1 or the jackpot a, the sphere that has passed through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 passes through the positive change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the jackpot C2, the sphere that has passed through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 It passes through the detection sensor SE12.

  As described above, the control mode is such that the open / close plate 65b is maintained in the open state regardless of whether the ball is passed through the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. Since the time required for the arrival is controlled from the structure, the possibility of the malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 due to the biting of the ball can be eliminated.

  At this time, the appearance of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is different depending on whether one sphere is disposed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on one side of the left and right sides. When one ball is arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, similarly to the case of the big hits A1 and A2, the visibility of the other balls is not reduced. The person can easily visually recognize the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  On the other hand, when two balls are arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the upstream ball is arranged on the line of sight of the player watching the downstream ball, so that the downstream ball is arranged. The visibility of the ball on the side may decrease. Therefore, the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can improve the attention power of the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336. .

  In the third operation pattern, there is no restriction on the timing at which the specific winning port 65a can be pitched in the first round of the round game R. Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, each of the flow path components 334 to 336 The arrangement of the spheres tends to be disorderly. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is likely to decrease.

  On the other hand, the fact that there is no restriction on the timing at which a ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a has an effect that the progress of the round game R can be performed early. That is, the specified number of balls as the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls). It is easy to satisfy the winning at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being delayed.

  In particular, since the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled in the operating pattern X with a probability of 100% at the special symbol 2 jackpot, if the ball is inserted into the specific winning opening 65a, the ball will pass through the positive change detection sensor SE11. Has been promised. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the slide displacement member 370 is initially low.

  Therefore, even if the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, while the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, priority is given to avoiding the prolongation of the jackpot game, thereby realizing the progress of the jackpot game in a short time. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

  Regardless of the jackpot type, when the first round of the round game R is completed, the timer means controls the electromagnetic solenoid to hold the opening / closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. 165c is driven and controlled, and after a lapse of the first interval time Int1 between rounds, a round game R of the second round is started.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the opening / closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to the open state to thereby specify the special winning opening. The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to open the opening 65a, and the opening / closing plate 65b operates for a long time. After the second round, since the slide displacement member 370 is always maintained at the front position, the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a is discharged through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17).

  Then, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (the maximum value of the first operation time T1 of 30 seconds) or winning of the specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied in the second round of the round game R, The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so as to close the specific winning opening 65a by displacing the opening / closing plate 65b to the closed state, and the second round game R is completed.

  Thereafter, as in the second round, the round game R of the third round to the final round (the fourth round) is repeated with the first inter-round interval Int1 interposed between the round game Rs, and the open / close plate 65b Is displaced between the closed state and the open state, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

  When the round game R of the last round is completed, the timer means drives the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so as to hold the open / close plate 65b in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. The big hit game ends with the elapse of the time.

  In the present control example, the case where the short opening movement of the opening / closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are executed only in the first round is not limited to this. For example, it may be executed in all rounds, or may be executed in rounds other than the first round (for example, the third round, the eighth round, the twelfth round, etc.).

  As described above, according to this control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening / closing plate 65b is changed by the difference in the opening pattern (first operation pattern to third operation pattern) of the opening / closing plate 65b, and each flow is changed. The visibility of the detection sensors SE1 disposed downstream of the road components 334 to 336 and the third flow channel components 336 can be made different. Thereby, the player who pays attention to the passage of the ball of the detection sensor SE1 arranged downstream of the third flow path component 336 can be motivated to devise the manner of firing the ball.

  For example, since the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may be reduced when a plurality of spheres are simultaneously arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336, if necessary (for example, the second operation pattern or By intentionally increasing the firing interval of the sphere (in the jackpot type of the third operation pattern), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1. In the first operation pattern, since the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a is restricted, a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 can be avoided regardless of the firing mode.

  On the other hand, if the firing interval of the balls is increased, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a is extended, so that the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can select a game mode of the round game R in a game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and in a game mode in which avoidance of the round game R is avoided.

  For example, in order to visually recognize the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, a certain period of time (for example, 1.0 second) is left after the start of the round game R so that a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a. Is also good. In this case, a situation in which a ball is arranged in the third flow path forming unit 336 at the timing when the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 occurs (in the case of the operation pattern Y, 0.8 seconds after the start of the round game R) is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 from being interrupted by the ball.

  On the other hand, if a period until the launch of the ball is provided, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a is extended, so that the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can select a game mode of the round game R in a game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and in a game mode in which avoidance of the round game R is avoided.

  For example, according to the present embodiment, each of the flow path components 334 to 336 and the slide displacement member 370 are configured to be symmetrical left and right, and a ball can be made to enter from the right or left side through the specific winning opening 65a.

  That is, for example, the above-described launch mode for extending the launch interval of the ball and the launch mode for leaving a period until the launch of the ball are maintained in the left-side ball entry, and the ball on the right side in the arbitrary launch mode is maintained. Even if the game is fired, the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Specifically, as a launch mode in which the launch of the ball toward the specific winning opening 65a is divided into right and left, at least the first ball is fired to the right, and the number of balls (for example, the second) To the left and the remaining balls to the right.

  In this case, by not paying attention to the sphere flowing down the right flow path as each of the flow path components 334 to 336, paying attention to the sphere flowing down the left flow path, it is possible to prevent the line of sight from being blocked by other spheres. Meanwhile, it can be visually recognized whether or not the sphere flowing down the left flow path passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11. In addition, in this case, since the ball is continuously fired toward the right portion of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid extending the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to prevent the round game R from being delayed.

  It should be noted that the distinction of the launching of the ball to the left and right is not intended to make one ball entering the left channel. In particular, it is sufficient that the number of spheres arranged in each of the left flow path components 334 to 336 can be limited to one in about 0.9 seconds until the number of spheres passes through the left flow path. In the above, it is only necessary to hit the ball so as to arbitrarily enter the left and right flow paths.

  Accordingly, when the opening width above the specific winning opening 65a is not long as in the present embodiment (for example, the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a or the arrangement of the nails (see FIG. 2), the entry path of the ball is a small number of paths. ), It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls heading toward the specific winning opening 65a collide with each other and one of the balls falls to the left and right outside of the specific winning opening 65a. In FIG. 2, the nail arrangement is asymmetrical in the left and right directions, but may be a symmetrical nail arrangement.

  Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is a unit fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the rear side.

  FIG. 26 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 500, and FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit 500. In FIG. 27, the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) provided in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is not shown, and the rear side is visible through the opening 511a. In the description of FIGS. 26 and 27, FIG. 2 is appropriately referred to.

  The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape having a front side opened from a bottom wall 511 and an outer wall 512 erected from an outer edge of the bottom wall 511. The rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in a front view).

  The rear case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall portion 512, and faces the game board 13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 2). A supporting plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

  The support plate portion 513 has a positioning protrusion 513a projecting toward the front side in a shape fittable with a fitting concave portion (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and a base plate 60. And a plurality of insertion holes 513b formed so as to be able to insert a fastening screw to be fastened.

  The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning projections 513a into the fitting recesses of the base plate 60, and fastening screws are inserted into the insertion holes 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

  The shape of the positioning projection 513a is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in the present embodiment) of the fitting concave portion of the base plate 60 may be used, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having a smaller shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. When the inner shape of the fitting concave portion is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is correspondingly formed in a rectangular shape.

  The operation unit 500 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, a first operation unit 600 disposed on the right inside of the rear case 510, a second operation unit 700 disposed on the lower inside of the rear case 510, And a third operation unit 800 disposed on the upper inside of the rear case 510. In addition, a substrate having a light emitting means such as an LED and a substrate having a light emitting means, such as an LED, are disposed on the inner left side of the rear case 510 so as to cover the substrate from the front side, and are formed of a light transmissive material, and light diffusion processing is performed entirely. The diffusion decoration plate LB1 to be formed is provided.

  Specifically, the first operation unit 600 is located at a position to the right of the opening 511a, the second operation unit 700 is located at a position below the opening 511a, and the third operation unit 800 is located at a position above the opening 511a. It is arranged on the bottom wall 511 of the case 510. First, an outline of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

  28 to 35 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of the operation of the operation unit 500. FIG. 28 illustrates the operation units 600 to 800 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 29 illustrates a state in which the first operation unit 600 changes from the effect standby state of each of the operation units 600 to 800 to the extended state. FIG. 30 illustrates a state in which the second operation unit 700 has changed from the effect standby state of each of the operation units 600 to 800 to the extended state.

  In FIG. 30, the second operation unit 700 is illustrated in a state where the surface facing the front side of the covering member 787 is different from the second operation unit 700 illustrated in FIG.

  28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is illustrated by imaginary lines. On the inside, the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side can be viewed well, but outside the center frame 86, it can be said that the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin member. In addition, the field of view is easily blocked by nails provided on the base plate 60, various winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., through gates 67, etc. (see FIG. 2). Thus, for example, in a state where the operation units 600 to 800 are arranged outside the center frame 86 as shown in FIG.

  In addition, although the frame shape of the center frame 86 is different from that of the center frame 86 shown in FIG. 2 in relation to the configuration of the operation unit 500, its role is the same. In addition, although the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 has a curved shape that protrudes downward on the front side of the third operation unit 800, the center frame 86 does not curve downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86, On the inner frame side of 86, a circular transparent decorative thin plate is formed so as to protrude so as to cover the third operation unit 800 from the front side. Therefore, the role of rolling the ball on the upper side of the center frame 86 to the left and right sides is also the same as that shown in FIG. 2, and the upper part of the center frame 86 (the upper part of the outer frame) is the third operation. The unit 800 is disposed so as to straddle the upper side of the unit 800 from side to side.

  FIGS. 31 and 32 illustrate a state in which the third operation unit 800 has changed from the effect standby state of each of the operation units 600 to 800 to the overhang state. In FIG. 31, the first decoration member 870 faces the front side, and the individual operation state of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated. In FIG. 32, the second decoration member 880 faces the front side, and a series of the third operation unit 800 is arranged. The united state is illustrated.

  Since the displacement in which the state of FIG. 31 and the state of FIG. 32 are switched occurs in a displacement mode in which the linear motion displacement and the rotational displacement are combined, when executed in the effect standby state of the third operation unit 800, the surrounding decoration members and Since the decorative members 870 and 880 collide with each other and cause a problem, the third operation unit 800 is executed in the extended state.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state (or in a state in which the third operation unit 800 is displaced downward from the effect standby state by a degree sufficient to avoid collision of the decorative members 870 and 880), and the decorative member Assuming that the displacement of 870 and 880 is allowed in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) performs the reverse displacement (switching rotation operation). It is controlled, but details will be described later.

  FIG. 33 shows the third operation unit 800 in the overhang state and the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state slightly displaced from the overhang state, and FIG. 34 shows the first operation unit from the state of FIG. FIG. 35 illustrates a state in which the third operating unit 800 is displaced from the state of FIG. 33 to the effect standby state, and a state in which the first operating unit 600 is displaced to the extended state. Illustrated.

  As illustrated in FIGS. 28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third operation unit 800 partially overlaps the displacement trajectory of the first operation unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second operation unit 700 in a front view. Therefore, for example, if the first operation unit 600 or the second operation unit 700 changes state from the effect standby state while the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), a collision may occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the effect standby state is controlled to be executable on condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, or the third operation By controlling the state change of the unit 800 from the effect standby state to be executable on condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state, the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 It is possible to avoid overlapping in a front view. Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 can be improved (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the state change of the second operation unit 700 to the overhang state is controlled to be executable on condition that the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in the effect standby state, By changing the arrangement of the second operation unit 700 when the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state to the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33), the second operation unit 700 is in front of the other operation units 600 and 800. It is possible to avoid overlapping visually. Therefore, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the operation units 600 to 800 can be improved (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

  In particular, as the visual recognition state of the second operation unit 700, there are a plurality of cases in which the second operation unit 700 is visually recognized in a protruding state closer to the opening 511a, and a case in which the second operation unit 700 is slightly retreated from the opening 511a but is closely disposed to the third operation unit 800. By configuring the state, the function of the second operation unit 700 as an effect device is improved.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the first operation unit 600 is displaced on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. The second decorative rotation member 660 of the first operation unit 600 includes a box-shaped member 661 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The box-shaped member 661 has a first effect surface 661a facing obliquely leftward in the effect standby state, and a first effect thereof. A second effect surface 661b formed on the back side of the surface 661a, and a third effect surface 661c as a surface adjacent to the first effect surface 661a and the second effect surface 661b are provided. Each of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c is arbitrarily decorated with figures, patterns, characters, and the like.

  In the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is disposed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, where visibility from the front side is likely to decrease due to the arrangement of the center frame 86. However, since the first presentation surface 661a is inclined obliquely toward the player (the front surface is inclined 45 degrees toward the arrow L with respect to the arrow FB), the third effect surface 661a is oriented in the third direction. From the inside of the frame of the opening of the symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86, the first decorative rotation member 660 is visually recognized in a diagonal direction passing through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 in the player's eyes. The visibility of the presentation surface 661a can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the extended state of the first operation unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 extends to the front of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player who visually recognizes the inside of the frame of the center frame 86 can be displayed. Face to face. In this case, since the second decorative rotation member 660 is in a posture in which the second production rotation surface 661b faces directly in front, the visibility of the second production surface 661b in the eyes of the player who visually recognizes the second decoration rotation member 660. Can be improved.

  As described above, the second decoration rotating member 660 is configured to be able to switch the effect surfaces 661a to 661c to be visually recognized by the player according to the arrangement, and to increase the visibility of each effect surface 661a to 661c to be visually recognized by the player. For the purpose of improvement, the posture can be switched according to the arrangement.

  In other words, it is designed not only to change the attitude in a plane parallel to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), but also to change the angle intended to be related to the player's line of sight. That is, since the player's line of sight is more frontward and rearward as the arrangement is closer to the center of the frame of the center frame 86, it is possible to improve the visibility by directing the production surface in the forward direction (the direction of arrow F). Therefore, the player's line of sight tends to be inclined as the arrangement becomes closer to the frame of the center frame 86, so that the visibility can be improved by making the presentation surface inclined to face the line of sight.

  With the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660, the overhang decorative portion 652b is displaced in conjunction with it. The overhanging decorative portion 652b has a decoration such as a figure or a pattern on the front of the board, and in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 34) of the first operation unit 600, the rear case 510 is not provided. By being arranged in the upper right corner, it is hidden so as not to be visually recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, when the first operation unit 600 is in the overhang state (see FIG. 28), the overhang decorative portion 652 b of the center frame 86 is overlapped with the right edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in front and back. It is configured such that a player can visually recognize it by being arranged inside the frame.

  In this state, the outer right end of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is located on the right side of the right edge of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, using the decoration on the front of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, it is possible to perform a display effect that gives an illusion to the player as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is enlarged.

  More specifically, the right edge of the area where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized is defined by the first operation unit 600, and the second decorative rotating member is in the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600. The left edge of the first presentation surface 661a at 660 substantially coincides with the region right end RE1 of the region where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized.

  On the other hand, in the overhang state of the first operation unit 600, the overhang decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to extend beyond the region right end RE1 to the right. Therefore, by associating or matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the decoration of the front of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 becomes the right end RE1 of the region. Can be visually recognized as if the player is expanding beyond. Thereby, a surprising effect can be realized.

  As an example of matching the above display and decoration, for example, a polka dot pattern is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a decoration on the plate front of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is set to the same polka dot pattern, A typeface similar to the typeface of a number (for example, a number for notifying the success or failure of a lottery) variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a certain number is written on the front side of the board of the overhang decorative portion 652b. An example in which this is done is illustrated.

  As an example of associating the above-described display with the decoration, for example, six of the seven colors forming the rainbow are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the front of the overhanging decorative portion 652b remains. Or a wooden stick arranged so that the right end is aligned with the right end RE1 of the region on the third symbol display device 81, and a flame is imitated on the plate front of the overhanging decorative portion 652b. An example in which the decoration is performed and the ignition is associated with the extended state of the first operation unit 600 is illustrated.

  The effect of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to one type. By controlling the brightness of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, a plurality of types of effecting modes can be configured. The light emitting means for changing the brightness of the portion 652b will be described later.

  Further, by disposing a small liquid crystal device having a display surface on the front side instead of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in a plurality of types. It is possible to prevent the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 from being restricted when the display area is enlarged.

  In addition, the target associated with the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to the display, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on the member (for example, the covering member 787) of the second operation unit 700. The decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the decoration (the decoration of the first covering portion 875 and the second covering) formed on the members (for example, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880) of the third operation unit 800. (Decoration of the setting part 885).

  FIG. 36 is a front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600. The first operation unit 600 is configured in a complicated displacement mode in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its posture, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotating member 650 is changed to the second decorative rotating member 660. , The player can visually recognize different appearances before and after the displacement.

  FIG. 38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the first operation unit 600 includes a fixed unit 610 fastened and fixed to the rear case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed unit 610, A drive transmitting device 630 for transmitting a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620, a supported member 640 having one end rotatably supported at a rotating distal end of the rotating member 620; A first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably disposed at the other end of the supported member 640, a second decorative rotating member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotating member 650, A decorative fixing member 670 fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixed means 610.

  The fixed means 610 includes a base member 611 which is disposed facing the bottom wall 511 of the back case 510 in a front-rear direction, and a base member 611 which is disposed on the front side of the base member 611 and forms a space between the base member 611 and the base member 611. And a front lid member 612 fastened and fixed to the front cover member.

  The front lid member 612 includes a transmission arrangement portion 613 for disposing the drive transmission device 630, a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613, and a fixing portion 614. A support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 inside the portion 614 and a guide elongated hole 616 formed as an elongated hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640. Prepare.

  The guide slot 616 is formed from a unique shape in which a straight portion and a curved portion are mixed, and details and operation thereof will be described later.

  The rotating member 620 is disposed at one end (lower end) of the main body 621 formed in a long plate shape, and is externally supported by the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610. A cylindrical portion 622, a transmission elongated hole 623 formed in a middle portion of the main body 621 as an elongated hole extending in a linear direction, and an axial direction of the cylindrical portion 622 at the other end (upper end) of the main body 621. A circular through hole 624 formed as a circular hole in a drilling direction parallel to the above, and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in a gear tooth shape along a part of a circle centered on the circular through hole 624. Prepare.

  A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the cylindrical portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured such that one arm portion is in contact with the side wall of the main body portion 621 and the other arm portion is in contact with the projection of the front lid member 612, and the direction in which the rotating member 620 is raised (front side). A biasing force is generated in the clockwise direction).

  In the shaft support of the cylindrical portion 622, a fastening screw is screwed into a female screw portion formed at the distal end of the support fastening portion 615 in a state where the support fastening portion 615 is inserted through the cylindrical portion 622. You. Thus, the rotating member 620 is supported by the support fastening portion 615 so as not to fall off.

  The transmission long hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed. However, details will be described later.

  The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened and fixed to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft protruding to the rear side through the through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, A transmission gear 633 pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 613b of the front cover member 612 in a state meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 613c of the front cover member 612 while meshing with the transmission gear 633. 634.

  In a state where the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c are inserted through the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, a fastening screw is screwed into a female screw portion formed at a distal end portion of the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c. As a result, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are pivotally supported by the front lid member 612 so as not to fall off.

  The front lid member 612 is formed with an arc-shaped hole 613d penetratingly formed along an arc centered on the cylindrical portion 613c, and the arc-shaped hole 613d is located on the front side at the eccentric position of the transmission gear cam 634. A cylindrical portion 634a protruding in a cylindrical shape is inserted through.

  The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member including a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633. The transmission gear cam 634 extends from the angular position including the cylindrical portion 634a in a plate shape in an outer radial direction from an angular position including the cylindrical portion 634a. Setting part 634b.

  The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d, and is inserted into the transmission elongated hole 623 of the rotating member 620 on the front side. Here, the widths of the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 are designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. Thereby, the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides in the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced.

  The extension 634b is configured to be able to enter a detection groove of a photocoupler type detection sensor KS1 fastened and fixed to the front lid member 612. Thus, by reading a change in the output of the detection sensor KS1, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can comprehend the attitude of the transmission gear cam 634.

  The supported member 640 includes a long main body 641, a cylindrical portion 642 protruding from the rear side of the main body 641 and having a cylindrical cross-section that can be inserted into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620. A tubular portion 643 protruding in parallel with the tubular portion 642, and an intermediate gear 644 formed to be meshable with the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 while being supported by the tubular portion 643. A bottomed tubular portion 645 formed in a large-diameter tubular shape having a perforated bottom portion behind the intermediate gear 644, and an end opposite to the end where the bottomed tubular portion 645 is disposed. And an extension support portion 646 extending to the front side in the portion.

  With the above-described configuration, a driving force can be transmitted between the gear teeth 625 and the intermediate gear 644 by meshing with the rotation displacement of the rotation member 620.

  In a state where the tubular portions 642 and 643 are inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, a fastening screw is screwed into a female screw portion formed at a distal end portion of the tubular portions 642 and 643. Thus, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are supported by the main body 641 of the supported member 640 so as not to fall off.

  The bottomed cylindrical portion 645 has a bottom rear surface located close to the front edge of the front lid member 612, and the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 654 a of the first decorative rotating member 650 can mesh with each other on the front front surface of the bottom portion. And an insertion hole 645b that is formed in a circular shape centered on the center of the cylinder and that can be inserted through the cylindrical support portion 651a. The details of the shape will be described later.

  The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decorative rotation member 660, and details thereof will be described later.

  The first decorative rotation member 650 includes a main body member 651 forming a rotation axis orthogonal to the first rotation member 650, a front rotation member 652 supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, and a front rotation member 652. An illumination board 653 fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b and provided with light emitting means such as an LED on the front side; a rear rotation member 654 coaxially fixed to the front rotation member 652 and fixed to the rear side; A wiring receiving member 655 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 651 from the front side to form a cylindrical space as a wiring passage, and a fastening screw that is disposed on the front side of the wiring receiving member 655 and inserted through the main body member 651 from the rear side. It includes a front decorative portion 656 that is fastened and fixed by being screwed in, and a shaft right-angle rotating member 657 that is externally fitted to and supported by a cylindrical portion formed by the wiring receiving member 655 and the main body member 651.

  The main body member 651 is provided with a cylindrical support portion 651a extending in a tubular shape on the back side. The cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female screw portions 651b formed at a position of the diameter of the distal end portion. On one side of a plane passing through the portion 651b, there is provided a cutout portion 651c cut out so as to reduce the wall portion.

  The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed to have a thickness through which electric wiring can be inserted, and the cutout portion 651c has a function as an opening for securing an entrance of the electric wiring.

  The cylindrical support portion 651a includes a center hole of the front rotation member 652, a center hole of the rear rotation member 654, an insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, a stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and a front lid in this order from the base end side. The fastening screw inserted through the long guide hole 616 of the member 612 and the female screw portion 651b at the distal end thereof is screwed into the female screw portion C2 to be fastened and fixed.

  That is, the above-described cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotation member 652, the rear rotation member 654, the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the collar C1, and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 are coaxially supported by the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction, and are guided. It is configured to be displaceable along the long hole 616.

  The dish-shaped lid portion C2 has an opening C2a formed in a part of a circumferential portion thereof. In the assembled state, the opening C2a is arranged to face the notch portion 651c of the main body member 651, thereby providing a path for electric wiring. To form

  A part of the electric wiring passes through the inside of the rotation member 657 at right angles to the shaft and is guided into the inside of the second decoration rotation member 660, and the terminal is connected to a connector provided on the electric decoration board 662. Further, other wiring is formed on a gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (on the upper side, that is, on the side opposite to the main body member 651 on the upper and lower sides of the semi-cylindrical portion 655a). The terminal passes through the gap) and is guided behind the overhanging decorative portion 652b, and the terminal is connected to the connector of the illuminated board 653.

  The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference at the rear side end, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed so as to mesh with each other. The gear teeth 654a are formed along a part of the circumference, not the entire circumference, as an arrangement sufficient for the operation described later.

  The front rotating member 652 includes gear teeth 652a formed as bevel gears, and a projecting decorative portion 652b that protrudes radially outward. An illuminated board 653 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the overhanging decorative section 652b, and an effect of lighting or blinking the overhanging decorative section 652b with light from a light emitting unit arranged on the illuminated board 653 is executed. It is possible.

  Since the front rotation member 652 is fastened and fixed to the rear rotation member 654, the rear rotation member 654 and the front rotation member 652 rotate integrally.

  The shaft perpendicular rotation member 657 is rotatably supported by a circular cylindrical portion formed by the half cylindrical shape portion 651d of the main body member 651 and the half cylindrical shape portion 655a of the wiring receiving member 655, and the gear of the front rotary member 652. It has gear teeth 657a formed as bevel gears that can mesh with the teeth 652a.

  With such a configuration, the shaft perpendicular rotation member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotation member 652. That is, the front rotation member 652, the rear rotation member 654, and the shaft right-angle rotation member 657 are linked, but the operation will be described later in detail. The gear teeth 652a and 657a are formed along a part of the circumference, not the entire circumference, as an arrangement sufficient for the operation described later.

  The second decorative rotation member 660 includes a box-shaped member 661 fastened and fixed to the axis perpendicular rotation member 657, an electric decoration board 662 fixed to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a box-shaped member 661. And a wiring fastening plate 663 which is disposed between the rotating member 657 and the right-angle rotation member 657 and is fastened and fixed to the distal ends of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

  In the present embodiment, the decoration board 662 is also rotationally displaced with the rotation of the box-shaped member 661 described later. Therefore, when being guided by the connector of the decoration board 662, the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are Where there is a possibility that the electric wiring passing between them may be twisted or the arrangement may be disordered, the function of the wiring retaining plate 663 having a through hole for temporarily retaining the wiring may cause twisting or disorder of the wiring. To avoid being placed in

  In the present embodiment, since the electric wiring is fixed to the electric decoration board 662, it is inevitable that the electric wiring is twisted. On the other hand, since the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not caused by one or more rotations, but is a rotational displacement that is reversed at a rotation angle of 135 degrees, an excessive load is imposed on the electric wiring, The situation in which the wiring is cut off can be avoided.

  The second decorative rotation member 660 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is configured to be rotatable around a rotation axis (a rotation axis formed by the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a) parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side surface having the longest side. You.

  The shaft perpendicular rotation member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so that the wiring retaining plate 663 functions as a stopper and does not fall off. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the shaft right-angle rotating member 657, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the second decorative rotating member 660 comes off the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

  The illuminated substrate 662 is disposed so that the thickness direction of the plate and the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661 match. On the side surface in the thickness direction of the illuminated substrate 662, the first effect surface 661a is illuminated by a light emitting unit such as an LED arranged on the front side and having an optical axis oriented in the thickness direction, and arranged on the back side and oriented in the thickness direction. The second effect surface 661b is illuminated by light emitting means such as an LED, and the third effect surface 661c is illuminated by light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the back side (the side illuminating the second effect surface 661b) and having an optical axis directed in the width direction. It is.

  As described above, the light emitting means arranged on the illumination board 662 functions to individually illuminate each of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c, but the LED illuminating the third effect surface 661c is on the back side (the second effect surface 661b is not illuminated). By arranging the second production surface 661b on the front side (extending state of the first operation unit 600), the third production surface 661c (surface facing upward) is illuminated by being disposed on the front side. When the LED emits light, the second effect surface 661b can be illuminated by light traveling at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

  That is, unlike the case where the LEDs are arranged behind the illuminated substrate 662, it is possible to prevent the light from being hidden by the illuminated substrate 662, so that the second illuminating surface 661b is illuminated by the light illuminating the third illuminating surface 661c. Can also be illuminated. This makes it possible to increase the number of types of presentation modes that illuminate the second presentation surface 661b, and to improve the brightness of the second presentation surface 661b during a light emission presentation.

  The decoration fixing member 670 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material so that characters and figures for decoration can be visually recognized by a player, and includes an illumination substrate 671 that irradiates light diagonally left forward from the back side. . The arrangement of the decoration fixing member 670 is fixed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, and the line of sight of the player with respect to the decoration fixing member 670 is always a line of sight inclined obliquely to the right. That is, by inclining the direction of the light emitted from the electric decoration board 671 to the left, it is possible to irradiate the light on the side where the eyes of the player are easily arranged.

  The decoration fixing member 670 has a lower edge portion and a right edge portion which are raised on the rear side, and a front-rear gap is formed between the upper edge portion and the left edge portion and the front lid member 612. The front and rear gap functions as a gap that passes when the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced.

  40 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the effect standby state, FIG. 41 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 42 is a view in the direction of the arrow XLII in FIG. FIG. 10 is a side view of the first operation unit 600. Note that, for easy understanding of the shape, illustration of the base member 611 (see FIG. 38) and the fastening screws is omitted.

  In the effect standby state, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (for example, parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission elongated hole 623. Thereby, the displacement resistance at the time of starting displacement while the cylindrical portion 634a slides on the transmission slot 623 can be reduced. That is, at the start of the displacement, the assistance of the inertia cannot be obtained as compared with the middle of the displacement, and the driving force required to be generated by the driving motor 631 tends to increase. Therefore, the displacement resistance is reduced as in the present embodiment. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 at the start of displacement.

  The same applies to the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the extended state (see FIG. 45). That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a disposed in the transmission slot 623 at both end positions of the rotating member 620 (the position in the effect standby state and the position in the extended state) is the same as that of the transmission slot 623. The displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (that is, the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed to be along the longitudinal direction (for example, parallel). Thus, the load on the drive motor 631 at the time of starting the displacement of the rotating member 620 from both end positions can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with the intermediate gear 644 from both sides. In the present embodiment, since the radius R1 of the gear teeth 625 and the radius R2 of the gear teeth 654a are designed to have the same length, the rotation angle of the gear teeth 625 with respect to the intermediate gear 644 and the rear angle with respect to the intermediate gear 644 are determined. The rotation angle of the side rotation member 654 is the same angle.

  Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotation member 654 can be configured to be variable depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 625.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 and the gear teeth 657a of the shaft right angle rotating member 657 mesh with each other, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is orthogonal to the rotation axis. The power is transmitted to the second decoration rotating member 660.

  The rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is the same as the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear tooth 652a of the front rotation member 652. That is, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 625 (see FIG. 41).

  In this embodiment, since the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are the same (the gear ratio is 1), the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is The rotation angle between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 625 is the same.

  Next, the displacement of the first operation unit 600 from the effect standby state will be described in chronological order. FIG. 43 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate effect state, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate effect state. FIG. 45 is a front view of the first operation unit 600 in the extended state, and FIG. 46 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600 in the extended state. In addition, illustration of the base member 611 and the fastening screw is omitted for easy understanding of the shape.

  The rotation angle of the rotation member 620 is set to 19 degrees between the effect standby state and the intermediate effect state, and the rotation angle of the rotation member 620 is 26 degrees between the intermediate effect state and the overhang state. Is set to

  In the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture in which the narrow third effect surface 661c faces the front side. In the extended state of the first operation unit 600, the second effect surface 661b is configured to face the front side (see FIG. 45).

  As shown in FIG. 44, the guide elongated hole 616 is formed with a linear portion 616a formed on a straight line extending in the vertical direction from the upper end portion, and connected to the lower end portion of the linear portion 616a to form a curved line (substantially arc shape). And a curved portion 616b formed at the bottom.

  In the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600, the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connection portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, in the extended state of the first operation unit 600, the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

  Accordingly, the displacement of the axis O1 between the effect standby state and the intermediate effect state is a linear displacement along the linear portion 616a, and the displacement of the axis O1 between the intermediate effect state and the overhanging condition is a curved portion. It is configured to have a curved displacement along 616b.

  The first operation unit 600 is configured to be capable of changing the state as described above, and the rotation member 620 is disposed on the base end side of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving the driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first decorative rotating member 650, and the second decorative rotating member 660 follow the displacement of the rotating member 620. .

  Therefore, without measures, there is a possibility that the displacement resistance generated between the guide slot 616 and the guide slot 616 due to the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide slot 616 becomes large. The configuration is made so that the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 616 is along the displacement direction, so that the suppression is achieved.

  For example, the displacement of the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state (FIG. 41) is a displacement that tilts downward, and the guide slot 616 is also formed to extend downward. In addition, for example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the extended state (see FIG. 46) is a displacement that rises obliquely upward to the right, and the guide slot 616 is also formed to extend obliquely upward to the right. Have been.

  In this way, by making the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 and the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616 follow, the displacement resistance of the portion displacing the inside of the guide slot 616 (and the axis O1) is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effect of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described, including other effects. FIGS. 47A and 47B are schematic diagrams schematically showing the displacement amount and the displacement angle of the supported member 640 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620. FIGS. It is a schematic diagram which shows the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the driven side of the supported member 640 when 620 rotates in the inclination direction in the aspect with a constant angular velocity. In addition, the positive and negative values of the numerical value are shown as a positive displacement amount and a negative value as an upward displacement amount. In FIG. 48B, the numerical value of FIG. 48A is shown as a bar graph.

  In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the support position of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation of the rotation member 620 is illustrated at intervals of 10 degrees as the rotation angle of the rotation member 620, and the tension of the first operation unit 600 is shown. The rotating member 620 in the posture in the extended state is illustrated by a solid line.

  In FIG. 47, the angle θ is illustrated as an angle between a line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624, and a line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622. I have.

  The guide slot 616 functions as a slot for guiding the end of the supported member 640 where the axis O1 is disposed. The displacement in the guide elongated hole 616 is a displacement caused by the displacement of the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 with the rotation of the rotating member 620. In the following, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640, and the end of the supported member 640 where the axis O1 is provided is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

  An outline of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 includes the vertical displacement of the tip of rotation (the main driving side of the supported member 640) due to the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the posture displacement of the supported member 640. The resulting vertical displacement on the driven side of the supported member 640 is a result of the addition.

  In the effect standby state, in addition to the supported member 640 being in the vertical position, the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction (the arrangement of the rotating arm is 45 degrees left and right from the vertical). Range). In other words, the conditions for the displacement in the up-down direction are doubled.

  Both of these conditions are reversed in the extended state, and the conditions for increasing the displacement in the vertical direction are doubled. Therefore, the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement, and the speed is high at the end of the downward displacement.

  Next, details of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The displacement (tilt displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the extended state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

  Therefore, when the guide elongated hole 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may drop vigorously. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is preferable that the first operation unit 600 be stopped in the intermediate effect state (the middle position of the tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the shape of the guide elongated hole 616, a mode in which a curved portion 616b is combined below the linear portion 616a is adopted. Accordingly, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced by its own weight and enters the curved portion 616b due to its own weight, the displacement resistance applied to the driven side of the supported member 640 can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to easily prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from dropping vigorously beyond the arrangement in the intermediate effect state.

  The displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side in the linear portion 616a will be described. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the driven side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the production standby state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed on the right side of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate production state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is on the left side of the linear portion 616a. (See FIG. 44). Therefore, while the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced without changing its direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically reciprocated.

  Accordingly, the displacement of the supported member 640 in the vertical direction on the driven side can be kept small as compared with the magnitude of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that the driven side of the supported member 640 has a linear portion. While being placed at 616a, the supported member 640 can be seen by the player in a displaced manner as if it were rotationally displaced about the driven side of the supported member 640.

  According to this displacement mode, since the sliding displacement in the left and right direction can be generated by using the advance by the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 around the driven side, the entire supported member 640 is moved from the start of the displacement. The load required for the displacement can be suppressed low as compared with the case where the slide displacement is performed in the left-right direction. Therefore, the load required at the start of the operation of the supported member 640 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required for the drive motor 631 can be reduced. Thus, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, while the displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side is suppressed to a small value, the displacement of the main driving portion of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and the supported member 640 is maintained. The rotation direction on the driven side of the supported member 640 with respect to the main driving portion is maintained in the counterclockwise direction in rear view (the direction is not switched). Accordingly, as described above, the direction of the change in the posture of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotation member 660 are maintained without being switched (without being inverted).

  Thereby, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are performing a reciprocating operation (return operation). The displacement mode can be a vigorous displacement mode.

  Further, even in a situation where the displacement of the driven portion of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently ensured, the displacement direction of the driven portion of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component, In addition, since the displacement is in the direction (downward) along the direction of gravity, the load required to start the displacement of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required for the drive motor 631 is reduced. can do. Thus, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

  The operation caused by the curved portion 616b will be described. The state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed at the connection between the linear part 616a and the curved part 616b is defined as the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600. As described above, the turning angle of the turning member 620 from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the range of the angle width of 20 to 45 degrees in FIG.

  First, as a premise, it is not necessary to adopt a curved portion for the guide slot 616. That is, the guide slot 616 may be composed of only a linear portion regardless of whether or not a bent portion is used to increase the displacement resistance in the intermediate effect state as described above.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting the curved portion 616b, the speed of the driven member 640 at the end of displacement is prevented from being excessively high. This will be described below.

  In both cases of being guided by the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b, when the driven side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 is moved downward. Displacing downward is the same.

  The difference is that, when guided by the curved portion 616b, in the upper half portion of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640 (rightward). A curved portion 616b is formed so as to be displaced and guided in the lower half of the curved portion 616b. In the lower half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 follows the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640 (leftward). The curved portion 616b is formed so as to be guided to be displaced leftward.

  Thus, even before the amount of downward displacement of the supported member 640 on the driving side becomes large (tilting start side), the displacement of the driven member 640 on the driven side is swung right and left, so that the supported member 640 is swung left and right. It is possible to secure a large displacement speed of the driven side 640.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side from becoming excessive at the displacement end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically displaced along an arbitrary path from a specific initial position to an end position, if the time required for the displacement is the same, the result of integrating the speed in the vertical direction becomes equal. If the displacement is slow at the start of the displacement, the displacement speed increases at the end.

  When the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed on the virtual axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction shown in FIG. 47 for comparison, the displacement speed gradually increases from the tilt displacement start side of the rotating member 620. And becomes the maximum at the displacement end (displacement lower end) of the supported member 640. In other words, the vertical displacement of the virtual axis OE1 during the same period as compared with the vertical displacement UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide slot 616 while the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees to reach the displacement lower end. The quantity UE1 increases.

  Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis OE1, there is a possibility that the driven side of the supported member 640 may perform an operation of bouncing back, and when performing an effect of stopping the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement, the first operation unit 600 It adversely affects the performance.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting the curved portion 616 b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed of the driven member 640 on the driven side increases becomes the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. The displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform.

  In this case, the term “uniform” is used not only to mean that the speed is brought to be the same over the entire range of the displacement, but also to mean that the magnitude of the speed is suppressed. In particular, in the present embodiment, in the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases on the side where the approach to the curved portion 616b starts, and enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b. After the start, the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side gradually decreases.

  That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, the displacement of the supported member 640 becomes monotonous by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. Can be avoided.

  Further, by lowering the speed required on the driven side of the supported member 640, that is, the displacement required per unit time at the lower end side of the curved portion 616b, the rotating member 620 is moved upward (lifted). When the operation is started, the amount of displacement for lifting the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time can be reduced in a unit time, so that the load on the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the rotation of the second decorative rotation member 660 associated with the rotation displacement of the rotation member 620 will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram illustrating a change in the angle θ [degree] with the rotation of the rotating member 620.

  The angle θ can be regarded as the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 about the circular through hole 624, and is directly connected to the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660. That is, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is defined according to the magnitude of the angle θ.

  In this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the gear of the gear tooth 652a and the shaft right-angle rotating member 657. The rotation transmission ratio with the tooth 657a (see FIG. 38) is set to 1. Therefore, since the angle θ is the same as the rotation angle of the axis perpendicular rotation member 657, the change in the angle θ can be grasped as the change in the posture of the second decorative rotation member 660.

  The change of the angle θ is 45 degrees from the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 44), and the intermediate effect of the first operation unit 600 is 45 degrees. The angle from the state to the extended state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 46) is 90 degrees.

  In the effect standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture in which the first effect surface 661a is inclined leftward by 45 degrees (the third effect surface 661c is rightward by 45 degrees). Each time the state is switched in the order of the intermediate production state and the overhang state, the second decoration rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third production surface 661c faces the front side (see FIG. 43), and then the second The production surface 661b faces the front side (see FIG. 45).

  The setting of the angle θ is realized by designing the guide slot 616 for defining the attitude of the supported member 640. That is, in the present embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 is designed to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the attitude of the second decorative rotation member 660 according to the angle θ.

  Thus, even when only the sensor for detecting the arrangement of the rotation member 620 is provided as the detection sensor KS1 as in the present embodiment, the second decorative rotation member 660 is controlled based on the output of the detection sensor KS1. The arrangement and posture can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

  That is, if the extension 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state (see FIG. 41), and the drive motor 631 from that state is determined. The rotation angle of the rotation member 620 and the arrangement and posture of the second decoration rotation member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle of the second rotation member 620.

  Here, the change amount of the angle θ is not proportional to the rotation angle amount of the rotation member 620. Therefore, when determining the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotation member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not always necessary to obtain a numerical value by proportional calculation from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631. Further, even when the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented from being constant. Hereinafter, this will be described.

  The change in the angle θ is substantially the same as the change in the amount of change in the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side. That is, the angle change from the intermediate effect state to the overhang state is generally larger than the angle change from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state (about 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees). Large (about 20 degrees while the rotation member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged in the upper half of the curved portion 616b).

  On the other hand, the change in the angle from the intermediate effect state to the overhang state is such that the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually decreases from the approach position to the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and finally from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect. It is below the level of the angle change up to the state (down to about 7 degrees).

  As described above, the numerical value of the angle θ with respect to the rotation per unit angle of the rotation member 620 is configured to change in magnitude, so that the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 similarly changes. Can be configured. That is, in the range where the numerical value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is likely to be small and the posture can be easily maintained, while in the range where the numerical value of the angle θ is large, the second decorative rotation member 660 can be set. The rotation angle of the member 660 is likely to be large, and the surfaces facing the player (directing surfaces 661a to 661c) can be easily changed quickly.

  From the configuration described above, it is possible to form a gradual change in the displacement operation of the second decorative rotation member 660. In the displacement operation of the second decorative rotation member 660, as described above, the arrangement change and the posture change due to the displacement of the supported member 640 and the center of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. And rotation displacement about the rotation axis are simultaneously executed.

  The rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement centered on the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a is such that the driven side of the supported member 640 changes from the linear portion 616a of the guide slot 616 to the curved portion 616b. It grows noticeably at the timing of entry.

  That is, in the tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate effect state is reached, and the upper and lower sides of the supported member 640 in the intermediate effect state slightly move up and down (bounce back). Even in this case, it is possible to maintain the state in which the second decorative rotating member 660 faces the third effect surface 661c toward the front side (see FIG. 43).

  On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate effect state, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotation member 660 when the rotation member 620 rotates at a constant speed increases, and the posture change in the rotation direction is changed. It is visually noticeable. That is, the player can visually recognize that the second decoration rotating member 660 is instantaneously rotationally displaced.

  In the present embodiment, at the rotation end (displacement lower end) of the rotation member 620, the second effect surface 661b of the second decoration rotation member 660 is directed to the front side, and is arranged in the vicinity of the decoration fixing member 670. It is desirable that the driven side of the supported member 640 can be prevented from jumping upward from the state in which the rotating member 620 is disposed at the lower end of the displacement, in view of being integrally viewed (see FIG. 28).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 is configured as described above to make the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side uniform, the rotating member 620 is Excessive displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side in a state where the supported member 640 is arranged at the displacement lower end can be prevented in advance, and the supported member 640 can be prevented from jumping back.

  In addition to the uniform displacement speed, the center positions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 (for example, the cylindrical portion 643). Are configured to be closest to a support fastening portion 615 as a rotation axis of the rotating member 620. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid that the rotating distal end of the rotating member 620 becomes unsteady due to the weight of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 supported on the rotating distal side of the rotating member 620. The rotational displacement can be stabilized.

  In addition, the lower half of the curved portion 616b moves in a direction (upper left direction) that rebounds around the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 on the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end of displacement of the rotating member 620. Is preferably configured to hinder the displacement of In other words, the lower half of the curved portion 616b is inclined in the upper left direction in the short direction, and the displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side in this direction can be suppressed. The rebound of the member 640 can be prevented.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced following the displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side, and when the driven side of the supported member 640 stops at the displacement end. Is different from the displacement direction of the supported member 640 on the driven side.

  The former is supposed to be displaced downward and left along the displacement direction of the supported member 640 on the driving side (the rotational direction of the rotating member 620) if there is no guidance, but in the present embodiment, the guide elongated hole By being guided by the guide 616, it is slightly swung in the left-right direction as a direction along the guide slot 616, and is displaced downward.

  On the other hand, the latter is a circular trajectory centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, and thus has a displacement direction not along the guide long hole 616 but along the short direction of the guide long hole 616. Thus, displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side can be suppressed, and the supported member 640 can be prevented from jumping back.

  The feature of the rising direction displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described. In the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the extended state to the effect standby state, the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

  The load required for raising and displacing the rotating member 620 (that is, the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) mainly depends on the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the first decoration provided on the supported member 640. It is used for raising and displacing the rotation member 650 and the second decoration rotation member 660, and for rotating the second decoration rotation member 660.

  That is, as the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 is smaller, the load required for raising and displacing the rotation member 620 can be reduced.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 49, in the present embodiment, at the time when the rotating member 620 starts rotating and displacing from the extended state of the first operation unit 600, it is proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660. The angle θ is designed to be the lowest. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the load required when raising and displacing the rotating member 620.

  At the end of the rising displacement of the rising direction displacement of the rotating member 620, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 about the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640 is positioned along the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 ( (Vertical orientation).

  Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as the inertial force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 is reduced. The moving member 620 can be generated as a load that is twisted about the longitudinal direction, and the rotating member 620 can endure the load with a slight elastic displacement locally by dispersing the load in the longitudinal direction.

  Therefore, as compared with the case where the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the rotation member 620 in a front view, it is easier to avoid a situation in which the rotation member 620 is broken and broken. . In addition, an excessive elastic displacement of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front cover member 612, and the load that cannot be received by the rotating member 620 is endured by elastic deformation of the front cover member 612. Therefore, the rotation member 620 can be prevented from being damaged.

  The displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b will be described. The overhanging decorative portion 652b is a member that is rotationally displaced about the axis O1, and the rotation angle thereof corresponds to the angle θ described above. Therefore, even when the change in the arrangement of the supported member 640 on the driven side is small, such as a change from the effect standby state to the overhang state, if the angle θ changes, the overhang decorative portion 652b rotates. .

  The change of the angle θ from the effect standby state to the overhang state is about 135 degrees, and the overhang decorative portion 652b rotates at about 45 degrees. Here, when the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise from the effect standby state, it feels as if it collides with another operation unit 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). In the present embodiment, since the supported member 640 itself, which is a reference for the rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, changes its posture in a clockwise rotation manner, the other operating unit 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members) changes its posture. Collisions can be avoided.

  In other words, since the overhanging decorative portion 652b is configured to be displaceable with respect to the supported member 640, the space required for displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

  For example, in the case where the overhanging decorative portion 652b is a portion that is fixedly arranged with respect to the supported member 640 in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the supported member 640 is changed from the overhanging state arrangement to the effect standby state. , The overhanging decorative portion 652b extends to the upper left side of the supported member 640 and collides with another operation unit 800 or partially hides the overhanging display on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. May have an adverse effect on the production.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the projecting decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the driven member 640 on the driven side of the supported member 640 as a reference. When 640 projects to the third symbol display device 81 side, it extends in conjunction with it, and when the supported member 640 is displaced away from the third symbol display device 81, it retreats in conjunction with it. Therefore, the arrangement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the retracted state can be formed on the side away from the third symbol display device 81.

  The rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 in the player's eyes can be obtained from the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640. That is, the difference is about 135 degrees, which is the change width of the angle θ, and about 90 degrees, which is the posture change angle of the supported member 640, which is 45 degrees.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be equal regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided into angles a1 and a2 below the horizontal line and angles b1 and b2 above the horizontal line, the angle θ and the posture of the supported member 640 are obtained. The difference between the change and ((a1 + b1)-(a2 + b2))-(b1-b2) = (a1-a2) is equal to the rotation angle of the rotation member 620.

  Accordingly, the rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 becomes equal to the rotation angle of the rotation member 620. Although the displacement speed of the support member 640 is not constant, the angular velocity of rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the attitude of the supported member 640 is constant.

  Therefore, it is as if the overhanging decorative portion 652b provided on the supported member 640 is being driven at a constant angular velocity by the driving means different from the driving motor 631 for driving the rotating member 620 to the player. Can be visually recognized.

  With such a configuration, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 is such that, in the player's eyes, there is a section where the movement is slid or a section where the rotation is performed. It can be shown, and the displacement mode of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode as if it were not a machine.

  This operation is realized by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 into a section in which the posture change is large with respect to the displacement amount in the sliding direction and a section in which the posture change is small with respect to the displacement amount in the sliding direction. be able to. That is, when the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates with respect to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is the displacement of the supported member 640 from the player's point of view. Affected by the dominant side.

  Therefore, in the section where the posture change is large with respect to the displacement amount in the sliding direction, the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as being rotationally displaced. The appearance decoration portion 652b can be visually recognized as being slid.

  As described above, the description has been given of the case where the rotating member 620 is rotatable and displaceable so as to constitute the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the extended state, and is displaced from one displacement end to the other displacement end. However, the driving direction may be switched so as to be displaced in the opposite direction at a position halfway in the displacement range.

  For example, after rotating the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state, the driving direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed to control to return to the effect standby state. In this case, since it is necessary to stop the rotating member 620 in the middle of descending, it may be necessary to set the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 to a lower speed in order to make the stop position accurate.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the numerical value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) changes in an increasing tendency near the intermediate effect state as compared to the effect standby state. The magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660, as described above.

  Therefore, in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state in which the rotation amount of the second decoration rotation member 660 increases, the portion of the driving force that is distributed to the second decoration rotation member 660 increases, so that the rotation member 620 relatively moves. The amount of the rotation displacement can be reduced, and the rotation displacement of the rotation member 620 can be automatically suppressed.

  In other words, as the rotation amount of the second decorative rotation member 660 increases, the rotation speed of the rotation member 620 can be reduced, so that the rotation speed of the rotation member 620 is set to a low value in advance. Even if it is not performed, the rotation member 620 can be easily stopped near the intermediate effect state.

  Next, the second operation unit 700 will be described. The second operation unit 700 is an operation unit fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the rear case 510, and is a field of view of a player who looks at the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 28). An effect standby state (see FIG. 28) retracting below the opening 511a in order to secure the position, and an overhanging state (see FIG. 30) arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 to attract attention. The state is mainly switched between the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 35) as the state (1).

  FIG. 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operation unit 700, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operation unit 700. In FIGS. 50 and 51, mainly the members around the elevating / reversing effect device 770 are shown in an exploded state, and the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is shown in a non-exploded state.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the second operation unit 700 includes a right front plate member 710 fastened and fixed to a lower right corner of the rear case 510, and a right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510. A rotating arm member 720 arranged and rotatable around the cylindrical projecting portion 511b of the rear case 510, a drive transmitting device 730 configured to transmit a driving force to the rotating arm member 720, An elevating plate member 740 in which a distal end portion of the rotating arm member 720 is connected so as to be able to be guided and is capable of elevating and lowering, and a rear left side fastened and fixed to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the back side of the elevating plate member 740 A plate member 750, a set of left and right front plate members 710 and a pair of front support members 760 fastened and fixed to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750, and a back on the front side of the metal bar 702. A blind decoration member 768 fastened and fixed to the case 510, and a lifting / reversing effect device 770 configured to be capable of being displaced by the lifting / lowering plate member 740 and the front support member 760 in a mode that combines vertical movement and vertical displacement. .

  The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support portion 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, a gap formation portion 712 that is recessed from the rear side at the left edge and forms a gap between the rear case 510, A plurality (three in this embodiment) of detection sensors 713 provided to detect the arrangement of the detected portion 735 of the drive transmission device 730, and the front side of the left side of the drive transmission device 730 is directed to the front side toward the upper side. A front upper inclined portion 714 which is formed to be able to guide the rotary cylinder portion 774 e of the vertically inverted reversing effect device 770 and a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 is screwed are formed. And a plurality of fastened portions 718.

  The detection sensor 713 is provided with a plurality of photocoupler sensors at intervals so that the detection groove is disposed at a position where the detected portion 735 can enter. Each of the detection sensors 713 includes a position of the detected portion 735 in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700, a position of the detected portion 735 in the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700, and an overhang of the second operation unit 700, respectively. It is arranged so as to match the position of the detected part 735 in the state.

  That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch the output depending on whether the second operation unit 700 is in the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, or the extended state, and the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 4) can be grasped the state of the second operation unit 700.

  The rotating arm member 720 is pivotally supported by a cylindrical projection 511b projecting from the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510 to the front side in a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a long plate shape in a U-shape as viewed from the front. A main body 721 to be formed, and a support cylinder 722 having a cylindrical shape projecting rearward at a bent portion of the main body 721 and having an inner peripheral side formed to have a size capable of being inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 511b. A long hole 723 formed in the right end of the main body 721 in a long hole shape along the long direction, and a front end (the projecting direction of the cylindrical protrusion 711a) at the left end of the main body 721. (In a direction parallel to) and a cylindrically fastened portion 724 in which a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side in a cylindrical shape, and rearward at an intermediate position between the cylindrically fastened portion 724 and the support tubular portion 722. Cylindrical fastening with a protruding cylindrical shape and a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side It includes a 725, and a torsion spring SP2 to provide a biasing force of the rise in the main body 721 (direction of lifting the left side) with the rear case 510 is wrapped around the supporting tube portion 722.

  The left side of the main body 721 is formed with a step so as to be displaced on the front side as compared with the base end side of the support cylinder 722, and a support plate is formed in a gap formed on the back side by the step. 701 is provided.

  The support plate 701 is a plate-shaped portion that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and includes an arc-shaped long hole portion 701a that is bored so as to be able to guide the cylindrical fastened portion 725. When the fastening screw inserted into the long hole portion 701a with the ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 725, the rotating arm member 720 is supported by the support plate via the cylindrical fastened portion 725. 701 is supported undetachably.

  Since the support plate 701 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, the left side of the rotating arm member 720 is restricted from being displaced away from the rear case 510 toward the front. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the left side of the rotating arm member 720 from causing a displacement in which the rotating arm member 720 is tilted to the front side, so that the displacement of the rotating arm member 720 is stably supported. be able to.

  The right side portion of the main body 721 is disposed in a gap between the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712. That is, the displacement of the right side of the main body 721 in the front-rear direction is limited by the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

  The long hole portion 723 is formed in a shape in which a straight line extending in the longitudinal direction passing through the center of the width passes through the center of the support cylindrical portion 722. Therefore, when the load applied to the long hole 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the long hole 723, the rotation direction component of the rotation arm member 720 of the load becomes zero.

  The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits a driving force through the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and includes a drive motor 731 fastened and fixed to the right front plate member 710 from the front side, and the drive motor 731 , A transmission gear 733 meshed with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 meshed with the transmission gear 733.

  The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by a plurality of cylindrical projections 711a that project in a cylindrical shape on the rear side of the right front plate member 710 at corresponding positions. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 711a, and a fastening screw inserted into a shaft hole of the transmission gear 733 or the gear cam member 734 can be screwed therein. When these fastening screws are screwed and fixed, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 711a so as not to fall off.

  The transmission support portion 711 includes the above-described cylindrical projecting portion 711a and an arc-shaped hole 711b formed in an arc around the cylindrical projecting portion 711a that supports the gear cam member 734.

  The gear cam member 734 is extended in such a manner as to have a longer diameter than the gear portion, and a detected portion 735 which is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation shaft portion toward the front side and is formed so as to be inserted into the arc-shaped hole 711b. And a cylindrical protruding portion 736a that protrudes cylindrically from the distal end of the extending portion 736 to the rear side.

  The detected part 735 is formed so as to be able to be disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and changes the attitude of the gear cam member 734 by the output from the detection sensor 713 (see FIG. 4). Is configured as a part for enabling detection.

  The cylindrical projecting portion 736a is formed so as to be inserted into the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720 via the long hole portion 723. Is done.

  A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a, and a fastening screw inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed therein. When the fastening screw is screwed and fixed, the rotating arm member 720 is irremovably connected to the cylindrical projection 736a.

  The elevating plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down with the rotation of the rotating arm member 720, and is disposed at the left end side and guided by the up and down direction, and is provided at the lower end side of the guided member 741. A left and right long horizontally long member 742 to be fastened and fixed.

  The guided member 741 is formed so that a metal bar 702 fixed to the rear case 510 in a posture in which the longitudinal direction is aligned in the vertical direction can be inserted, and the vertical direction displacement along the metal bar 702 is possible. Since the tips of the ridges projecting from both left and right sides of the guided member 741 to the rear side abut on the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, the rotation of the guided member 741 is restricted. The posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized.

  As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the horizontally long member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is stabilized.

  The horizontally long member 742 has an elongated hole 743 formed in an elongated oval shape on the left and right with a vertical width in which the cylindrical fastening portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 can be inserted, and an upper side of the elongated hole 743. And a pair of guide portions 745 disposed below the bottom at positions equidistant left and right with respect to the cylindrical portion 744 as a reference. Prepare.

  When the fastening screw inserted into the long hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 724, the elevating plate member 740 is rotated through the cylindrical fastened portion 724. It is supported by the member 720 so as not to fall off.

  The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion through which the insertion cylindrical portion 773 of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is inserted, and which supports the elevating / reversing effect device 770 in a state where it can be displaced back and forth. In other words, the elevation reversal effect device 770 is not fixed to the elevating plate member 740, but is disposed on the front side of the elevating plate member 740 in such a manner that it can be displaced back and forth with respect to the elevating plate member 740.

  A coil spring CS2 is provided so as to wind around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion cylindrical portion 773. The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction in which the lifting plate member 740 and the lifting reversal effect device 770 are separated from each other.

  The guide part 745 is constituted by a pair of left and right parts, and a rotating cylinder rotatably supported by a pair of front and rear shaft parts protruding from the plate part 745a to the left and right outside from a long plate part 745a forward and backward. 745b.

  The rotating cylinder portion 745b rotates when the above-described up-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the front-rear direction, and functions as a portion for guiding the displacement in the front-rear direction. The details will be described later.

  The left rear plate member 750, like the front upper inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side toward the upper side on the right front side, and is a rotating cylindrical portion 774e of the elevation reversal effect device 770. And a plurality of fastened portions 752 in which female screw portions into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed are formed.

  The blind decoration member 768 includes a three-dimensional decoration part 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a substrate on which LEDs are fixed to the front side is disposed on the back side of the three-dimensional decoration part 768a. The three-dimensional decorative portion 768a can be illuminated by light emitted from the LED.

  Each of the front support members 760 has a fixing plate portion 761 configured to have an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and the right and left inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761 are disposed adjacent to each other, and the plate back faces upward. And a receiving inclined portion 762 which is formed to be inclined toward the front side.

  The fixing plate portion 761 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole from the front side into a corresponding female screw portion. Plate.

  In this fixed position, the receiving inclined portion 762 is disposed in front of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751. That is, a guide route is formed by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751, and the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is guided on the guide route, whereby the elevating / reversing effect device 770 is moved in the front-rear direction. It is configured to be displaced vertically while being displaced. Hereinafter, this vertical displacement will be described.

  FIG. 52A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 52B is a second operation unit 700 taken along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. FIGS. 52A and 52B show the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700. FIG.

  FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 53B is a second operation unit 700 taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. 53 (a) and 53 (b) show an intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700.

  FIG. 54A is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line LIVa-LIVA in FIG. 30. FIG. 54B is a second operation unit 700 taken along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. FIGS. 54A and 54B show the extended state of the second operation unit 700.

  The vertical displacement of the vertical reversing effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 shown in FIGS. 52 to 54 is caused by the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 being transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The transmission of the driving force at the time of vertical displacement of the vertical reversing effect device 770 will be described. In this description, FIG. 28, FIG. 30, and FIG.

  At the time of starting the transmission of the driving force from the effect standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical projection 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is determined by the long hole 723 of the rotary arm member 720. Since the gear cam member 734 is designed to be parallel to the direction, the displacement resistance generated when the gear cam member 734 starts rotating can be suppressed. The same is true in the overhang state.

  On the other hand, in the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 30), since the direction of displacement of the cylindrical projection 736a is orthogonal to the length of the elongated hole 723, the gear cam member 734 receives the rotation from the rotating arm member 720 in the rotational direction. By maximizing the displacement resistance, the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734 can be easily stopped.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the vertical reversing effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 is disposed on the rear side below the center frame 86, and is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86. Accordingly, it is configured to be displaced to the front side in the front-rear direction.

  The displacement resistance of this displacement is based on the configuration in which the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the elevation reversing effect device 770 is guided by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the first horizontal plate 774b and the first horizontal plate 774b of the elevation reversing effect device 770. The configuration in which the two horizontal plates 774c are guided by the rotating cylinder portion 745b of the elevating plate member 740 reduces the number.

  56. That is, the pair of rotary cylinder portions 774e are provided with the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portion 714, 751 (the front upper inclined portion 751 is disposed on the left side not shown in FIG. 52, FIG. 56). ), And the rotary cylinder 774e rolls around the cylindrical portion 774d, thereby displacing along the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portion 714, 751. The displacement resistance of the main body member 771 can be reduced.

  Further, as the arrangement of the rotary cylinder portions 745b aligned in front and rear, the front rotary cylinder portion 745b is designed to be arranged slightly above, so that the tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be suppressed, thereby enabling the rotation. This prevents the cylindrical portion 774e from applying an excessive load to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the design is such that the position of the center of gravity (position of the rotation axis) of the effect device 780 is located slightly forward of the front-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is always inclined forward by gravity. Biased in the direction. Due to the influence of the biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c are likely to be displaced such that the front side is lowered and the rear side is raised.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front rotary cylinder portion 745b, which is disposed close when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b is lowered, is disposed slightly above, and is positioned close when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c is raised. The rear rotating cylinder portion 745b to be formed is disposed slightly below. Therefore, the forward tilt displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

  Further, according to this configuration, since the front rotating cylinder portion 745b has a gap with the second horizontal plate 774c, the rolling can be stably generated with the first horizontal plate 774b. Since the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b has a gap with the first horizontal plate 774b, the rolling can be stably generated with the second horizontal plate 774c. Thus, the rotation of the rotary cylinder portion 745b can be normally caused, and the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  The displacement of the elevation reversing effect device 770 to the front side is caused by the urging force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the above-described shape guide. For this reason, the displacement resistance of the longitudinal displacement can be reduced at the time of the upward displacement in which the elevation reversal effect device 770 is displaced to the front side, as compared with the downward displacement.

  The vertical displacement of the elevation reversal effect device 770 is performed by the driving force of the driving motor 731. The driving force is divided into vertical displacement and longitudinal displacement. In the vertical displacement, the burden of the displacement in the ascending direction becomes relatively large due to the necessity of opposing gravity, but the displacement in the front-rear direction in this case can be assisted by the urging force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving force required for raising and lowering the elevation reversal effect device 770 from becoming excessive.

  The length of the coil spring CS2 is set to be a natural length in the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 53). That is, when the up-down reversal effect device 770 is disposed below the arrangement in the intermediate effect state, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 causes the longitudinal displacement of the up-down reversal effect device 770 due to the driving force of the drive motor 731. While acting in the assisting direction, when the up-down reversal effect device 770 is disposed above the arrangement in the intermediate effect state, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the longitudinal displacement of the up-down reversal effect device 770.

  Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the elevation reversal effect device 770 in the intermediate effect state. For example, when the drive of the drive motor 731 is controlled from the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700 and the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the stop timing is slightly less than ideal. Even if it is earlier, the second operating unit 700 can be displaced toward the intermediate effect state by the urging force of the coil spring CS2.

  Further, for example, in the case where the stop control is performed in the same manner, even if the stop timing is slightly later than the ideal, the second operation unit 700 descends by its own weight, and the descending by its own weight is caused by the urging force of the coil spring CS2. By being suppressed, the arrangement can be maintained by moving the second operation unit 700 to the intermediate effect state side.

  In addition, for example, when the drive of the drive motor 731 is controlled from the overhung state of the second operation unit 700 and the stop of the drive motor 731 is stopped to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the elevation reversal effect device 770 is used. Because the urging force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance when the intermediate production state moves downward, it is possible to easily prevent a downward displacement larger than that in the intermediate production state. Then, even after the stop control of the drive motor 731, the second operating unit 700 can be moved to the intermediate effect state side by applying the urging force of the coil spring CS <b> 2.

  Here, the action of the vertical reversal effect device 770 displaced in the front-rear direction with the vertical displacement will be described. As a premise, there is known a movable role that can be switched between a state in which the center frame 86 is displaced in and out of the frame framed by the center frame 86 to attract the player's attention and a state in which the player escapes from the player's field of view.

  Most of such movable auditoriums are designed with an emphasis on appearance when they are arranged inside the center frame 86. In the state of retreating outside the center frame 86, attention is paid to the player. Often, they don't consider appearance, assuming they won't.

  However, recently, the front-rear distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 is configured to be long, and at the end of the field of view such that the display area of the third symbol display device 81 passes through the inside of the center frame 86 and is viewed. Since the line of sight reaches the rear outside position of the center frame 86 (the position behind the game area), the appearance of the movable role retracted to the rear outside position of the center frame 86 is poor, There is a possibility that the interest will be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, not only the front side (the first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also the back side (the second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and the upper and lower surfaces (FIG. 52). After the decorative surfaces are formed on the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2), the displacement direction of the elevation reversal effect device 770 is set such that the displacement direction of the device 770 becomes closer to the rear side with the player side (front side) as the base end. (Declining toward the rear), that is, a displacement direction along the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's field of view so that each decorative surface can easily fit in the player's field of view. Make up.

  Thus, each decorative surface of the covering member 787 can be easily put in the field of view of the player. The details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, but the front side surface (the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, which is visible to the player in the extended state (see FIG. 54), FIG. 54, a first main decorative surface 787a1) and an upper side surface (first sub-decorative surface 787a2 or second sub-decorative surface 787b2, which can be visually recognized by the player in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52); The decoration (a figure, a pattern, a character, a picture, or the like) formed on the decoration surface 787a2) is formed as a decoration related to each other.

  In other words, the first main decoration surface 787a1 and the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 are formed as first decorations related to each other, and the second main decoration surface 787b1 and the second decoration surface 787b2 are related to each other. , And the first decoration and the second decoration are formed as different decorations from each other.

  The decoration formed on the upper side surface is arranged in the front-rear gap between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 26) arranged on the back side in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700. Therefore, a state where attention is paid to a ball flowing down the game area formed outside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) and a state where attention is paid to a display effect developed by the third symbol display device 81 are switched. It is easy for the player to enter the field of view when moving his / her eyes.

  Therefore, the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, “chance” and “big hit”) that can be visually recognized by the player through the covering member 787 in the overhang state are displayed on the covering member 787 even in the production standby state. The player can be made visible through the side surface.

  Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 is displaced to the effect standby state so that the third symbol display device 81 can be easily visually recognized, and the cover member 787 arranged inconspicuously can continuously attract the player's attention.

  In addition, as described later, since the covering member 787 is configured to be rotatable and displaceable so as to switch the decorative surface facing the player, the contents of the decorative surface that the player can visually recognize in the extended state are different. A case can arise.

  For example, if the vertical reversing effect device 770 is placed in the effect standby state before the player confirms the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state (when overlooked or when the operation speed is excessively fast), In the configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be grasped only from the side surface, most of the front side surface is hidden by the game board 13 in the effect standby state, so that the player is unfolded on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The attention must be paid to the effect of the liquid crystal, and the attention to the covering member 787 is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be grasped also from the upper side surface as in the present embodiment, the player visually recognizes the up-down reversal effect device 770 in the effect standby state, so that the player can cover in the overhang state. Through the setting member 787, it is possible to grasp the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, "chance", "big hit", etc.) which were visually recognizable by the player.

  This allows the player who has overlooked the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state to be notified of the content notified by the state of the covering member 787 on the decorative surface that is visible on the covering member 787 even in the effect standby state. It can be reported continuously. Accordingly, the attention power of the covering member 787 can be kept high regardless of each state such as the effect standby state or the extended state.

  In the present embodiment, the displacement in the front-rear direction of the up-down reversal effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 enters forward from the rear end face of the game area from the rear side of the rear end face of the game area. A description will be given of such a displacement.

  As shown in FIG. 52, in the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700, the front surface of the covering member 787 and the plate rear surface of the center frame 86 are disposed to face each other, and the center frame 86 is located on the covering member 787 side. And a flow path forming portion 86a protrudingly formed at the bottom.

  The flow path forming portion 86a is configured such that the sphere jumping from the left and right entrances of the center frame 86 into the warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 reaches the lower edge of the center frame 86, and then moves to the center thereof The rear side of the guide flow path for once swinging the ball flowing down the lower rolling surface of the frame 86 backward, flowing forward again, and guiding toward the first winning opening 64 arranged in the game area. (See FIG. 9). That is, the rear end surface BE1 of the game area is arranged behind the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) by the flow path forming portion 86a.

  Since the ball that has flowed down the flow path forming portion 86a enters the first winning opening 64 with a high probability, the attention to the flow path forming portion 86a is high, especially when the ball jumps inside the center frame 86. Therefore, the line of sight of the player is easily gathered in the flow path forming portion 86a. In the effect standby state (see FIG. 52), since the effect device 780 is disposed immediately behind the flow path forming portion 86a, it is easy to configure a state in which the effect device 780 in the effect standby state enters the field of view of the player. Can be.

  In the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700, the covering member 787 is disposed on the back side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52A). The front surface portion is disposed on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53A), and when the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state, the front surface portion of the covering member 787 is disposed on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

  That is, the covering member 787 is displaced toward the front side so as to enter the front-rear position same as the front-rear position of the game area at the same time as being displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86. Therefore, it can be seen to the player that the covering member 787 is riding on the center frame 86 and moving to the front side (approaching the player side).

  In the second operation unit 700, where the effect device 780 is displaced in the front-back direction with the vertical displacement, the front-rear position of the front end face is the second decoration in the extended state of the first operation unit 600 in the extended state. It is configured to match (coincide with) the front-back position of the second presentation surface 661b of the rotating member 660.

  Thus, the front and rear positions of the second effect surface 661b (see FIG. 29) of the first operation unit 600 and the effect device 780 (FIG. 30) of the second operation unit 700, which are arranged close to each other in front view in the extended state. Are matched, and these can be easily made to be visually recognized integrally.

  On the other hand, the arrangement of the rendering device 780 in the front-rear direction is lower in the intermediate rendering state and the rendering standby state than in the extended state, so that the box-shaped member of the first operation unit 600 is compared with the extended state. 661 and the rendering device 780 can be separated (independently) to facilitate visual recognition.

  The elevation reversal effect device 770 includes a main body member 771 connected and supported by the elevating plate member 740, and an effect device 780 configured to be displaceable with respect to the main body member 771. Next, the details of the elevation reversal effect device 770 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 55 is an exploded front perspective view of the elevation reversal effect device 770, and FIG. 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the elevation reversal effect device 770. In the description of FIGS. 55 and 56, FIGS. 50 and 51 are appropriately referred to.

  The main body member 771 includes a lower elongated portion 772 formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, and an insertion cylindrical portion 773 projecting in a cylindrical shape from the left-right central position of the lower elongated portion 772 to the back side. A pair of guide extending portions 774 extending rearward from both left and right ends of the lower elongated portion 772 and a vertically extending connecting portion are formed integrally with the left and right central positions of the lower elongated portion 772. An upper elongate portion 775 formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, and a linear motion plate member 784 of the rendering device 780 disposed on the back side from both left and right sides of the upper elongate portion 775 so as to be able to be guided in the left-right direction. A plurality of guide portions 776, a transmission device holding plate 777 which is fixed to the left and right centers of the upper elongated portion 775 from the rear side and is capable of supporting the drive transmission device, a lower elongated portion 772, and an upper elongated portion. A light emitting effect means 778 fastened and fixed to the front side of the portion 775, Provided.

  The insertion cylindrical portion 773 is a portion that is inserted into the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 744 of the elevating plate member 740, and is formed in a dimensional relationship slidable on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 744. The member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction. That is, since the insertion cylindrical portion 773 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 744, the tilting displacement of the main body member 771 in the front-rear direction with respect to the elevating plate member 740 can be suppressed.

  The guide extension 774 includes a vertical plate 774a having a width in the vertical direction, a first horizontal plate 774b connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a, and having a horizontal direction in the width direction, and a first horizontal plate 774b. A second horizontal plate 774c, which is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side and whose width direction is in the horizontal direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), and protrudes from the left and right outer surfaces of the vertical plate 774a to the left and right sides. It comprises a pair of upper and lower tubular portions 774d provided, and a rotating tubular portion 774e rotatably supported by the tubular portion 774d.

  The width of the second horizontal plate 774c is longer than the width of the first horizontal plate 774b. The expanded portion in the width direction is vertically opposed to the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740 in the assembled state, and abuts each other to suppress the tilting displacement in which the guide extending portion 774 falls forward. That is, the second horizontal plate 774c has a width enough to be vertically opposed to the lower bottom of the elevating plate member 740, so that the main body member 771 is tilted forward with respect to the elevating plate member 740. Can be suppressed.

  The tubular portions 774d are not arranged in a pair in the vertical direction, but the upper tubular portion 774d is arranged to be shifted to the front side compared to the lower tubular portion 774d. This displacement is set so that the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the direction of a straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical portions 774d are parallel (see FIG. 52A). That is, by disposing a pair of cylindrical portions 774d in parallel with the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751, the pair of upper and lower rotary cylinder portions 774e can be simultaneously applied to the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762. Can be in contact. Thus, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylinder portions 774e can be stably rolled, and it is easy to avoid occurrence of a local load.

  The guide portion 776 is fastened and fixed so as to connect a pair of left and right tubular portions 776a with a plurality of tubular portions 776a which are disposed on both left and right sides in such a manner that a pair of left and right sides are vertically arranged and a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side. A plurality of falling-off prevention plate portions 776b to be formed.

  The falling-off prevention plate portion 776b includes an insertion hole formed at a position corresponding to the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a, and a fastening screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole is screwed into the cylindrical portion 776a. And functions as a portion for preventing the linear motion plate member 784 from falling off, which will be described later in detail.

  The transmission device holding plate 777 has a motor support plate 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b formed in the motor support plate 777a at a position where the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, and A cylindrical projecting portion 777c is provided on the lower side of the insertion hole 777b to protrude in a cylindrical shape on the front side, a pair of insertion holes 777d formed at upper and lower ends so as to allow fastening screws to be inserted, and a fastening on the rear side. And a fixed wiring fastening member 777e.

  The cylindrical projecting portion 777c has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and the fastening screw is screwed in a state of being inserted into the transmission gear 781b, thereby pivotally supporting the vertically reversing member 781 so as not to fall off. Part.

  The insertion hole 777d is configured such that a fastening screw screwed into a female screw portion 775a formed in a corresponding portion of the upper elongated portion 775 can be inserted, and the transmission device holding plate 777 causes the upper elongated portion 775 to be inserted by the fastening screw. Is fixed.

  The wiring retaining member 777e is a portion for retaining and retaining the electric wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in a gap between the transmission device holding plate 777 and a shape along the outer frame of the transmission device holding plate 777. In this case, the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777 can be improved.

  The light-emitting effecting means 778 includes a left and right long plate-shaped two upper and lower electric decoration substrates 778a on which light-emitting members such as LEDs are disposed on the front side, and light transmission disposed on the front side of the electric decoration substrates 778a. A light diffusion member 778b, which is a plate member formed of a conductive resin material and formed by light diffusion processing.

  The upper illumination board 778a includes a pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d on the back side. The detection sensor 778d is a photo-coupler type detection device, and is configured to be able to detect the orientation of the upside down member 781 of the rendering device 780 by disposing an arc-shaped protruding portion 781d in the detection groove. Will be described later.

  The lower light diffusing member 778b has a plurality of fastened portions formed on the back side, and is inserted from the back side into the through-holes formed in the lower elongated portion 772 at corresponding positions in the fastened portions. The fastening screw is screwed into and fastened and fixed, so that the fastening screw is inconspicuous.

  On the other hand, the upper light diffusing member 778b is formed with insertion holes 778c for inserting fastening screws on both the left and right sides, and the fastening screws inserted from the front side into the insertion holes 778c are female screws of the upper elongated portion 775. By being screwed into the portion 775b, the upper light diffusion member 778b is fastened and fixed.

  In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side and may be conspicuous without any countermeasure. However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the covering member 787 is always connected to the front side of the insertion hole 778c. , The head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787.

  Therefore, even when the head of the fastening screw is designed to face the front side, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the head of the fastening screw stands out and adversely affects the performance. In other words, by designing the covering member 787 to be arranged so as to hide the fastening screw, the degree of freedom in designing the fastening screw in the insertion direction can be increased.

  The rendering device 780 is a device in which an outer portion is arranged around the upper long portion 775 and is configured to be displaceable, and the upside-down reversing member 781 supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 777 c of the transmission device holding plate 777. A drive motor 782 in which a drive gear 782a for transmitting a driving force to a transmission gear 781b of the upside down member 781 is fixed to a drive shaft; and one end of each of both longitudinal ends of the upside down member 781 And a pair of linear motion plate members 784, the other ends of which are pivotally supported, and the guide portions 776 guide the displacement in the left-right direction. A pair of shaft rotating members 785 disposed between the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and rotatable (reversed) with a rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction; Joint support with member 784 A pair of shaft support members 786, a pair of end plate members 785 d which are fixed to the left and right outer end portions of the shaft rotation member 785 in a state where the phases are fixed so as not to fall off, and before and after the end plate members 785 d And a covering member 787 formed to have a left and right length covering the left and right sides of the upper elongated portion 775.

  The upside down member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b protruding in a gear shape on the back side of the center of the main body plate portion 781a, and a main body plate portion 781a. A pair of cylindrical protruding portions 781c that protrude cylindrically from both ends in the length direction to the rear side, and protrude from the front side of the main body plate portion 781a in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b. And an arc-shaped projecting portion 781d.

  The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole extending in the front-rear direction at the center. The cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into the circular hole, and a fastening screw is screwed in from the distal end side. The vertically reversing member 781 is pivotally supported by the transmission device holding plate 777 so as not to fall off via the transmission gear 781b.

  The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with the rotation, so that the upside down member 781 rotates. That is, the upside down member 781 can be driven to rotate by energizing the drive motor 782.

  The cylindrical projecting portion 781c pivotally supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end where the one-side support hole 783a of the intermediate arm member 783 is formed is displaced following the cylindrical projecting portion 781c which is displaced as the vertically reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced.

  The arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is formed so as to be able to be arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light emission effecting means 778. That is, the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d can be arranged on one of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

  Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the posture of the vertically reversing member 781 can be changed to two postures in which the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and a posture (a pair of detection sensors 778d (The posture in which the arc-shaped protruding portions 781d are not arranged in both of the detection grooves (1) and (2)).

  The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in a long rod shape (narrow plate shape), and has a one-side support hole 783a that is bored at one end and is pivotally supported by a cylindrical protrusion 781c. A cylindrical other cylindrical portion 783b having an inner peripheral side formed at the other end opposite to the support hole 783a, and an umbrella-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other cylindrical portion 783b. ) Formed as bevel teeth 783c.

  A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c, and a fastening screw inserted into the one-side support hole 783a from the rear side is screwed into the female screw. As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the vertically reversing member 781 so as not to fall off.

  The linear motion plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction, and has a cylindrical projecting portion 784a that projects in a cylindrical shape that is inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783; An arc-shaped plate portion 784b protruding in an arc shape about the central axis of the cylindrical protruding portion 784a, and an oblong shape extending in the left-right direction on both upper and lower sides of the cylindrical protruding portion 784a. A pair of long hole portions 784c, a pair of upper and lower support plate portions 784d arranged in parallel at a position between the long hole portions 784c, and a pair of support plate portions 784d projecting rearward, and an intermediate portion between the support plate portions 784d. A pair of ridges 784e, which are formed on the sides facing each other and are formed as ridges extending in the front-rear direction, and a cylindrical shape which is disposed at an end of the support plate 784d and is opened on the back side and has an inner peripheral side And a pair of fastened portions 784f in which female threads are formed A ring holding member having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between an arrangement hole 784g formed between the cylindrical projecting portion 784a and the support plate portion 784d and a shaft support member 786. A half 784h and a magnet holding half 784i formed in a rectangular box shape so as to be able to hold the magnet Mg between the shaft support member 786 are provided.

  The cylindrical projecting portion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, and is slightly longer than the axial length of the other cylindrical portion 783b. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side. That is, the fastening screw inserted from the back side into the other cylindrical portion 783b is screwed into the female screw of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a, so that the intermediate arm member 783 cannot fall into the cylindrical projecting portion 784a. It is supported by.

  The arc-shaped plate portion 784b is formed in an arc shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b. Accordingly, the arcuate plate portion 784b is disposed close to the other cylindrical portion 783b in the assembled state so as to radially oppose the other cylindrical portion 783b, thereby limiting the tilt displacement of the other cylindrical portion 783b with respect to the rotation axis. Thus, the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 around the other cylindrical portion 783b can be stabilized.

  The long hole portion 784c is an opening through which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and is fastened through a female screw formed in the cylindrical portion 776a from the rear side through the insertion hole of the drop-prevention plate portion 776b. When the screw is screwed in, the linear motion plate member 784 is supported by the main body member 771 so as not to fall off.

  In the supporting state (assembled state), the linear motion plate member 784 is slidable along the direction in which the long hole portion 784c is formed. That is, the linear motion plate member 784 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction.

  The support plate portion 784d is a plate-like portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotating member 785 so as to suppress the vertical displacement, and the protruding ridge portion 784e defines the horizontal arrangement of the metal rod 785a. , But will be described later in detail.

  The arrangement hole 784g is an opening for avoiding interference of the shaft rotation member 785 with the beveled tooth member 785c, but details thereof will be described later.

  The shaft rotation member 785 is a member disposed in a pair on the left and right sides and supported by the linear motion plate member 784. The shaft rotation member 785 includes a metal rod 785 a formed in a substantially cylindrical shape from a metal material, and a length of the metal rod 785 a. A concave groove portion 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position in the direction, a member provided at the left and right inner ends of the metal bar 785a and fixed to the metal bar 785a, and a bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783; A bevel tooth member 785c having a bevel gear (bevel gear) meshing therewith; an end plate member 785d disposed at the left and right outer ends of the metal bar 785a and fixed to the metal bar 785a; and an end plate member 785d. A ring-shaped metal member 785e arranged around the metal bar 785a in a manner to be raised from the end plate member 785d, and a female screw formed inside the left and right inner portions of the end plate member 785d. Metal part Di is and a rotational position stabilizing portion 785f that is screwed into the fixed.

  The metal bar 785a is arranged between the pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear motion plate member 784, and the protruding ridge portion 784e is arranged in the concave groove portion 785b. Here, the concave groove portion 785b has a dimensional relationship with the ridge portion 784e so as to be slidable, and has a dimensional relationship with which the lateral displacement with respect to the ridge portion 784e is regulated.

  That is, the groove width of the concave groove portion 785b is set slightly longer than the left and right width of the ridge portion 784e, the diameter of the groove deep portion of the concave groove portion 785b is set shorter than the gap length between the ridge portions 784e. The diameter of the portion where the groove 785b is not formed is set to be longer than the length of the gap between the ridges 784e.

  Thus, the metal rod 785a can be supported on the back side of the linear motion plate member 784 in a manner that the shaft can rotate and the displacement in the left and right direction is suppressed.

  The bevel tooth member 785c is arranged so as to enter the arrangement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. In a state where the umbrella member 785c partially enters the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 engages the umbrella portion 785c with the umbrella member 785c from the opposite side (rear side) of the linear motion plate member 784. Assembled in

  In this assembled state, although the bevel tooth member 785c is inserted into the arrangement hole 784g, it cannot be dropped to the front side because the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear motion plate member 784. The displacement to the rear side is regulated by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the beveled tooth member 785c is undetachably supported by the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783.

  The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed in an inner peripheral shape corresponding to a non-circular shape (for example, a D-shaped cross section) as a tip of the metal rod 785a, and the inner peripheral shape and the metal rod 785a are formed. Are formed and fixed in a dimensional relationship of interference fit.

  The method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, a method of fixing using an adhesive or the like may be used, or a female screw may be formed at the tip of the metal rod 785a and a fastening screw inserted into the end plate member 785d may be screwed into the female screw. A method of fastening and fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a may be used, or another method may be used.

  The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half 784h of the linear motion plate member 784. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held, and the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d supporting the metal rod 785a is slidably contacted on the inner peripheral side of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, so that the rotation center of the end plate member 785d Can easily match the axis passing through the center of rotation of the bevel tooth member 785c, and the load generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a can be reduced.

  The rotation position stabilizing portion 785f functions as a portion where the metal screw provided is attracted to the magnet Mg.

  The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape, and has an insertion hole 786a formed so as to be able to insert a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 784f, and a ring holding member for the linear motion plate member 784. The magnet Mg can be held between the ring holding half 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e with the half 784h and the magnet holding half 784i of the linear motion plate member 784. And a magnet holding half 786c formed in a rectangular box shape.

  When the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 786a from the back side is screwed into the fastened portion 784f to assemble the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft support member 786, the plate portion of the shaft support member 786 has the back side of the metal rod 785a. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding half portions 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding half portions 784i and 786c.

  The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed in a box shape with left and right inner sides opened in a pair in the front and rear directions, and is fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the shaft rotating member 785, and different on the opposite surface. A decoration consisting of a figure, pattern, character, picture, etc. that can be read in a meaning is formed.

  That is, the covering member 787 includes a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface that is visually recognized by a player in the extended state (see FIG. 54), a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the back surface thereof, When the first main decoration surface 787a1 is arranged on the front side and enters the effect standby state (see FIG. 52), the first sub decoration surface 787a2 formed on the side visible to the player and the back surface thereof And a second sub-decoration surface 787b2 to be formed. The second sub-decoration surface 787b2 is formed on a side where the player can visually recognize the second sub-decoration surface 787b1 in a state where the second main decoration surface 787b1 is arranged on the front side and enters an effect standby state (see FIG. 52).

  The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed of two front and rear members fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d and formed in a substantially box shape with left and right inner sides opened in an assembled state (see FIG. 26). A plurality of extending portions 787c extending toward the left and right members, and a recessed portion 787d recessed so as to retract to the left and right outside at a portion between the extending portions 787c. .

  The extending portion 787c is formed such that its ends are in contact with or close to each other when the covering member 787 is in the close arrangement state (see FIG. 26). Thereby, the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized integrally.

  The recessed portion 787d is a circular portion arranged at the center of the light diffusing member 778b of the light emitting effecting means 778 or a left and right center upper portion of the upper elongate portion 775 when the covering member 787 is in the close arrangement state (see FIG. 26). This is a portion for opening the arc plate portion or the like so as to be visible, and is formed in a concave shape so as to at least avoid interference with these portions.

  The covering member 787 has a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 is directed to the front side and the first sub-decorated surface 787a2 is directed to the upper side in accordance with the operation of the rendering device 780 (see FIGS. 29 and 52). The state in which the decorative surface 787b1 faces the front and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 faces upward (see FIG. 30) can be switched. First, a mechanism that constitutes a displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

  FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the direct acting plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785. FIG. 57 (a) shows a vertical arrangement state (also referred to as an upright vertical arrangement state) of an upside-down reversing member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and FIG. ) Shows a state in which the upside-down reversing member 781 has been rotated approximately 24 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57A around the cylindrical projection 777c in a front view. 57 (a) and 57 (b), the illustration of the end plate member 785d of the left shaft rotating member 785 and the right shaft rotating member 785 is omitted for easy understanding.

  In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is arranged so as to enter the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). Further, in the inverted vertical arrangement state in which the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotated by 180 degrees from the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d is arranged so as to enter the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d. You.

  That is, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured to switch between the upright and downside orientation members 781 and the upside-down vertically arranged state. The device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of the rendering device 780.

  As shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B, when the vertically reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the left-right direction while changing its posture. The angle of this posture change corresponds (proportionally) to the rotation angle of the shaft rotating member 785, and the lateral displacement of the other cylindrical portion 785b is the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. Corresponding to

  Here, the order in which the rotational displacement and the lateral displacement (linear motion displacement) occur will be described. These displacements do not occur at the same time at the same time, and there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is larger and arrangements in which the degree of linear displacement is larger.

  First, a brief description will be given. The configurations of the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 are a well-known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the upside down reversing member 781 rotates about the cylindrical projecting portion 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 781c of the upside down reversing member 781 moves forward. The displacement direction of the linear motion plate member 784 connected to the other-side cylindrical portion 783b is regulated so as to move in parallel along the movement axis HL1 passing through the center of the cylindrical projecting portion 777c when viewed. The pair of right and left linear motion plate members 784 are simultaneously displaced in the left and right opposite directions along the movement axis HL1.

  As shown in FIG. 57B, the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced by the length L1 in the left-right direction by about 24 degrees from the vertical arrangement state shown in FIG. 57A. The length L1 is half the width of the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 (the length between the left-right center and the left-right width end). It is illustrated as

  Also, due to the state change from FIG. 57 (a) to FIG. 57 (b), the posture change centered on the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise in front view, The angle is set to be equal to or less than half of 15 degrees, which is the angle between the adjacent teeth of the beveled tooth portion 783c.

  Since the umbrella tooth member 785c is arranged on the near side of the intermediate arm member 783, the transmission of the load (engaging transmission) between the umbrella tooth portion 783c and the umbrella tooth member 785c is opposed to each other in the front-rear direction, that is, Occurs on the movement axis HL1 in front view.

  FIG. 58A is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the direct acting plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. FIG. 58B is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the direct acting plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 58B, the beveled tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the beveled tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 (in FIG. To be displaced). In FIG. 58B, in order to facilitate understanding, the beveled tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the beveled tooth member 785c are illustrated as being overlapped, and the overlapping width is set to beveled tooth portion 783c. It is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

  The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the driving force is transmitted, whereby the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced. While the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced 180 degrees counterclockwise from the front view from the state shown in FIG. 57A, the right shaft rotating member 785 rotates backward and the left shaft rotating member 785 moves forward. Rotate in the turning direction.

  In addition, while the upside down member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees about the other cylindrical portion 783b, and accordingly, the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 becomes Rotate 180 degrees. That is, the angle at which the beveled tooth member 785c rotates about the metal bar 785a is twice as large as the angle of rotation about the other cylindrical portion 783b of the beveled tooth portion 783c.

  Here, the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that can be caused by the pressing due to the displacement from the state of FIG. 58 (a) to the state of FIG. 58 (b) is less than the circumferential thickness of the gear teeth, and This is less than the amount that can reliably rotate the 785c gear teeth. That is, the displacement amount until the contacting representative tooth rotates to the position of the adjacent tooth (the displacement required for the rotation of an angle of 30 degrees according to the fact that the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are arranged at equal intervals of 12) Volume).

  The gear teeth of the beveled tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the beveled tooth member 785c. However, in this embodiment, since the intermediate arm member 783 and the beveled tooth member 785c are formed from a resin material, the pressing is not performed. Since the accompanying displacement is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the beveled tooth member 785c, the attitude of the shaft rotating member 785 in the rotational direction of the beveled tooth member 785c is changed from the state of FIG. ) Is maintained.

  The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the beveled tooth member 785c is based on the driving force transmitted to the intermediate arm member 783 via the upside-down reversing member 781 from the magnet Mg to the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f of the shaft rotating member 785 ( 54 (see FIG. 54).

  That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts so as to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilizing portion 785f so as to limit the right shaft rotating member 785 from rotating and displacing in the backward direction. The shaft rotating member 785 on the right side receives the urging force in the forward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attraction force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction to increase the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785.

  Also, with respect to the shaft rotating member 785 on the left side, the arrangement of the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f is on the front side of the end plate member 785d as in the right side, while the arrangement of the magnet Mg is on the upper side opposite to the right side. (See FIG. 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts so as to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilizing portion 785f, so that the left shaft rotating member 785 receives the urging force in the backward direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attraction force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction to increase the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left shaft rotating member 785.

  In the present embodiment, the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c from the state shown in FIG. 57A until the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced by the length L1 in the left-right direction from the state shown in FIG. It is designed to be able to generate a load exceeding.

  As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 and the beveled tooth member 785c undergo elastic deformation so as to absorb the displacement of the beveled tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58B. When the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57 (b), the beveled tooth member 785c rotates beyond the attractive force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg and the metal screw of the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f are rotated. When the arrangement is separated, the magnetic force is extremely reduced, and the intermediate arm member 783 and the beveled tooth member 785c released from the attraction force of the magnet Mg are rotationally displaced while elastically recovering.

  Therefore, at the start of rotation, the amount of elastic recovery increases the momentum in the rotation direction of the shaft rotation member 785, so that the rotation speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased. This improvement in rotational speed occurs not only in the shaft rotating member 785 but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) fastened and fixed to the shaft rotating member 785.

  Thereby, the operation of the covering member 787 can be adjusted without changing the driving speed of the driving motor 782, and the effect of the covering member 787 can be reduced while reducing the load of the control design of the driving motor 782. The effect can be improved.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the rotational rotation of the shaft rotation member 785 occurs due to the attraction force of the magnet Mg can be delayed from the timing at which the beveled tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts rotating. .

  The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f that receives the attracting force of the magnet Mg is configured as a pair of upper and lower parts, and when the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, one of the rotational position stabilizing portions 785f. 52 (b) is placed close to the magnet Mg and receives the attracting force (see FIG. 52 (b)). When the direction is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, the other (FIG. 52 (b)). ), The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f on the upper side) is arranged close to the magnet Mg and receives the attracting force.

  That is, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the close arrangement state (see FIGS. 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg causes the rotation of the shaft rotating member. It works effectively for the purpose of limiting the rotational displacement of the 785. Therefore, in the displacement from the close arrangement state, an effect that the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is delayed by the magnetic force can be generated regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

  That is, from the state shown in FIG. 58 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 58 (b), the degree of the linear motion displacement in the left-right direction is larger than the degree of the rotational displacement. When the vertically reversing member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in front view beyond FIG. 57B, the degree of the linear motion displacement in the left-right direction is settled, and a rotational displacement occurs.

  According to the present embodiment, a similar effect occurs because the slider crank mechanism is employed as described above. That is, in the vicinity of the vertical arrangement state, the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c is large in the left-right direction and small in the up-down direction. Therefore, the displacement in the left-right direction of the translation plate member 784 is large, and the rotation displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 is small.

  On the other hand, since the displacement of the cylindrical projection 781c becomes smaller in the left-right direction and increases in the up-down direction as the longitudinal direction of the upside-down reversing member 781 falls closer to the left-right direction, the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 becomes smaller. The rotation amount is small and the rotation amount is large. Therefore, the horizontal displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is small, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 is large.

  Therefore, in the rotation operation of the upside-down reversing member 781 starting from the vertical arrangement state and ending in the vertical arrangement state, first, the degree of the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 increases, and then the degree of the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 decreases. The degree of displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 in the left-right direction increases again.

  When the linear displacement and the rotational displacement are generated in such an order, the extending portion 787c of the covering member 787 is provided at the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772. Collisions can be avoided. Next, a change in the appearance of the covering member 787 will be described.

  59 (a) to 59 (c) are front views of the rendering device 780. FIG. 59 (a) to 59 (c), the reversing operation of the elevating reversal effect device 770 is illustrated in chronological order. FIG. 59 (a) shows the rendering device 780 with the upside down member 781 in the upright vertical arrangement state, and FIG. 59 (b) shows the rendering device when the upside down member 781 is rotated 90 degrees from the vertical arrangement state. 780 is illustrated, and in FIG. 59 (c), the rendering device 780 in an upside-down vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781 is illustrated.

  The upside down member 781 is turned 180 degrees counterclockwise in front view from the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A), thereby changing the state to the inverted vertical arrangement state. In the inverted vertical arrangement state, the posture of the covering member 787 is inverted by 180 degrees with respect to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59A). Thus, the decorative surface that can be visually recognized by the player is switched (see FIG. 59 (c)).

  When the vertically reversing member 781 is displaced 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) as viewed from the front in the inverted vertical arrangement state, it returns to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A). Therefore, every time when the driving motor 782 (see FIG. 56) is driven by reversing the direction so that the upside down reversing member 781 is rotated and displaced by 180 degrees, the state shown in FIG. ) Can be repeatedly switched between the states.

  As described above, while the upside-down inversion member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57 (a), the shaft rotation member 785 engages with the beveled tooth portion 783c to rotate the shaft rotation member 785 by 180 degrees. I do. Here, from the rotation direction of the beveled tooth portion 783c, the right shaft rotating member 785 rotates backward, and the left shaft rotating member 785 rotates forward. That is, the pair of shaft rotation members 785 and the cover member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d arranged in the left and right directions rotate in opposite directions.

  Therefore, at an intermediate position, the right covering member 787 faces the second sub-decoration surface 787b2 toward the front side, and the left covering member 787 faces the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 toward the front side (see FIG. 59B). ).

  Accordingly, during the rotational displacement of the covering member 787, the first sub-decorating surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorating surface 787b2) of the left covering member 787 and the first sub-decorating surface 787a2 ( Or, it can be avoided that the second sub-decoration surface 787b2) is visually recognized together.

  Therefore, the decoration surface of the covering member 787 during the rotational displacement can be intentionally left and right shifted in content, and the content of the decorative surface can be configured to be difficult for the player to recognize. The amount of information provided by the covering member 787 to the player can be reduced.

  Thereby, the player's attention to the covering member 787 during the rotational displacement can be reduced. Further, since the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1) when the rotation displacement is stopped, the game is performed until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops. The effect that the line of sight of the user is easily maintained by the covering member 787 can also be achieved.

  The rotational displacement is performed in the extended state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 54), but this rotational displacement stops, and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are changed to the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787a1). In the state where the two main decoration surfaces 787b1) are aligned, the effect device 780 has been raised to near the upper and lower center of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 30), and in this state, the first sub decoration surface 787a2. (Or the second sub-decoration surface 787b2) is unlikely to attract attention.

  In particular, especially when the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second operation unit 700, the field of view on the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decoration surface 787b2) is changed to the third operation. It will be blocked by the unit 800.

  On the other hand, when the second operation unit 700 is in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52) and the effect device 780 is disposed below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the first sub decorative surface 787a2 (or). The second sub-decoration surface 787b2) can easily enter the player's field of view.

  As described above, in the second operation unit 700, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) is prevented from being visually recognized during the rotational displacement in the extended state, or the player side. For example, in the effect standby state, it is formed as a side surface that can be noticed by the player.

  Thus, the appearance of the second operation unit 700 can be changed according to the arrangement, so that the production performance with respect to the cost of arranging the second operation unit 700 (occupation of a place, burden of concealing it well) becomes excessively low. The occurrence of a state can be easily avoided.

  After the rotation of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787, the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54B), thereby stabilizing the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787. Can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, since the metal member that is attracted to the magnet Mg is formed of a metal screw, the cost of the member can be reduced and the maintainability can be improved as compared with a case where a dedicated metal member is designed. .

  As described above, since the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by a linear motion displacement in the left-right direction, the arrangement of the rendering device 780 capable of performing the rotational displacement is limited. That is, in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33) of the second operation unit 700, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member arranged on the left and right are performed by performing rotational displacement. 750 and the front support member 760, and decorative members such as the three-dimensional decorative portion 768 a fixedly arranged on the front side thereof will collide with the covering member 787.

  On the other hand, in the extended state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 30), the space is secured in the left-right direction, so that the rotation of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 can be performed.

  Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is determined from the output of the detection sensor 713 that the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state. It is controlled to be executable on the assumption of. Thus, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 can be normally caused.

  The extending portions 787c are arranged close to each other in the vertically arranged state of the upside-down reversing member 781, and in this state, they are opposed to the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772 at the front and rear. Therefore, when the cover member 787 is rotationally displaced from this arrangement by the rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction, the extension portion 787c collides with the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, Failure occurs.

  On the other hand, the configuration in which the extending portion 787c is arranged close to the other is to produce an effect that the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized integrally, and is a configuration necessary for production, Preferably, it can be maintained.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced by the length L1 in the left-right direction before the rotational displacement (see FIG. 57). By the linear motion displacement of the length L1, the extending portion 787c can be retracted from a position before and after the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772, and the extending portion 787c and the upper elongated portion 775 can be retracted. It is possible to avoid a problem in which the connecting portion of the lower elongate portion 772 collides with the connecting portion.

  Further, by configuring the rotational displacement in this manner, the rotational displacement does not occur (or is limited) at the length L1 while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, and the rotational displacement occurs at the remaining length L2. Therefore, the amount of displacement in the left-right direction during rotation of the covering member 787 can be reduced.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the arrangement of the covering member 787 changes greatly during rotation, the attention force of the covering member 787 can be suppressed low, and the rotational displacement can be made inconspicuous. As the design of the surfaces 787a1 to 787b2, it is possible to perform the design while ignoring the appearance during the rotational displacement, so that the degree of design freedom can be improved.

  The timing at which the covering member 787 starts rotating can be arbitrarily set by designing the attraction force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, for example, even if a design change is made to increase the left and right width of the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771, the magnet Mg Is changed to a magnet having a large attraction force, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the collision between the connecting portion and the extending portion 787c.

  As shown by imaginary lines in FIG. 59, the insertion hole 778c is arranged so as to be always hidden by the covering member 787. This can prevent the player from visually recognizing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 778c, and can prevent the effect from being reduced by the fastening screw.

  In this embodiment, the decorations (graphics, patterns, patterns, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same for the left and right covering members 787. The arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is left-right asymmetric in accordance with the right and left decorations.

  That is, since the insertion hole 778c is a portion into which the fastening screw is inserted, it becomes impossible to arrange the LED on the electric decoration board 787a at that position (see FIG. 55). Further, since the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, the fastening screw is likely to be dark and visible at the time of emitting light.

  Therefore, in the left and right decorations, it is desirable to dispose the insertion holes 778c so as to avoid a brightly lit and conspicuous portion. As a result, the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is left-right asymmetric.

  Note that the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is left-right symmetric. In particular, when the decoration of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 is the same on the left and right covering members 787, there is no disadvantage caused by arranging the insertion holes 778c symmetrically, and the illuminated substrate 778a can be easily designed.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), in the present embodiment, the covering member 787 is linearly displaced left and right during the reversing operation of the elevating / reversing effect device 770, and the vicinity of the central portion of the light diffusing member 778b is the extended portion 787c. Even when not surrounded by, the mechanical parts such as the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 are hidden so as not to be visually recognized.

  That is, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit into the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b disposed on the front side, and the vertical width of the linear motion plate member 784 is Are designed to fit in the upper and lower widths of the left and right long portions of the upper long portion 775. The upside down member 781 is designed to have a shape that fits in the outer shape of the disk portion of the upper long portion 775 disposed on the front side, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that the displacement trajectory fits in the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b. Designed.

  As a result, the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the rendering device 780 can be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and can be made invisible, so that the rendering effect due to the appearance of the rendering device 780 during the reversing operation is reduced. Can be avoided.

  Returning to FIG. The third operation unit 800 is arranged above the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the effect standby state, and is supported by the distal ends of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the rear case 510. The unit is configured to be able to be displaced up and down as the elevating arm member 801 is driven in the vertical direction.

  FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. In FIGS. 60 and 61, a portion constituting the displacement of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated, and the illustration of the decorative members 870 and 880 as decorative portions disposed outside is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the third operation unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by the elevating arm member 801 and a fixed cylinder to which the cylindrical portion 821 is fastened and fixed to the center of the held member 810. The member 820, an inner rotating member 830 supported by the cylindrical portion 821 with the cylindrical portion 821 inserted through the inner peripheral side, and a main body portion 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted through the inner peripheral side. The rotatable outer rotating member 840, a plurality (five in this embodiment) of intermediate arm members 850 rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and the held member 810 And a drive transmitting device 860 for transmitting a driving force for displacing the inner rotating member 830, the outer rotating member 840, and the intermediate arm member 850.

  The held member 810 includes a disk-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated lid member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

  The main body member 811 has a cylindrical fixing portion 812 which is concavely formed at a center portion to hold the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and has an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw for fixing and a through hole for inserting electric wiring. A detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler-type sensor and is fixed with its detection groove facing the side capable of receiving the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840, a motor holding portion 814 holding the drive motor 861, A plurality of cylindrical protrusions 815 projecting forward from the front as cylindrical portions that support the transmission gear 863 so that they cannot fall off, and a double cylindrical portion that supports the load response gear 865 so that they can not fall off. And a plurality of double cylindrical protrusions 816 that are protruded.

  The perforated lid member 817 has a circular hole 818 formed in the center in the front-rear direction. The circular hole 818 is designed to have such a size that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 project inward from the inner peripheral edge thereof when viewed in the opening direction.

  The fixed cylindrical member 820 includes the above-described cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, and a light emitting unit such as an LED on the front side which is fastened and fixed to the circular plate portion 822. A disc-shaped illuminated substrate 823 to be provided, and a light-transmitting resin material formed of an umbrella-shaped (or bowl-shaped) light-transmitting resin material capable of covering the illuminated substrate 823 from the front side A decorative member 824 and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 821 on the circular plate portion 822 side and configured to be slidable with the cylindrical portion 821.

  The cylindrical portion 821 has a female screw formed at the front end portion on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the cylindrical fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female screw, thereby fixing the cylindrical member. The member 820 is non-rotatably fastened and fixed to the held member 810.

  The cylindrical portion 821 is formed so as to penetrate in the axial direction on the inner peripheral side, and the electric wiring inserted through the through hole of the cylindrical fixing portion 812 is creeped to the front side through this penetrating portion, and is disposed behind the electric decoration board 823. Connected to the connector.

  The illuminated substrate 823 includes, as LEDs, pentagonal vertices and an inner light emitting portion 823a arranged at a center position equidistant from the vertices, and an outer light emitting portion 823b arranged at 15 locations on the circumference at equal intervals. And. The inner light emitting unit 823a is configured by an LED whose optical axis faces the front side (front), and the outer light emitting unit 823b is configured by an LED whose optical axis is directed radially outward (diametrically).

  The outer light emitting portion 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As will be described later, the light emitted from the outer light emitting portion 823b is applied to the plating portion 871a of the first decorative member 870 arranged closely and at equal intervals on the circumference. The member 870 is irradiated with light from the three LEDs.

  The outer light emitting portion 823b is fixedly arranged on the electric decoration board 823, and the first decoration member 870 is configured to be rotationally displaced around the center of the circle, but the outer light emitting portion 823b and the first decoration member 870 are coaxial. Are arranged at regular intervals on the circle of the first decorative member 870, regardless of the rotation direction of the first decorative member 870, the light from the same number (three in this embodiment) of LEDs is always applied to each first decorative member 870. Can be irradiated.

  Thus, it is possible to suppress a change in the light amount of the light LD1 applied to the first decoration member 870 during the rotation operation.

  The sliding member 825 is configured such that the inner diameter side portion is slidable on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, while the outer diameter side portion is slidable on the circular flange portion 831a of the inner rotating member 830. Formed.

  The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side, and has a cylindrical portion projecting rearward from the inner diameter side end of the flange-shaped portion. The diameter is formed to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange portion 831a, so that the inner portion is slidably fitted to the inner rotating member 830.

  The interposition of the sliding member 825 prevents direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 rotatable therearound. Further, the sliding member 825 is disposed on the side of the circular plate portion 822 of the cylindrical portion 821 and also on the side of the main body portion 831 on the side of the circular flange-like portion 831a which is advantageous in terms of strength. The possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 or the inner rotating member 830 is damaged or deformed by a load generated at the time of poor sliding (when the displacement resistance becomes unintentionally excessive) can be reduced.

  The inner rotating member 830 has a cylindrical main body 831 having a circular flange-shaped portion 831a at the front end and a radially elongated direction at a position obtained by dividing the periphery of the main body 831 into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. A plurality of metal rods 832 fastened and fixed to the circular flange-shaped portion 831 a in a posture along the plurality of metal rods 832, and a plurality of metal rods 832 formed so as to be inserted therethrough and configured to be linearly displaceable by being guided by the metal rods 832. And a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported at a radially outer portion of the linear moving member 833.

  The main body portion 831 includes a plurality of sliding protrusions extending rearward in a ridge shape with the circular flange-shaped portion 831a as a base end at an intermediate angular position (five places) between the above-described circular flange-shaped portion 831a and the adjacent metal bar 832. It has a ridge portion 831b and a plurality of recessed portions 831c which are recessed and formed at circumferentially spaced intervals at the end opposite to the circular flange portion 831a.

  The sliding ridge 831b is a portion configured to be slidable on the inner peripheral side curved surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and to reduce a contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and reduce contact friction. The protruding tip is formed in a semicircular cross section.

  The arrangement of the sliding ridges 831b is set at an intermediate angular position between the adjacent metal rods 832 as described above. In other words, the sliding ridges 831b are located on the opposite side of the metal rod 832 with respect to the center axis of the outer rotating member 840. Position (a position shifted by 180 degrees).

  Thus, in the switching rotation operation described later, the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832, and the load is applied so that the outer rotary member 840 on which the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally displaced radially. Even if the outer rotating member 840 is displaced, the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 can be received by the sliding ridge 831b. Can be kept low.

  The recessed portion 831c is a portion where the transmission protrusion 864a of the central annular gear 864 enters and is disposed. By disposing the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c, relative rotation of each other is disabled. The rotation angle of the central ring gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830 can be matched.

  The linear motion member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical protruding portions 833a and 833b that are arranged at intervals so as to be arranged in the linear motion displacement direction and protrude rearward in a cylindrical shape, and the cylindrical protruding portions 833a. , 833b as a reference, a cylindrical shaft portion 833c formed on a side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 and inserted through the rotating member 834, and a distal end portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c along the circumferential direction. And a recessed groove 833d to be recessed.

  The recessed groove 833d is arranged on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and the overhanging portions 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 slide. By being fitted to the outside as much as possible, it functions as a displacement regulating groove for preventing the rotating member 834 from dropping in a radially outward direction, which will be described later in detail.

  The rotating member 834 includes a bevel gear 834a formed in a bevel gear shape, and a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 834b protruding in a cylindrical shape in parallel with the linear motion direction. The beveled tooth portion 834a is not formed over the entire circumference, but is formed over 3/4 circumference (about 270 degrees) necessary for operation.

  A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and the decorative members 870, 880 are formed by screwing fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 880. It functions so as to be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, but details will be described later.

  The outer rotating member 840 has a cylindrical body 841 and a plurality (five in this embodiment) extending radially outward at a position obtained by dividing the circumference of the body 841 into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. Of the main body 841, a gear tooth 843 formed on the outer peripheral side along the circumference of the rear end of the main body 841, and a diameter of the main body 841 which can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. And a detected portion 844 extending outward.

  The extension arm portion 842 includes a cylindrical portion 842 a extending parallel to the central axis of the main body portion 841, a female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 842 a, and the base end of the intermediate arm member 850. By screwing a fastening screw into the female screw in a state where the cylindrical portion 842a is inserted into the side bar portion 851, the intermediate arm member 850 is supported by the extended arm portion 842 so as not to fall off.

  The gear teeth 843 are provided so as to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, thereby functioning as a portion that switches the presence or absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, which will be described later in detail.

  The intermediate arm member 850 is a member that is formed in a long shape, and includes a base rod 851 whose one end is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 842 a of the outer rotation member 840, and another part of the base rod 851. A thickened portion 852 which is thickened toward the front side at the end side, and a distal end side rod portion 853 which extends from the front end portion of the thickened portion 852 in parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base side rod portion 851. And a rotation transmitting portion 854 formed with gear teeth at the end of the tip side rod portion 853.

  The rotation transmitting portion 854 is a portion that interlocks with the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834, and has a supported hole 854a that is formed in a dimensional relationship that can rotate relative to each other with the cylindrical projecting portion 833a inserted. A guide hole 854b, which is a long hole formed in an arc centered on the supported hole 854a and guides the cylindrical projected portion 833b while being inserted therethrough, and a bevel gear having the supported hole 854a as a central axis. And a bevel gear 854c that meshes with the bevel gear 834a of the rotating member 834 to form a bevel gear.

  The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 fastened and fixed to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 fixed to a drive shaft of the drive motor 861, and a drive supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 815 so as not to fall off. A plurality of transmission gears 863 meshed so as to be able to transmit the driving force via the gear 862, a central annular gear 864 meshed with the transmission gear 863, and a front side of the arrangement of the central annular gear 864. A pair of load response gears 865 which are displaced and are pivotally supported by the double cylindrical protrusion 816 so as not to fall off, and are supported by the double cylinder of the double cylindrical protrusion 816 on the back side of the load response gear 865. A torque limiter 866 whose resistance according to the load in the rotation direction applied to the load response gear 865 is variable.

  The central annular gear 864 is formed in an annular shape, and is designed so that the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 can be inserted into the inner peripheral side thereof, and is recessed so as to be able to enter the concave portion 831 c of the inner rotating member 830. A transmission projection 864a projecting from the bottom plate portion to the front side in an arrangement and a shape corresponding to the setting portion 831c, and a coaxial double annular bottom plate disposed on the inner and outer diameter sides of the transmission projection 864a. And a support annular portion 864b protruding from the portion to the front side.

  In the assembled state, the rear end of the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 has an intermediate fit in the gap between the support annular portions 864b in a state where the transmission protrusion 864a enters the recessed portion 831c. Alternatively, they are fitted in a dimensional relationship of interference fit. Thereby, the central annular gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 can be integrally rotated.

  The arrangement of the recess 831c and the transmission protrusion 864a is not limited at all. For example, they may be arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, or may be arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction.

  If the intervals are equal, it is possible to assemble the transmission projection 864a and the recessed portion 831c by adjusting the arrangement of the transmission projection 864a and the recessed portion 831c without considering the attitude of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864. It is possible to do. As in the present embodiment, when the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the rotational direction (the same at 72-degree intervals), the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are set. It is considered that there is little influence due to misalignment at the time of assembling, so that equal intervals are effective.

  If the intervals are unequal, during the assembling operation, the number of steps for assembling the center annular gear 864 with respect to the inner rotating member 830 and then assembling is increased by one, but the transmission protrusion 864a to the recessed portion 831c is increased. By utilizing the arrangement, the posture of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 can be adjusted.

  The load response gear 865 is provided so as to mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840. Since the torque limiter 866 is engaged with the load response gear 865, the load response gear 865 is caused by the magnitude of the rotational resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 and the outer rotating member 840. The state in which the rotation of the 865 is permitted and the state in which the rotation is restricted (restricted) are switched.

  That is, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied, and release transmission of the driving force. In the present embodiment, a device (one-way torque limiter) for transmitting a driving force in one direction is constituted by a set in which the transmission direction is reversed, and switching of drive transmission by the torque limiter 866 can be performed in two directions with good responsiveness. It is configured as follows.

  FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. 62 and 63, the decorative portion of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated, and a portion for configuring the displacement is not illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the third operation unit 800 is configured such that one of the inner rotating member 830 and one of the cylindrical projecting portions 834 b fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834 b of the inner rotating member 830. A first decorative member 870 that covers the side surface, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b and covers the cylindrical projecting portion 834b from the side opposite to the first decorative member 870. .

  The first decorative member 870 includes a first skeleton portion 871 formed so as to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a first covering portion 875 formed to cover one side of the first skeleton portion 871. , Is provided.

  The first skeleton portion 871 is entirely plated so as to easily reflect light.

  The first covering portion 875 has a frame formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material on the inside of the frame, and has a figure, a pattern, and a picture of a character (hereinafter, also referred to as “picture etc.”) drawn on its surface. When the front surface faces the front side, the pattern or the like is visually recognized by the player.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of (five) first covering portions 875 each have an independent pattern or the like. Therefore, by changing the first covering portion 875 that emits light intensely by the light emission control by the electric decoration board 823 or changing the arrangement of the first covering portion 875, the pattern or the like that attracts the player's attention is different. Can be made.

  For example, at the player's point of view, the third symbol display device 81 executes a display effect that causes the third symbol display device 81 to pay attention to which of the first covering portions 875 is stopped, and at the same time, the inner rotating member 830. Is controlled so as to rotate, the first covering portion 875 on the third symbol display device 81 side can be continuously changed with the rotation, so that the player can be changed over until the rotation stops. Can be gathered in the first covering portion 875.

  The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeleton 881 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a second covering portion 885 formed to cover the other side of the second skeleton 881. , Is provided.

  The second skeleton portion 881 includes a holding piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 accommodated in the second covering portion 885 so as not to fall off.

  A metal screw is screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 at a position (adjacent position) where the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the adjacent second covering portion 885 acts. The magnet Mg2 is attracted to the screw to ensure the integrity of the second covering portion 885 in the united state (particularly, one united state, see FIG. 32).

  The second covering portion 885 has a figure, a pattern, and a pattern of a character (hereinafter, also referred to as a "pattern") drawn on the surface, and when the surface faces the front side, the pattern or the like is played. Is visually recognized.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of (at least two, at most five) second covering portions 885 form a pattern drawn on a plurality (five in the present embodiment) of second covering portions 885. Each of the second covering portions 885 is formed in a circle so that the five second covering portions 885 are visually recognized as a “circular body” when viewed from the front when the five second covering portions 885 are combined. Decorated to form part of the body.

  The pattern or the like drawn on the second covering portion 885 is not particularly limited, but in the present embodiment, the content grasped from the second covering portion 885 in the union state is the rotation direction of the second decorative member 880. It is designed as a picture that does not make a big difference even if the arrangement of is different. That is, the design does not have a clear upper, lower, left and right pattern, and the design is such that a change in the outer shape is not conspicuous even when rotated (in the present embodiment, a circular shape).

  Therefore, the direction in which the plurality of second covering portions 885 can be firmly integrated with each other can improve the performance when the second covering portion 885 is visually recognized by a player. In this regard, in the present embodiment, in the united state, the second covering unit 885 side is firmly integrated by the attraction force of the magnet Mg2, so that the uniting when the second covering unit 885 is disposed on the front side. The effect performance in the state can be improved.

  In each of the second covering portions 885, a magnet Mg2 is provided on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the other side. When the direction of the second covering portion 885 is reversed by the switching rotation operation described later, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in a front view is also reversed.

  Also in this case, the metal screws that each magnet Mg2 attracts are replaced only by the metal screws that are screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 adjacent on the opposite side. Since the portions 885 are arranged in an annular shape, there is no change in the degree of adsorption when they are integrated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first covering portion 875 does not contain a magnet. As a result, the strength of integration on the side of the first covering portion 875 is slightly weakened, but this prevents the performance performance from being reduced.

  In other words, since the first covering portion 875 has an independent pattern or the like, the degree of integration in the united state is weak, and even if the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is slightly shifted, There is no possibility that a pattern or the like to be visually recognized by a person cannot be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance performance of the performance using the pattern drawn on the first covering portion 875 from being reduced.

  Further, since the strength of the integration on the first covering portion 875 side is weakened, the vibration caused by the vertical displacement (stop from) and the rotational displacement as integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation (stop from). ), The arrangement of the combined first covering portions 875 can be shifted. Thus, the first covering portion 875 can be displaced in a displacing mode that cannot be realized by a conventional machine in which the first covering portion 875 is not a divided body but is constituted by a single circular member. The production effect of the production by the covering portion 875 can be improved.

  From the above situation, in the united state in which the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged close to each other, a state in which the first decorative member 870 faces the front side is also referred to as an individual united state (see FIG. 31), and the second decorative member 880 is the front side. Is also referred to as one union state (see FIG. 32). Next, an operation for switching between the individual united state and the united state will be described.

  FIGS. 64 (a), 64 (b), 65 (a) and 65 (b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b) ), FIG. 67 (a) and FIG. 67 (b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

  64 to 67, the driving force of the driving motor 861 (see FIG. 60) is transmitted, and the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850, which is displaced by the relative rotation of the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840, is performed. Are illustrated in chronological order.

  That is, it is illustrated in chronological order in the rear view and the front view, and illustrates a state in which the inner rotating member 830 rotates by 45 degrees from the individual united state (FIGS. 64A and 66A). .

  64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is described as a virtual position line 832F, and the change in the angle of the arrangement of the virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. The rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830 from the individual united state (FIGS. 64A and 66A) is illustrated by an angle θ31.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise from the individual united state in a front view (see FIG. 66) (this rotating operation is hereinafter also referred to as “switching rotating operation”). Since the rotation of the arm member 850 is allowed, the relative rotation of the inner rotating member 830 with respect to the outer rotating member 840 is allowed. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

  Therefore, in FIGS. 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced about the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

  From the configuration between the above-described members, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and the cylindrical projection 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a. The change in the arrangement of the supported hole 854a corresponds to the change in the arrangement of the linear member 833.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the rotation transmitting unit 854 is displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830 and simultaneously displaced in the circumferential direction. Similarly, the member 834 is displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830, and is simultaneously displaced in the circumferential direction. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is displaced by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction with displacement in the radial direction.

  Since the switching rotation operation includes the circumferential displacement, even in the radial end position, the arrangement of the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed thereto is not fixed, Since the displacement can be maintained, the effect of the effect during the switching rotation operation can be reduced as compared with the case where the displacement is completed only by the direct translational displacement in the radial direction (for example, the reversing operation described above in the second operation unit 700). Can be kept high.

  On the other hand, in the reversing operation described above in the second operation unit 700, a high-acceleration rotation operation using the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58) is caused. This is intended to weaken the impression that the arrangement of the covering member 787 at the end of the displacement in the linear motion direction outer side (see FIG. 59B) is fixed.

  That is, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is improved, and the change width of the left and right positions is small at the end of the laterally outward displacement ( Even in a situation where the period near the dead center of the slider crank continues, the effect of the operation of the covering member 787 is maintained at a high level by increasing the rotation speed of the covering member 787.

  Since the switching rotation operation includes a radial displacement, a radial load is likely to be generated from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, and there is a possibility that the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 is shifted. In the embodiment, since the loads in the radial direction of the intermediate arm member 850 are similarly generated at equal intervals (72-degree intervals) about the rotation axis, the loads cancel each other. Accordingly, the displacement of the rotation axis of the outer rotation member 840 can be suppressed, and the switching rotation operation can be easily performed normally.

  As described above, the radial displacement (enlargement / reduction displacement) in the rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 occurs while rotating in the circumferential direction. Therefore, in order to avoid a collision with the surrounding decoration member, the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 is performed by detecting that the posture of the elevating arm member 801 is determined when the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state. It is controlled to be executable in the state determined by the output of the sensor.

  In addition, with the above-described displacement of the rotation transmitting unit 854, the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 fastened and fixed to the rotation member 834 also similarly have a radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830. Displaced and, at the same time, displaced circumferentially.

  When the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced, the beveled tooth portion 854c (see FIGS. 66 and 67) meshes with the beveled tooth portion 834a (see FIG. 60) of the rotating member 834, and the rotating member 834 and the rotating member are rotated. The decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the member 834 are rotationally displaced around the metal rod 832.

  The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32 as the rotational angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with reference to the virtual position line 832F. In addition, the rotation direction is increased so that the angle θ32 is separated from the virtual position line 832F in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the rotation member 834 is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60). ), Are set in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the radially outer side of the virtual position line 832F.

  Since the rotating member 834 is in a posture in which either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side in the integrally rotating state, the maximum angle θ31E as the maximum value of the angle θ31 (in the present embodiment, 180 ° When the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 becomes the maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in the present embodiment) as a result of the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the beveled tooth portion 834a of the rotation member 834 rotates half a turn (180 degrees rotation). ).

  That is, the angle at which the rotation member 834 rotates about the metal rod 832 is configured to be twice the rotation angle about the supported hole 854a of the beveled tooth portion 854c.

  Here, unlike what was described as the action of the magnet Mg of the second operation unit 700 described above, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. 62) indicates the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 about the metal rod 832. It does not cause an effect of delaying rotation.

  That is, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force between the adjacent second decoration member 880 and the decoration member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 with the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850. Accordingly, a gap is generated between the adjacent second decorative members 880, so that the attraction force may be lost.

  Therefore, before the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 is started, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and the rotation is performed with respect to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 about the metal rod 832. There is no delay effect.

  Therefore, the driving force required to rotationally displace the decoration members 870 and 880 can be reduced. That is, since the driving force required for the drive motor 861 can be reduced, the size of the drive motor 861 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be started quickly and terminated early, the player's attention to the rotational displacement centered on the metal bar 832 can be reduced.

  The quickness at the start of the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870, 880 with respect to the rotational angle of the inner rotational member 830 to be not constant.

  For example, in the process of rotating the intermediate arm member 850, the rotation angle of the virtual position line 832F (the rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830) from the state where the diameter of the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced and the integrated rotation operation is possible is 45 degrees. , The angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66 (b)), and the angle θ32 when the virtual position line 832F is rotated at an angle of 45 degrees is 27 degrees (FIG. 67 (a)). reference).

  That is, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller on the rotation start side of the inner rotation member 830 from the state where the integral rotation operation is possible, as compared with the rotation in the middle. Thus, the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 at the time of starting rotation of the inner rotating member 830 can be suppressed.

  The driving force of the drive motor 861 is used for the rotation of the inner rotation member 830, the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, and the rotation of the decoration members 870 and 880. Since the driving force required to rotate the decoration members 870 and 880 when the rotation of the inner rotation member 830 starts from a possible state can be reduced, the load applied to the drive motor 861 when the rotation of the inner rotation member 830 starts is excessively increased. It can be prevented from becoming large.

  In addition, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 about the metal rod 832 occurs while being displaced in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, the visibility of the decorative members 870 and 880 during the rotational displacement can be suppressed low. it can. Thereby, the possibility that the side surfaces of the decorative members 870 and 880 (for example, the connecting surface between the first covering portion 875 and the second covering portion 885) can be reduced, and the decorative members 870 and 880 can be reduced. The degree of freedom in the design of the side surface portion can be improved.

  At the time of the switching rotation operation, the arrangement of the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps with the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in a front view. In addition, the arrangement also overlaps with the extension arm 842 provided adjacent to the extension arm 842 on which the cylindrical portion 842a on which the cylinder is supported is disposed. Therefore, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 collides with a peripheral part without taking measures.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a collision is avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 back and forth for each part. In other words, the distal rod 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 are disposed rearward of the proximal rod 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, so that the proximal rod 851 and the distal rod 851 are disposed on the rear side. The rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 can be made to overlap in front and back, and it is possible to avoid collision during the switching rotation operation.

  In addition, the base rod 851 is disposed on the front side of the extending arm 842, and the distal rod 853 and the rotation transmitting section 854 are disposed on the rear of the extending arm 842, so that the switching rotation operation is performed. In this case, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged before and after the extended arm portion 842, and collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

  In FIGS. 64 to 67, the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 with respect to the outer rotation member 840 is the direction in which the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is allowed (counterclockwise direction in front view in the individual united state; see FIG. 66). ). In this case, the gear teeth 843 are meshed with the load response gear 865 that generates the resistance via the torque limiter 866, so that the resistance is received, and the rotational displacement of the outer rotation member 840 is limited.

  On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 is the above-described reverse direction (clockwise direction in front view in the individual united state), or in a direction that allows the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise in front view in the individual united state). If rotation in the same direction is continued after rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state where rotation is restricted by the rotation in the (circumferential direction) (for example, from the individual union state to the union state), the outer side A load exceeding the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 for restricting the rotation of the rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, and the maintenance of the attitude of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are released. And rotate synchronously.

  In other words, regardless of the rotation direction, in a state where the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is regulated, when the inner rotation member 830 is driven to rotate in the direction in which the regulation of the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is continued. The inner rotation member 830 and the outer rotation member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decoration member 870, and the second decoration member 880 rotate integrally while maintaining the united state (this rotation operation is hereinafter referred to as " Integrated rotation operation ").

  The integral rotation operation occurs in a state in which the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted. In the present embodiment, the integral rotation operation occurs in a united state in which the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 are arranged close to each other.

  Therefore, unlike the switching rotation operation in which the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 are displaced in the radial direction, it is not necessary to consider the collision with the surrounding decoration members. In the state, the integral rotation operation can be performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the integral rotation operation is controlled to be executable regardless of the arrangement of the third operation unit 800.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, by the driving force of the single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60), the switching rotation operation involving the radial displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880, The first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be integrally rotated without any radial displacement, and any of the operations can be performed in both driving directions. Therefore, it is not always possible to execute an arbitrary operation in an arbitrary rotation direction.

  For example, from the state shown in FIG. 64A and FIG. 66A, the switching rotation operation can be executed by rotating the inner rotation member 830 counterclockwise in front view, and if the rotation is continued as it is, the switching rotation operation can be performed. The rotation operation can be performed, and the integral rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotation member 830 clockwise in front view. However, the integral rotation operation is immediately performed by counterclockwise rotation in front view. Can not be performed.

  Also, for example, from the state shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 66 (a), the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view, and after the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state where the rotation is regulated. When the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation is performed again, and immediately, the integrated rotation operation is performed clockwise when viewed from the front. Can not.

  As described above, the operation mode of the third operation unit 800 according to the present embodiment depends on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or allowed with respect to the rotation direction of the drive motor 861. The relative displacement between the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 changes.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) determines, for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861, whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted. It is possible to control the drive motor 861 in an appropriate drive direction based on the determination result. Hereinafter, an example of drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described.

  FIG. 68 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the driving mode of the drive motor 861, and the output of the detection sensor 813 in chronological order. As shown in FIG. 68, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled so as to alternately repeat the normal effect and the reverse effect as the effect control of the third operation unit 800.

  At the time of the reversal effect, an operation including the switching rotation operation is executed, and at the time of the normal effect, an operation not including the switching rotation operation is executed. This is to prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from colliding with surrounding decorative members in the switching rotation operation.

  For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power failure, or when the power is turned on in the morning, the third operation unit 800 is set in the extended state, and then the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed. After the state of the movable part is grasped from the output of the detection sensor 813, the control is performed so as to execute the control in the normal effect. Accordingly, even when the state of the movable part cannot be grasped from the output result of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the decorative members 870 and 880 and the surrounding decorative members accidentally collide. .

  The driving direction of the driving motor 861 is described as a forward rotation and a reverse rotation. The forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a driving mode in which the inner rotation member 830 is rotated clockwise in front view (a driving mode in which the integral rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual united state (see FIG. 66A)). The reverse rotation at 68 corresponds to a driving mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view (a driving mode in which the switching rotation operation is immediately executed in the individual united state).

  First, a description will be given of drive control during a normal effect before the time of the reverse effect. At the time of this normal effect, the third operation unit 800 is in the individual united state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only the forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 is always an integral rotation operation.

  Since the switching rotation operation does not occur, the collision with the surrounding decoration member cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the effect standby state or the extended state at any timing. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is displaced up and down by the up and down movement of the up and down arm member 801, the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 are simultaneously rotated together with the up and down displacement. It is controlled so that an action can be caused.

  Of course, the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 may be caused to rotate integrally with each other while the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801 is fixed, or the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 may be integrally rotated. The raising / lowering operation of the raising / lowering arm member 801 may be performed in a state where the integral rotation operation is stopped.

  Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only forward rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched every time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and it is determined that this output is switched. The voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 as an initial position, and by setting a plurality of types of driving times from this initial position, the outer rotating member 840 can be arbitrarily set. It can be controlled to stop at the posture of.

  Next, the drive control during the reversal effect will be described. First, at the time of the reversal effect, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operation unit 800 is set in the extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled so as to continue to rotate forward until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

  When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching of the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. In the third operation unit 800, the switching rotation operation is performed by the reverse rotation drive. During this time, the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so that the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. You.

  When the drive of the drive motor 861 is continued in the same rotation direction, the united state is reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are integrally rotated. After the start of the integral rotation operation, the outer rotation member 840 also starts rotating in conjunction with the inner rotation member 830, so that the detected portion 844 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integrated rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 has been started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813.

  After the start of the integral rotation operation, the drive motor 861 is stopped, or only the reverse rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 is always an integral rotation operation. Since the switching rotation operation does not occur, the collision with the surrounding decoration member cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the effect standby state or the extended state at any timing.

  Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only reverse rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches every time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840.

  When switching from the reverse effect to the normal effect, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced in advance, and the third operation unit 800 is set in the extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue reverse rotation until the detection target 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

  When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven to rotate forward. In the third operation unit 800, the switching rotation operation is performed by the forward rotation drive. During this time, the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so that the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. You.

  Next, the integrally rotating operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is performed. After the start of the integral rotation operation, when the outer rotation member 840 starts rotating, the detected portion 844 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integrated rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 has been started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813.

  After the unitary rotation operation is started, the process returns to the normal performance again. The restrictions on the drive control during the normal effect are the same as the restrictions on the drive control described during the normal effect, which are arranged before the reverse effect.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 813 determines whether to switch the rotation mode of the third operation unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and determines the rotation angle of the outer rotation member 840. It can be shared with the determination of the reference. Therefore, the required number of detection sensors 813 can be reduced as compared with the case where individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

  As described above, the switching rotation operation can be performed by switching the driving direction of the driving motor 861 from the state where the integral rotation operation is continued or the state where the rotation is stopped to the opposite direction. That is, regardless of the attitude of the first decoration member 870 in the individual united state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the one united state.

  Therefore, in the motion effect, when controlling to switch to the union state at the timing of the jackpot notification, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting the presence or absence of the jackpot notification from the attitude of the first decorative member 870.

  Further, as described above, the decoration in the union state is designed so that the content recognized by the player does not largely differ depending on the arrangement of the second decoration member 880 in the rotation direction. That is, even when the arrangement of the decoration members 870 and 880 in the rotation direction at the start of the switching rotation operation is different, the contents recognized by the player as one union state at the end of the switching rotation operation are the same. can do.

  Therefore, unlike the case where the patterns in the one united state differ in the arrangement in the rotation direction, the integral rotation operation for adjusting the posture after reaching the one united state can be omitted, and thus the first decorative member in the individual united state Regardless of the position of 870, the drive control up to the jackpot notification can be the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, both the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation can be realized by both the forward rotation and the reverse rotation as the driving direction of the drive motor 861. Therefore, as compared with the case where the operation mode is fixed between the forward rotation and the reverse rotation, it is possible to realize various effect modes with the single drive motor 861.

  FIG. 69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit 800 taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. As shown in FIG. 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 penetrates from the rear end of the held member 810 where the cylindrical fixing portion 812 is arranged to the front end where the electric decoration substrate 823 is arranged. The electric wiring is guided from the rear end to the front end through this opening, and the terminal is connected to a connector provided on the electric decoration board 823. Electricity is conducted through the electric wiring, and the LEDs arranged on the electric decoration board 823 can be controlled to emit light.

  The light LH <b> 1 emitted from the inner light emitting portion 823 a of the electric decoration substrate 823 acts to illuminate the bulging portion 824 a bulging to the front side at the center of the translucent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a portion that can be visually recognized by a player at the center of a circle where the first decoration member 870 or the second decoration member 880 is arranged on the circumference when the decoration members 870 and 880 are united. I do.

  The light LD1 emitted from the outer light emitting portion 823b of the electric decoration substrate 823 is irradiated inside decoration members 870, 880 (first decoration member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged on the front side, and the decoration members 870, 880 Works to illuminate from inside.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individual united state in which the decorative member 870 is arranged on the front side (see FIG. 69) and a single united state in which the decorative member 880 is arranged on the front side (see FIG. 32). Therefore, the case where the decoration member 870 is illuminated by the light LD1 and the case where the decoration member 880 is illuminated can be switched.

  In the individual united state (see FIG. 69), the direction of the light LD1 is switched to the front side by being reflected to the front side by the plated portion 871a of the first skeleton portion 871 which has been plated. Thereby, most of the light LD1 can be irradiated so as to be directed to the first covering portion 875, and the brightness of the first covering portion 875 at the time of irradiation with the light LD1 can be favorably increased.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the illumination substrate 823 is fixedly disposed, and the decoration members 870 and 880 are configured to rotate around the illumination substrate 823. Therefore, the irradiation direction of the light LD1 and the decoration members 870 and 880 are controlled. The relationship with the arrangement can be changed by the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880. For example, if the light LD1 is irradiated to the center of the plating unit 871a during rotation, the light LD1 irradiated from the same LED may be irradiated to a position shifted from the center of the plating unit 871a. obtain. Therefore, without measures, the degree of the brightness of the first covering portion 875 by the light LD1 is easily changed by the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880, and the decorative members 870, 880 are integrally rotated while emitting light at a constant brightness. There is a possibility that it will be difficult to perform the effect of causing.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the plating portion 871a configured to reflect the light LD1 has a concave shape, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the illuminated substrate 823. It is designed such that its center is located near the center of the first covering portion 875 in a front view.

  Since the light LD1 is arranged so as to direct the optical axis in the outer diameter direction of the circle on which the outer light-emitting portion 823b is arranged, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plating portion 871a, so that the center of the radius of curvature is obtained. The first decorative member 870 illuminates the vicinity of the center of each first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870.

  Therefore, the plurality of light LDs 1 can be reflected so as to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering portion 875 regardless of the arrangement of the plating portion 871a with reference to the outer light emitting portion 823b. Accordingly, light can be stably radiated to the vicinity of the center of the front plate portion of the first covering portion 875, so that the first covering portion 875 is visually recognized with uniform brightness even during the integral rotation operation. be able to.

  Further, the first skeleton portion 871 is a portion where the plating process is performed in the same manner as the plating process on the plating portion 871a, and includes an outer plating portion 871b arranged outside the first covering portion 875 in a front view. Prepare. The light LD1 is also reflected by the outer plating portion 871b in the same manner as the plating portion 871a. However, since the outer plating portion 871b is disposed rearward as compared with the arrangement of the plating portion 871a, the outer plating portion 871b Light intensity can be reduced.

  This avoids a situation in which the intensity of light visually recognized outside the first covering portion 875 is too strong, and the player feels dazzling, and the visibility inside the frame of the first covering portion 875 is reduced. be able to.

  Although the electric decoration board 823 is sandwiched between the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 from the front and rear, it is not completely closed at the joint, so that all of the light from the outer light emitting unit 823b is inside. It is not what is irradiated.

  First, between the member edge portion 875a of the first covering portion 875 and the member edge portion 885a of the second covering portion 885 disposed to face the member edge portion 875a, the internal structure is visible in FIG. The gap VA1 of a certain degree is formed. Since the outer plating portion 871b projects outside the frame of the first covering portion 875 through the gap VA1, the light LD1 passing through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

  In addition, between the member outer end 875b of the first covering portion 875 facing the metal bar 832 and the member outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885, member interference with the metal bar 832 occurs. A large gap VA2 exceeding a region required to avoid the above is formed.

  First, the gap VA2 avoids collision between the metal bar 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, so that the length of the metal bar 832 can be sufficiently secured. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring the function of guiding the linear displacement of the member 834.

  The gap VA2 is, secondly, a fastening screw inserted into the skeleton portions 871 and 881, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are screwed into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b of the rotating member 834 so that the decorative members 870 and 880 are connected to the rotating member 834. It is formed for the purpose of securing an assembling path of a fastening screw for fastening and fixing.

  Thirdly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of securing a light passage for allowing light that has passed through the transparent portions of the skeleton portions 871 and 881 to travel. Since the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, light traveling outward through the gap VA passes at equal intervals on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle. It is visually perceived as a light that is

  Therefore, by executing the integrally rotating operation of the decorative members 870 and 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can be similarly rotated. Accordingly, it is unnecessary to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light emitting unit 823b (for example, while the entire lighting is continued), and the light radially emitted from the rotation center of the third operation unit 800 in the radial direction. A light emission effect visually recognized in the rotating light emission mode can be executed.

  In the united state (see FIG. 32), since the entire second skeleton 881 is formed of a translucent resin material, the reflection of the light LD1 by the second skeleton 881 is suppressed.

  Accordingly, the light (weak light) away from the optical axis of the light LD1 can be irradiated into the frame of the second covering portion 885. Can be reduced. On the other hand, since the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, the intensity of the light radially emitted from the rotation center of the third operation unit 800 in the radial direction can be improved.

  In the frame of the second covering portion 885, a color (in this embodiment, set as an arbitrary color as the color of the circular body) is formed of a light-transmissive resin material, and light diffusion processing is formed inside. The light diffusion decorative portion 885c to be provided is disposed in the circumferential direction. Therefore, of the light LD1, the light incident on the light diffusion decoration part 885c is refracted and acts so that the entire light diffusion decoration part 885c emits surface light.

  By this surface light emission, it is possible to equalize the light visually recognized through the light diffusion decoration portion 885c arranged in the circumferential direction, and each light diffusion decoration portion of the five second decoration members 880 can be achieved. 885c can be made to be visually recognized by the player as one.

  Here, it is as described above that the direction in which the plurality of second covering portions 885 can be firmly integrated can improve the performance when the second covering portion 885 is visually recognized by the player. This integration can be performed by visually recognizing that the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is continuously connected in the circumferential direction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance in the united state when the second covering portion 885 is arranged on the front side.

  The member outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832, and the end surface 885b1 of the first covering portion 875 that comes close to (contacts) the member outer end 875b is , Protrudes toward the first decorative member 870 with reference to the plane on which the metal bar 832 is provided.

  Thereby, when the third operation unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in the union state (see FIG. 32), the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 arranged on the back side is in the player's view. The degree of entry can be reduced, and the effect on the performance can be reduced.

  Thus, when the frame portion of the first covering portion 875 and the frame portion of the second covering portion 885 are colored with different colors, the second covering portion 885 is disposed on the front side. At times, it is possible to easily prevent the color of the first covering portion 875 from entering the field of view.

  In particular, when the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state by itself in one union state (see FIG. 32), it is compared with the case where the other operation units 600 and 700 are both in the extended state (FIG. 32). 33, F9), there are many gaps around the third operation unit 800, and the line of sight when observing the third operation unit 800 from an oblique direction is easy to pass. Therefore, without any countermeasures, the side effect of the third operation unit 800 is visually recognized, and the effect of the effect is easily reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in one union state, the end face 885b1 of the second covering portion 885 is disposed closer to the rear than the center of the front-rear width of the side surface, so that the third operation in the oblique direction is performed. Even if the side surface of the unit 800 is visually recognized, most of the side surface can be visually recognized as the second covering portion 885, and the degree of visibility of the first covering portion 875 can be reduced. Thereby, in the one union state, the second covering portion 885 can be more easily seen than the first covering portion 875, and the effect can be improved.

  In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individual united state and the united state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotating member 830 to rotate the inner rotating member 830, while the outer rotating member 840 operates as a torque limiter. Rotation is stopped by the load from 866.

  Although the contact area is reduced by the sliding ridge 831b, when the rotation resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 increases, and the torque limiter 866 is increased. Therefore, it is necessary to increase the allowable value of the load transmission, and it is easy to hinder downsizing of the torque limiter 866.

  Therefore, it is preferable that the rotation resistance of the inner rotation member 830 can be suppressed. For this purpose, the present embodiment has the following features. For example, the support points between the fixed cylindrical member 820 related to the rotation of the inner rotation member 830 are only the front end that comes into contact with the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central annular gear 864. In other parts, a gap is provided. Thus, the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 can be reduced, so that the displacement resistance can be easily reduced.

  For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened and fixed to the central annular gear 864, a stopper for suppressing displacement to the front side with respect to the central annular gear 864 is considered necessary. The sliding member 825 performs the function of this stopper. That is, the sliding member 825 can receive a load in the direction of pushing forward from the inner rotating member 830, but the sliding member 825 has a front surface thereof contacting the front and rear with the short-diameter annular portion 822 a of the circular plate portion 822. Touch

  The short-diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the back side of the circular plate portion 822 as an annular protrusion having an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and has a semicircular cross section at its outermost diameter portion. A ridge 822b protruding from the side is formed in an annular shape.

  Since the protrusion 822b abuts on the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, the contact area can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire back surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a contacts the sliding member 825. Can be. Thereby, the displacement resistance in the rotation direction of the inner rotation member 830 can be reduced.

  In addition, since the fastening screw is not used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that is assumed when the weight of the fastening screw increases is reduced accordingly. Can be.

  The fixing of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 will be described. In the description of the fixing, FIGS. 62 and 63 are appropriately referred to.

  The fixing of the first decorative member 870 to the rotating member 834 is performed by connecting a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 872 of the first skeleton portion 871 to a female screw of the fastened portion 876 formed at the rear of the frame of the first covering portion 875. After the first cover portion 875 is fastened and fixed to the first skeleton portion 871 by being screwed into the first skeleton portion 871, the overhang portion 873 projecting from the end of the semicircular concave portion of the first skeleton portion 871 is formed. This can be performed by entering the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted to the outside), and screwing the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical projection 834b.

  The fixing of the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 is performed by connecting a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 882 of the second skeleton portion 881 to a female screw of the fastened portion 886 formed at the frame rear portion of the second covering portion 885. After the second covering portion 885 is fastened and fixed to the second skeleton portion 881 by being screwed into the second skeleton portion 881, the overhang portion 883 projecting from the end of the semicircular concave portion of the second skeleton portion 881 is formed. This can be performed by allowing the screw to enter the recessed groove 833d (to be slidably fitted to the outside) and screw the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical projection 834b.

  In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 870 are associated with the linear or rotational displacement of the rotating member 834. The member 880 can be configured to perform a linear displacement or a rotational displacement.

  In the fixing process, the overhanging portions 873 and 883 enter the recessed grooves 833d of the linear motion member 833, thereby disposing the skeleton portions 871 and 881 on the linear motion member 833 (the metal rod 832 in the longitudinal direction). ) Is defined, and it is possible to prevent the skeleton portions 871 and 881 from falling off the linear motion member 833.

  Since the skeleton portions 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the translation member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832) is similarly defined, and The member 834 can be prevented from dropping from the linear member 833.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in assembling the rotating member 834 to the linear member 833, the skeletal portions 871 and 881 in which the portions defining the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear member 833 are fixed to the rotating member 834. Therefore, unlike the case where the portion defining the arrangement on the linear motion member 833 is formed on the rotating member 834 itself, the number of assembling and disassembling steps can be reduced.

  That is, for example, at the time of disassembly, by removing the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the skeleton portions 871 and 881 to the rotating member 834, the regulation of the arrangement of the skeleton portions 871 and 881 on the linear motion member 833 can be released only. In addition, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the translation member 833 can be released. Thereby, work efficiency can be improved.

  With reference to FIG. 70 and FIG. 71, a description will be given of the combination operation of the operation units 600 to 800. FIGS. 70 (a) to 70 (d) and FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (d) schematically show an example of a combination operation of the operation units 600 to 800 in a time series. FIG. In the description of FIGS. 70 and 71, FIGS. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate.

  70 and 71, each of the effect surfaces 661a to 661c of the first operation unit 600, the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operation unit 700, and the covering portions 875, 885 of the third operation unit 800. Are schematically illustrated so that they can be identified by characters or the like.

  That is, the characters “normal” are written vertically on the first production surface 661a, the characters “execute” are written horizontally on the second production surface 661b, and the characters “triggered” are written on the third production surface 661c in the longitudinal direction. The symbols “!” Are shown along the respective lines.

  In addition, the first main decorative surface 787a1 has a character of "start of war", the first sub decorative surface 787a2 has a character of "pinch is a chance", and the second main decorative surface 787b1 has an "attack". And the character "Patience !?" is shown on the second sub-decoration surface 787b2.

  Also, different alphanumeric characters (“I” to “V”) corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first covering portion 875, and five integral “○” are provided in the second covering portion 885. Symbol is shown.

  In FIG. 70 (a), each of the operation units 600 to 800 is arranged in an effect standby state (see FIG. 28). Above the second operation unit 700, a first sub-decoration surface 787a2 as a surface that cannot be seen in front view but is visible from the player's eyes is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  In FIG. 70B, the first operation unit 600 is in the intermediate effect state, the second operation unit 700 is in the intermediate effect state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state.

  By executing the integral rotation operation of the third operation unit 800, the first covering portions 875 of the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operation unit 700 can be sequentially replaced. Also, during the continuation of the integral rotation operation or after the stop, the first operation unit 600 is set to the intermediate effect state, so that the third effect surface 661c protrudes inside the frame of the center frame 86, and the operation units 600 to 800 Movement can be lively.

  For example, when the third effect surface 661c is visible, by controlling the effect so that the jackpot expectation of the lottery is increased, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who has visually recognized the operation of the first operation unit 600. it can.

  When the one-piece rotating operation is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decoration surface 787a1 of the second operation unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decoration member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700. Can be visually recognized integrally.

  Thereby, the attention to the first decoration member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700 can be improved, and the display effect related to the decoration formed on the first decoration member 870 can be displayed on the third symbol display device. By returning the third operation unit 800 to the effect standby state while starting at 81, it is possible to smoothly guide the player's line of sight to the third symbol display device 81.

  The first decorative member 870 to be noticed is not limited to the first decorative member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light emitting portion 823b (see FIG. 60) disposed so as to be able to irradiate the first decorative member 870, an LED for irradiating the light LD1 to the first decorative member 870 to be noticed. By turning on the LED and turning off the other LEDs, it is possible to pay attention to an arbitrary first decorative member 870.

  At this time, the lighting pattern of the LED may be switched in a state where the integral rotation operation of the first decoration member 870 is stopped, or the lighting pattern of the LED may be switched according to the integral rotation operation of the first decoration member 870. .

  When the lighting pattern of the LED is switched in accordance with the integral rotation operation of the first decoration member 870, the LEDs to be turned on are sequentially switched in the rotation direction, so that the light and the first decoration member 870 are rotationally displaced along the coaxial circle. You may make a player visually recognize it as it is. In addition, the LED to be lit is fixed, and the first decoration member 870 that is illuminated with light utilizes the fact that the first decoration members 870 sequentially reach the position where the light is illuminated from the LED by the integrally rotating operation. The member 870 may be switched.

  In the state shown in FIG. 70A, the second decorative rotation member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operation unit 600 both have decorations that are formed in a vertically long shape, and can be visually recognized integrally. In particular, since the front side surface of the decoration fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction, similarly to the first effect surface 661a in the effect standby state, the effect of being integrally viewed is enhanced.

  On the other hand, when the state shown in FIG. 71A is reached, the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 during the course shown in FIG. Since the second decoration rotating member 660 of the unit 600 is a decoration formed in a horizontally long shape, the sense of unity with the decoration fixing member 670 is reduced. Can be visually recognized integrally with the covering member 787.

  In FIG. 35, the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 is shown. However, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), if the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state, the covering member 787 and the second The vertical spacing between the second decorative rotating member 660 and the second decorative rotating member 660 is further reduced, and the effect of being visually recognized integrally can be enhanced.

  At this time, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is overhanging at a visible position and the right edge of the third symbol display device 81 is visually recognized as expanding to the right from the region right end RE1. Even if the arrangement of the two production surfaces 661b is close to the right edge, it is possible to prevent a cramped impression from being given to the player.

  In addition, as a result, similarly to the second main decoration surface 787b1, the second effect surface 661b can be visually recognized by the player as if it is arranged on the center side of the third symbol display device 81, and the second main decoration surface The effect that the surface 787b1 and the second effect surface 661b are visually recognized integrally can be enhanced.

  In this case, the decoration of the overhang decoration portion 652b is formed with the contents related to the decoration of the second effect surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decoration surface 787b1 (first main decoration surface 787a1). The effect that the main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second effect surface 661b, and the overhang decorative portion 652b can be integrally viewed can be enhanced.

  In FIG. 70 (c) and FIG. 70 (d), the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in the effect standby state, and the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state. FIG. 70D illustrates the reversing operation of the second operation unit 700. When the first operation unit 600 is in the extended state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned on the left and right sides of the covering member 787 of the second operation unit 700. , The reversing operation of the covering member 787 (see FIG. 59) can be performed even when the first operation unit 600 is in the extended state.

  In the reversing operation of the covering member 787, since the sub-decoration surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 whose right and left sides are different are directed to the front side, it has been described above that a state having no discriminating power can be achieved, as shown in FIG. 70 (d). Alternatively, different sub-decoration surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 may be combined so that the player can identify the contents.

  According to FIG. 70 (d), the player can identify the content “Pinch !?”, and in this state, stop driving the second operation unit 700 to pay attention to the subsequent movement of the second operation unit 700. Therefore, the line of sight of the player can be collected in the second operation unit 700.

  For example, when notifying that the lottery has been missed, control is performed so that the state of FIG. 70 (d) is returned to FIG. 70 (c). In such a case, by performing control such that the inversion is continued from the state of FIG. 70 (d) and the state shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 71A, the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 are in the extended state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the effect standby state. Above the second operation unit 700, a second sub-decoration surface 787b2 as a surface which is not visible in a front view but can be visually recognized by a player's eyes is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  In the state shown in FIG. 71 (a), the second presentation surface 661b and the second main decoration surface 787b1 are arranged close to each other, and the characters described in each of them are horizontally written, so that they can be visually recognized integrally by the player. Easy to do. In addition, since the contents have a series of meanings of “attack activation”, it is even easier to visually recognize the contents.

  In the effect standby state (see FIG. 70A), the first operation unit 600 has the first effect surface 661a and the decorative fixing member 670 arranged close to each other, and the characters described in each of them are written vertically. Because of this, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the whole. In addition, since the contents have a series of meanings of "normal time", it is even easier to visually recognize them.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, each of the effect surfaces 661a and 661b of the first operation unit 600 is viewed integrally with the side surface of a different member (for example, the front surface of the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the decorative fixing member 670). Make up. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  In FIG. 71 (b) to FIG. 71 (d), the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 are in the effect standby state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state. The arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is different between the state illustrated in FIG. 71B and the state illustrated in FIG. 71C because the third operation unit 800 performs the integral rotation operation. On the other hand, regardless of the state in which the switching rotation operation is performed, the player can be visually recognized as the same union state (see FIG. 71 (d)).

  That is, in a state where the second decoration member 880 faces the front side, the configuration is such that the player cannot recognize the difference in the arrangement of the first decoration member 870. Thereby, as the operation control of the third operation unit 800, it is set to notify the success or failure of the jackpot by executing the switching rotation operation at the end of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the symbol change. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting the presence or absence of the notification of the jackpot from the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

  In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 at the end of the display effect (whether in the state shown in FIG. 71 (b) or the state shown in FIG. 71 (c)), the game of winning or not winning a jackpot Person's expectation can be similarly maintained. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operation unit 800 can be kept high.

  As described above, each of the operation units 600 to 800 can form a case where the decoration is visually recognized independently and a case where the decoration is integrally viewed in combination. Therefore, the decoration formed in each of the operation units 600 to 800 is not completed only by each of the operation units 600 to 800, but is designed as a decoration related to each other in each of the operation units 600 to 800.

  The drive control of each of the operation units 600 to 800 is affected by the arrangement of the drive units. That is, if the driving of each of the operation units 600 to 800 is performed at an inappropriate timing, there is a possibility that the member operations will collide and cause a failure. Therefore, the drive control is performed after determining the arrangement of the members of the other units. Is controlled as follows.

  For example, the change of the first operation unit 600 to the overhang state may be arbitrary in the state of the second operation unit 700, and the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the effect standby state. You.

  The change of the first operation unit 600 to the intermediate effect state may be arbitrary in the state of the second operation unit 700, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 may be arbitrary, and the rotation operation is performed when the switching rotation operation does not occur. It is controlled to be executed when it is determined.

  The state of the first operation unit 600 may be arbitrarily changed to the overhang state of the second operation unit 700, and the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the effect standby state.

  The state of the first operation unit 600 may be arbitrarily changed, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 may be arbitrarily changed, and the rotation operation is performed when the switching rotation operation does not occur. It is controlled to be executed when it is determined.

  In the control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the extended state and the rotation is not executed or only the integral rotation operation is performed, the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state, and the second operation unit 700 This is executed when it is determined that the state is an intermediate effect state or an effect standby state.

  The control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the extended state and the switching rotation operation occurs is executed when the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the effect standby state and the second operation unit 700 is determined to be in the effect standby state. Is done.

  As described above, the drive control of each of the operation units 600 to 800 is not enabled at an arbitrary timing, but is controlled to be executed after determining the arrangement of the members of the other units.

  Next, details of the distribution device 300 in the first embodiment will be described. In the description of the details of the distribution device 300, FIGS. 1 to 25 are appropriately referred to. First, an example of the decoration applied to the front design member 162 will be described.

  FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the distribution device 300. In FIG. 72, a light-transmissive window 162d is formed in the front design member 162 as a difference from the contents shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the front design member 162 disposed on the front side of the distribution device 300 has a front plate made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a central region of the front plate that is larger than a peripheral region. The window 162d is formed as a region having high light transmittance.

  In the present embodiment, a light-transmissive seal member SL1 having a central area cut out in accordance with the shape of the window 162d is attached to the front plate of the front design member 162. With this configuration, the front and rear thickness of the window portion 162d is smaller than the front and rear thickness of the area around which the sealing member SL1 is adhered, thereby giving a difference in the degree of light transmission through the front design member 162. Therefore, the light transmittance of the window 162d can be increased.

  The first purpose of the window portion 162d is to improve the visibility of the distribution device 300 in consideration of the line of sight passing through the plate portion of the front design member 162 when the player looks at the distribution device 300. In particular, it is formed for the second purpose to eliminate the complaint from the player that he cannot grasp the flow state of the ball flowing down inside the distribution device 300. That is, the window 162d is formed in a shape and a size in consideration of the shape of the distribution device 300.

  The means for forming the window portion 162d as a portion having higher light transmittance than the peripheral range is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a light guide plate is disposed on the plate portion of the front design member 162, or a plurality of groove patterns are formed so as to perform the same function as the light guide plate, and the front design is provided for each light emission pattern of the light emitting means such as an LED. The appearance of the member 162 may be changed, a pattern or a pattern may be directly drawn on the front design member 162, or a range corresponding to the window 162d of the front design member 162 may be formed as an opening. good.

  The shape of the window 162d is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 72, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a band shape extending left and right with the same vertical width may be used, or a shape in which a portion extending right and left outward is omitted so that the left and right width is equivalent to the left and right width of a range extending upward ( (A pentagonal shape like a home base) or a shape along the edge of the front plate of the front design member 162.

  Further, the window 162d is formed as a single range, but is not limited to this, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a range having a high light transmittance may be formed by a combination of a plurality of portions partitioned by a lattice portion or a ladder-like portion, or the range may be partitioned in a mode in which a plurality of small windows are aligned, The range may be partitioned in such a manner that the windows are arranged randomly. Further, the shape of the window may be variably configured.

  Further, the surface shape of the seal member SL1 is not limited at all. For example, a surface shape in which a large number of irregularities are formed, such as a surface shape by graining, may be formed in the surface, a large number of grooves and protrusions may be formed, or a smooth surface may be formed.

  The surface shape of the window portion 162d is preferably formed as a smooth surface, but may be any mode that can ensure a higher light transmittance than the surroundings (corresponding to the formation range of the seal member SL1). Various aspects other than the same shape as the surface shape of the member SL1 can be adopted.

  FIG. 73 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300. In FIG. 73, as a difference from the contents shown in FIG. 21, a light-transmissive window 162 d is formed in the front design member 162.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the window portion 162d is formed in a symmetrical shape, and has a vertically short and long left and right long main window portion 162d1 and a sub-window formed above the left and right central portion of the main window portion 162d1. 162d2.

  In the present embodiment, the main window portion 162d1 and the sub window portion 162d2 are formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and are maintained in a state of high light transmittance. The shape of each part will be described in detail below.

  The main window portion 162d1 is designed such that the outer edge shape in a front view is a shape sufficient to ensure the visibility of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 are formed to have the same vertical width as the vertical width of the spherical passage, and the second flow path forming part 335 is inclined. The V-shape is inclined upward toward the left and right sides.

  Thereby, the sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 can be accommodated inside the main window 162d1 in a front view, so that the second flow path component 335 and the third The visibility of the sphere flowing down the flow path forming section 336 can be improved.

  The left and right ends of the main window 162d1 are set near the center of the left and right width of the first flow path component 334 (see FIG. 17) formed at the same left and right position as the ball passage hole 163b. That is, the entire outer wall of the first flow path component 334 is not visible through the main window 162d1, and the visibility of the side wall 334a is particularly reduced.

  This improves the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the side wall portion 334a, as compared to a case in which the shape is required to be visually recognized by a player, such as a case in which a good-looking shape is required. can do.

  The sub-window portion 162d2 is designed such that the outer edge shape in a front view is sufficient to ensure the visibility of the seal member 313 illuminated with light from the light emitting unit 351. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed in a rectangular shape covering the seal member 313.

  Thereby, in addition to the visibility of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336, the player can grasp the state of the seal member 313 illuminated by the light emitting means 351 whose lighting timing is controlled based on the flow down state of the ball. Since it can be configured to be easy, a comfortable game can be provided to the player.

  FIG. 74 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII of FIG. 16. FIG. 75 is a cross-section of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line LXXV-LXXV of FIG. FIG. In FIGS. 74 and 75, as a difference from the contents shown in FIGS. 23 and 18, a light transmitting window 162 d is formed in the front design member 162.

  As shown in FIG. 74, when the distribution device 300 is viewed in a direction looking down (viewing with an angle), a part of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 disposed at the front position is opened and closed. It is visible below 65b.

  On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 moves to the rear position, the upper projecting portion 376 is hidden behind the opening / closing plate 65b when viewed in the direction of FIG. Therefore, the player can easily predict whether the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 will pass through the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 as long as the upper projecting portion 376 is visible. can do.

  The view toward the upper protruding portion 376 is also good because the inner side surface 314b1 of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines outward toward the left and right as it approaches the front side. Is secured.

  That is, the second upper surface portion 314b functions as a ceiling surface for preventing a ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 from jumping up, while the inner side surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface to form the upper projecting portion 376. To avoid unnecessarily obstructing the field of view.

  In addition, the fact that the inner side surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface makes up for the disadvantage that the upper surface portion 314 is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the front. When the upper surface portion 314 is configured as the above-described inclined surface, the projection area of the upper surface portion 314 can be increased when viewed downward (as viewed from an angle) as shown in FIG. Has the advantage that it is easy to improve the effect of the effect of visually recognizing light through the light diffusion processing surface 314c, but since the projected area of the upper surface portion 314 is large, the ball flowing under the upper surface 314 can be moved by the player. There is a disadvantage that the range to be hidden from view may be widened.

  In other words, when the upper surface portion 314 is configured as an inclined surface that is inclined downward as it goes forward, it works advantageously for the light effect, but may work disadvantageously for the visibility of the flowing ball. .

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the inner side surface 314b1 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined toward the left and right sides, the sphere enters the third flow path component 336 from the second flow path component 335. The projected area of the upper surface portion 314 can be reduced at the location, and the visibility of a ball flowing below the upper surface portion 314 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 74, when the distribution device 300 is viewed in a direction looking down (viewing with an angle), the seal member 313 is not visible inside the sub window portion 162d2. This forces the player to adjust the position of the eyes and the line-of-sight angle so that the seal member 313 can be seen in order to visually check the state of the member 313, which may hinder a comfortable game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the straight line LL1 as the optical axis of the light emitting unit 351 for directing light to the seal member 313 passes through the seal member 313 and passes through the sub-window 162d2, the light is emitted from the light emitting unit 351. Part of the light reaches the sub window 162d2 after passing through the seal member 313. Therefore, whether or not the light emitting unit 351 on the straight line LL1 is turned on can be grasped by looking at the sub-window 162d2.

  Since the light diffusion processing is not performed on the seal member 313, the action of stopping the light from the light emitting means 351 is weak, and the light can sufficiently reach the sub-window 162d2. Thus, when the light emitting unit 351 is turned on, the red light, which is the color of the seal member 313, reaches the sub-window 162d2, so that the sub-window 162d2 can be illuminated in red.

  Thereby, the difference from the colorless and transparent state of the sub window portion 162d2 before the light reaches can be easily understood, so that the player can easily grasp whether or not the light emitting means 351 is turned on. Note that light diffusion processing may be provided on the seal member 313 (or a wall portion where the seal member 313 is provided). In this case, it is possible to easily make the seal member 313 emit light uniformly.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the straight line LL1 is arranged at a position (height position) that does not overlap with a sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336. That is, the straight line LL1 is arranged above the range where the sphere flowing down the third flow path component 336 can be arranged.

  In addition, the straight line LL1 is arranged at a position that does not overlap with a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a. That is, the straight line LL1 is arranged below the lower surface portion 163a on which the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a rides.

  Further, between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, as described above, the flow of the sphere is inhibited by the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7), so that the flow-down range of the sphere is limited to the front design member. It is shifted to the left and right outside of the left and right width of 141. Therefore, the ball flowing between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 is also prevented from overlapping the straight line LL1.

  Therefore, on the straight line LL1, a ball flowing on the front side (for example, the game area) of the base plate 60, a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a, or the distribution device 300 (for example, the third flow path component 336) The arrangement of the sphere flowing down) can prevent light from being reflected and refracted by the sphere. Accordingly, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 can stably reach the sub-window 162d2 regardless of the manner in which the ball flows down.

  In addition, the arrangement of the seal member 313 in the present embodiment may be beneficial to the player because it is possible to continue the state in which the seal member 313 is difficult to visually recognize unless the player changes his / her eyes.

  For example, in a configuration in which the sealing member 313 is always in the field of view, the light enters the eyes of the player every time the light emitting means 351 emits light, so that some players feel dazzling. By arranging it difficult, the glare felt by the player can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the light from the light emitting unit 351 reaches the sub window 162d2 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a light diffusion process may be formed on the fixed member 161 in a range intersecting with the straight line LL1, so that light may hardly reach the sub-window 162d2.

  In this case, unless the line of sight is changed from the state shown in FIG. 74 so that the seal member 313 can be directly seen, it is difficult to determine whether the light emitting unit 351 is turned on toward the seal member 313. Can be. Therefore, even if the player does not want to know whether or not the ball has entered the probability change detection sensor SE11 as a game preference, the goal can be achieved if the line of sight shown in FIG. 74 is maintained. Therefore, the game burden on such a player can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the sub window 162d2 is formed with a smooth surface shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the front and back surfaces of the sub window portion 162d2 may be subjected to light diffusion processing, or a bubble portion may be provided inside so that light can be easily diffused.

  In this case, the light reaching the sub-window 162d2 is diffused, so that the area of the light visually recognized through the sub-window 162d2 can be increased. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the sub window 162d2 is illuminated.

  The light emitted from the light emitting unit 351 that directs light to the seal member 313, that is, the light emitted from the LED arranged on the straight line LL1, among the LEDs constituting the light emitting unit 351 has been described. Next, among the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 351, light emitted from a plurality of LEDs arranged at four places on the left and right at the lowest stage will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the slide displacement member 370, the lower member 380, and the detection sensor SE1 along the line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. In FIG. 76, the arrangement of the light emitting means 351 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  In the following description, among the light emitting means 351, the LEDs arranged on the left and right inside at the lowest level are referred to as inside light emitting means 351 c, and the LEDs arranged on the left and right outside at the lowest level are referred to as outside light emitting means 351 d. .

  First, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the inner light emitting means 351c is arranged inside the light diffusion processing surface 332e. Therefore, when light is emitted from the inner light emitting means 351c, a light emitting effect is performed in which the light diffusion processing surface 332e formed in the left and right range is illuminated.

  This light emission production is performed at a branching point BP1 where the flow of the sphere is branched by the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 75, a long left and right space continuously connected from the rear end of the third flow path component 336). Run on the back side).

  Therefore, when the sphere flows through the branch point BP1 in a state where the inner light-emitting means 351c is turned on, the place where the sphere flowing on the front side of the light diffusion processing surface 332e that emits light in a range extending right and left is visually recognized as a shadow. Therefore, the player can easily understand how the ball has flowed by visually checking the displacement of the shadow.

  The optical axis of the inner light emitting means 351c passes through the front and rear long projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 75). Although the optical axis does not pass through the left and right inner protrusions 318, light near the optical axis can pass therethrough. The protruding ends of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are viewed in the front-rear direction and the vertical direction. It is curved.

  Therefore, a part of the light emitted from the inner light emitting means 351 is refracted by the curved shapes of the front and rear long projecting portions 317 and the left and right inner projecting portions 318, so that the light travels obliquely downward and forward. Light can reach the light diffusion processing surface 340 (see FIG. 75).

  Since the light diffusion processing surface 340 is formed in the entire lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 14), the light is made to reach the light diffusion processing surface 340, so that the third flow path configuration 336 is formed. The visibility of the space below the lower bottom surface of the portion 336 can be reduced. Therefore, it is easy to distinguish between a sphere flowing down inside the third flow path component 336 and an out sphere flowing down the lower side of the third flow path configuration part 336 through the outlet 71 (see FIG. 75). can do.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the outer light emitting means 351d is outside (upper side) of the light diffusion processing surface 332e and inside of the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 333b. Be placed. Therefore, when light is emitted from the outer light emitting unit 351d, a light emission effect in which the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated is executed.

  This light emission production is performed at a branching point BP1 where the flow of the sphere is branched by the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 75, a long left and right space continuously connected from the rear end of the third flow path component 336). ) Is performed on the upper side and the front side.

  Therefore, when a sphere flows through the branch point BP1 in a state where the outer light emitting means 351d is turned on, the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 333b emit light on the upper side and the near side of the sphere, and flow through the branch point BP1. Since the ball is hidden by the light diffusion processing surface 333b (see FIG. 17), it is difficult for the player to grasp how the ball has flowed through the branch point BP1.

  In addition, the light diffusion processing surface 333b is formed vertically, and the light diffusion processing surface 314c of the upper surface portion 314 is disposed above the light diffusion processing surface 333b (see FIG. 73). Therefore, in addition to the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the branch point BP1 in the front-rear direction, the light diffusion processing surface 314c also has an angle of view (see FIG. 74) that looks into the light diffusion processing surface 333b from above. The light emission makes it difficult to visually recognize the branch point BP1.

  Further, the light diffusion processing surface 333b is formed vertically, and a light diffusion processing surface 340 is provided below the light diffusion processing surface 333b. It is formed up to the side back surface (see FIG. 14). Therefore, separately from the function of making the branch point BP1 difficult to visually recognize in the front-rear direction, the lower surface of the second flow path component 335 emits light, and when the ball flows down the second flow path component 335, Generates a shadow by blocking light (light diffused by the light diffusion processing surface 340), so that the player can easily recognize that the ball is flowing down.

  Here, the light diffusion processing surface 333b is provided in front of the branch point BP1 (see FIGS. 17 and 75). Therefore, depending on the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion processing surface 333b, a situation in which light may be hidden by a sphere may occur. In the present embodiment, however, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) ) Are arranged outside (upper side) of the range in which the ball flows down the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 76), so that the situation where light is blocked by the ball disposed at the branch point BP1 can be avoided.

  Therefore, regardless of the manner in which the spheres flow in the distribution device 300, the light emitting surface 333b can be brightly illuminated by causing the outer light emitting means 351d to emit light. When the light diffusion processing surface 333b is illuminated, the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 (see FIG. 17) disposed in front of the light diffusion processing surface 333 blocks the light, so that a shadow is generated. It becomes easy to grasp the flow-down state of the sphere flowing down the flow path forming section 335.

  In the present embodiment, as a device for avoiding a situation in which light is blocked by a sphere disposed at the branch point BP1, a configuration for smoothing the flow of the sphere is employed. The configuration will be described.

  The sphere that reaches the branch point BP1 and flows down when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear side position (see FIG. 20), flows directly below and passes through the certainty detection sensor SE11, and the slide displacement member 370 is moved downward. In the state where it is arranged at the front side position (see FIG. 18), it flows down right and left outward along the inclination of the ball guide 371b and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

  In the downward flow of the ball in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the front side position, the through-hole edges 382a of the plate-like portion 382 supporting the left and right outer ends of the slide displacement member 370 are located on the left and right outer sides of the positive change detection sensor SE11. It is arranged so as to connect the edge portion and the left and right inner edge portions of the normal detection sensor SE12, and the upper surface is formed as an inclined surface inclined downward and outward toward the left and right sides. Therefore, the sphere that has reached the upper surface of the through-hole edge 382a is configured to easily flow outward in the left-right direction.

  Thereby, it is easy to avoid a situation in which the sphere that has started flowing down to the left and right sides along the inclination of the ball guide 371b flows back and inwards in the left and right direction after being bridged by the through-hole edge 382a. And the flow of the sphere can be smoothed.

  The light diffusion processing surface 319a is provided inside the front-rear width of the branch point BP1. Therefore, a situation in which a sphere is arranged on the back side of the light diffusion processing surface 319a cannot occur, so that light is hidden by the sphere regardless of the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion processing surface 319a. It is hard to occur.

  In this way, the inner light emitting means 351c and the outer light emitting means 351d are not only arranged simply shifted left and right, but also light diffusion processing surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b arranged at different front and rear positions on the front side. The light emitting units 351c and 351d are designed by intentionally providing a difference in arrangement with the optical axis, and the light diffusion processing surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b to which the light from the light emitting units 351c and 351d reach are made different. The position before and after the light reaches, diffuses, and is visually recognized can be different.

  In the above description, the case where the inner light-emitting unit 351c emits light and the case where the outer light-emitting unit 351d emits light are described separately, and it is described that the opposite light-emitting units 351c and 351d are turned off. The actual light emission control of each of the light emitting means 351c and 351d is not limited to one side, but may be a control mode such as both lighting and both extinguishing. Hereinafter, the light emission control pattern and the appearance of the internal flow path of the distribution device 300 at that time will be described.

  77 (a) to 77 (d) are front perspective views of the middle member 330 of the distribution device 300. In FIGS. 77 (a) to 77 (d), streaks as shape lines of the light diffusion processing surface are omitted for easy understanding, and light emitting units 351c and 351d are turned on and off, respectively. The case where the combination is different is illustrated, and the range where the light from the light emitting units 351c and 351d shines brightly is illustrated in a hatched pattern.

  That is, FIG. 77 (a) illustrates a state where both the light emitting units 351c and 351d are turned off, and FIG. 77 (b) illustrates that the inner light emitting unit 351c is turned on and the outer light emitting unit 351d is turned off. An inner lighting state is illustrated, and in FIG. 77 (c), an outer lighting state in which the inner light emitting unit 351c is turned off and the outer light emitting unit 351d is turned on is illustrated. In FIG. 77 (d), the light emitting units 351c and 351d are turned off. The both lighting states in which both are lit are illustrated.

  In the both-lights-off state, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), each of the light diffusion processing surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b is not illuminated, and the visibility on the back side is secured, but the impression without sharpness is played. Give to the person. In particular, it is difficult to distinguish between a sphere flowing on the upper side of the third flow path component 336 and an out sphere flowing on the far side (lower side) of the third flow path component 336.

  In the inner lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the light diffusion processing surface 340 below the third flow path component 336 is illuminated, so that the sphere flowing above the third flow path component 336 is illuminated. The visibility is maintained high, and the visibility of the out sphere flowing down on the inner side (lower side) of the third flow path component 336 is reduced.

  Further, since the light diffusion processing surface 332e is illuminated on the back side of the branch point BP1, the visibility of the flow of the sphere at the branch point BP1 can be improved. In addition, since the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 333b arranged on the front side of the light diffusion processing surface 332e are maintained in a state where they are not illuminated, the situation where the branch point BP1 is blinded by light can be avoided.

  That is, in the inner lighting state, the range from the third flow path forming part 336 to the branch point BP1 is illuminated with light, and the line of sight to see the branch point BP1 through the front frame-shaped part 333 passes. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the manner in which the ball flows in the BP1. In addition, since a light is illuminated at a place to be noticed in grasping the flow-down state of the ball, it is possible to reduce a possibility that the player misses the noticed point, and to reduce a game stress of the player. it can.

  The light diffusion processing surface 333b is formed on the entire inner surface of the front frame portion 333 (see FIG. 13), and it is difficult to see behind the front frame portion 333 from the player's point of view. It is configured to be.

  In the case of viewing the back through the front frame-shaped portion 333, when viewed in the front-rear direction, the user can see the back through the two inner surfaces of the front frame-shaped portion 333 that are opposed to each other. Since there are many boards that need to be seen through, it is more difficult to see the back side.

  The same applies to the case where the front frame-shaped portion 333 is seen through the back side with a line of sight inclined from the left and right inside to the diagonally left and right outside direction (a line of sight inclined toward the normal detection sensor SE12 from the front left and right center position). The same goes for players who do.

  That is, in the present embodiment, where the light diffusion processing surface 333b is formed over the inside of the rectangular cylindrical shape, the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 and the left and right inner surfaces (partition plate) The part 338 and the side surface opposed to the part 338 are disposed. For this reason, it is more difficult to visually check the back side because there are many boards that need to be seen through.

  As described above, according to the front frame portion 333, it is possible to make it difficult to see through the rear side of the front frame portion 333 not only in the front-back direction but also in the oblique direction.

  In the outside lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), since the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated, the sphere flowing to the left and right outside at the branch point BP1 is hidden by the light, so that the falling ball Visibility becomes low.

  On the other hand, since the light diffusion processing surface 340 formed on the inner side (lower side) of the second flow path component 335 is illuminated, the visibility of the sphere flowing down the second flow path component 335 is improved. Can be. In other words, in the outside lighting state, the visibility of the ball flowing on the near side is improved to improve the player's attention, but the visibility of the branch point BP1 itself is reduced.

  In both lighting states, as shown in FIG. 77 (d), the light diffusion processing surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b are illuminated in a wide range. The situation illuminated by light is a combination of the inside lighting state and the outside lighting state, which can produce both effects, but not only complement each other with advantageous effects.

  For example, since the light diffusion processing surface 333b is illuminated, the feature that the sphere flowing to the left and right outside at the branch point BP1 is hidden by light is inherited from the outside lighting state. Therefore, for the purpose of improving the visibility of the branch point BP1, it is optimal to maintain the inside lighting state.

  Various modes are exemplified as the control mode for turning on and off the light emitting units 351c and 351d. For example, in a jackpot game, in a round game in which a ball may enter the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 76), the inside lighting state is configured so that the player can easily pay attention to the branch point BP1. However, in other round games, control may be performed so as to make the entire area brighter by configuring the outside lighting state or both lighting states.

  Further, for example, the control may be performed in such a manner as to alternately switch between the both-lit state and the both-lit state regardless of the type of the round game.

  The timing at which the light-emitting units 351c and 351d are turned on is not limited to the round game, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the light emitting means 351c, 351d may be controlled to be turned on after the reach erecting during the symbol change, or it is detected that a ball has entered the winning opening 63, 64, 140, 65a or the through gate 67. Then, the light emitting means may be controlled so that 351c and 351d are turned on.

  Returning from FIG. 73 to FIG. 75, the configuration for optimizing the flow of the ball in the vicinity of the specific winning opening 65a will be described in detail again. As shown in FIG. 73, the upper surface of the extending portion 162b disposed on the left and right outer sides of the opening and closing plate 65b is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the left and right outer sides.

  Therefore, regardless of whether the opening / closing plate 65b is in the open state or the closed state, the sphere that has deviated to the left and right outside of the opening / closing plate 65b and rides on the upper side surface of the extending portion 162b is moved to the left / right outside (opening / closing plate). 65b), it is possible to prevent the ball riding on the extending portion 162b from flowing down the front side of the specific winning opening 65a.

  Therefore, the flow-down state of most of the balls flowing down to the out port 71 can be set to the flow-down mode in which the inner rail 61 is rolled, so that a situation in which the ball jumps up (bounces high) near the out port 71 can occur. Can be avoided. Thereby, the main window part 162d1 and the third flow path component part 336 arranged behind the main window part 162d1 are hidden by the jumped sphere, and the visibility can be prevented from being reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the upper side surface of the open / close plate 65b in the open / closed state is formed in a flat shape extending in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second flow path forming part 335 is inclined downward toward the left / right center (partition plate part 338 side).

  Therefore, the vertical distance between the opening / closing plate 65b and the second flow path forming portion 335 increases as the position approaches the left and right center side, so that the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 65b and the second flow path forming portion 335 The sphere flowing toward the third flow path component 336 can be easily distinguished.

  As shown in FIG. 74, the opening / closing plate 65b is shaped so that the ball riding on the upper surface flows into the specific winning opening 65a without leaking. However, various shape measures are taken so that the flow of the ball is not delayed. Have been.

  For example, first, the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 is a plate-shaped portion that comes into contact with a ball flowing backward from the upper side surfaces of the left and right ends of the opening / closing plate 65b and guides the ball to the left and right inside. . The guide plate portion 163a2 is not formed in a plate shape extending in the horizontal direction, but is formed in a plate shape extending downward and inward in the right and left direction in accordance with the vertical position displacement of the ball flowing from the opening / closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163.

  That is, the front end portion of the guide plate portion 163a2 is formed as an inclined surface that is disposed rearward toward the left and right inner sides, and is closer to the opening / closing plate 65b than near the left and right outer end portions where the ball riding on the opening / closing plate 65b abuts. The left and right inner portions where the ball delivered to the receiving member 163 having a lower floor surface abuts extend in the direction inclining so that the position is on the lower side.

  This makes it possible to stabilize the contact position (the contact height in the entire length of the ball) of the ball contacting the guide plate portion 163a2, and to smoothly guide the ball. In this embodiment, the arrangement of the guide plate portion 163a2 is designed based on the relative relationship with the opening / closing plate 65b and the floor surface of the receiving member 163 so that the ball can be brought into contact with the ball at the center height position in the entire length of the ball. You.

  For example, secondly, the height relationship between the rear end portion of the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 65b (the rotation base end side portion) and the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 is configured to be reversed halfway. That is, at the left and right center positions where the height position of the lower surface portion 163a is the highest, the height position of the opening / closing plate 65b is lower, but the lower surface portion 163a is inclined downward toward the left and right sides, and It is configured such that it is turned upside down at a pair of switching positions EP1 on the outside in the direction.

  In the present embodiment, the switching position EP1 has the property of switching the flow-down state of the sphere between the opening / closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163, and includes the left and right inner side surfaces of the front frame portion 333 (partition plate portion 338). 74 is designed as a position on the same plane as that of the side surface opposed to (the position directly above the front frame-shaped portion 333 in FIG. 74).

  In the left and right inner range of the switching position EP1 (range between the pair of left and right switching positions EP1), the rolling of the ball from the opening / closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 is suppressed due to the vertical position of the rolling surface of the ball. On the other hand, rolling of the ball from the receiving member 163 to the opening / closing plate 65b may occur with low resistance.

  For example, even if a ball that bounces backward near the left and right center position of the opening / closing plate 65b collides with the receiving member 163 (the inner rear surface) and bounces forward again, after the ball bounce has settled and started rolling, It is possible to suppress the ball from riding on the receiving member 163 from the opening / closing plate 65b.

  Note that the ball rolling from the opening / closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 does not ride on the receiving member 163, but when the ball starts to contact the lower surface portion 163a, the ball moves left and right along the left and right inclination of the lower surface portion 163a. Will be washed away.

  Note that the ball is not likely to fall to the vicinity of the central position of the opening / closing plate 65b in the left and right direction because the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7) restricts the ball from falling. I can say. However, ball bouncing may occur due to collision between balls.

  In the left and right outer range of the switching position EP1 (the left and right outer side (the side where the ball passage hole 163b is arranged) than the pair of left and right switching positions EP1), the receiving member 163 is moved from the vertical position of the ball rolling surface. While rolling of the ball to the opening / closing plate 65b is suppressed, rolling of the ball from the opening / closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 can occur with low resistance. For example, even if a ball rolling on the lower surface portion 163a has a forward speed due to a collision with another ball, vibration of a game machine, or the like, the ball is prevented from flowing back to the opening / closing plate 65b. be able to.

  To summarize the description of the switching position EP1, the range in which the ball can roll forward from the receiving member 163 side is limited to the range between the pair of switching positions EP1, so that the ball flows backward near the ball passage hole 163b. By avoiding the sphere, the flow of the sphere is made smooth to avoid the situation where the sphere stays.

  In addition, the rearward rolling of the sphere from the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 is not a rolling mode in which the ball is switched to the left-right flow after the rearward flow is completed, but the pair of switching positions EP1. And a rolling mode along an oblique linear direction connecting the range between the circle and the ball passage hole 163b.

  In other words, the flow is not a flow that intersects at right angles as in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction, but is a flow along the hypotenuse connecting the other ends of the front-rear straight line and the left-right straight line, one end of which is located at the same position. Therefore, the rolling path of the sphere can be shortened (in a right-angled triangle, the length of the hypotenuse is equivalent to being shorter than the sum of the lengths of the other two sides).

  Furthermore, compared to the case where the ball easily flows backward across the left and right positions of the opening / closing plate 65b, as in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the ball easily flows forward in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1. Thus, even when a large number of balls enter the receiving member 163 at the same time, a situation in which the flow of the balls stagnates can be easily avoided.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the receiving member 163 is not formed in a range on the left and right outer sides of the pair of switching positions EP1 (see FIG. 16). And an upper surface portion 163f formed in a plate-like shape that is inclined upward so as to leave a space.

  The upper surface portion 163f is a device for lowering the possibility of the ball clogging in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 by increasing the position of the lower surface portion 163a. The vertical width can be secured.

  This prevents the ball from being clogged in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 and prevents the ball from being caught between the opening / closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163 when the opening / closing plate 65b is closed and displaced while the ball is riding. Can be avoided.

  The direction in which the symmetric protruding portion 161f extends left and right is a direction along the inclination angle of the second flow path forming section 335 (a direction inclined at 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal), and the second flow path forming section 335 is rolled. The ball is disposed at a position (5.5 mm higher than the floor bottom of the second flow path forming part 335) in contact with the ball at the center height position in the entire length of the ball.

  Thus, when the thickness of the symmetrically protruding portion 161f is minimized for the purpose of ensuring the visibility of the branch point BP1, the sphere contacts the symmetrically protruding portion 161f at a position deviated from the center height of the sphere. Thus, the rolling of the ball can be performed more smoothly than when the load in the direction of lifting the ball or the direction of pressing the ball against the floor is generated on the ball from the symmetrically projecting portion 161f.

  If the visibility of the branch point BP1 is allowed to decrease, the thickness of the symmetrically projecting portion 161f is formed to be approximately the entire length of the sphere, so that the symmetrical protrusion 161f is symmetrical at a position deviated from the center height of the sphere. The situation where the protruding portion 161f contacts the ball can be avoided.

  Next, the slide displacement member 370 and its peripheral structure will be described in detail again. FIG. 78 is a top view of the middle member 330, the state switching device 360, the slide displacement member 370, and the lower member 380. In FIG. 78, for easy understanding, the middle member 330 is transparently viewed with imaginary lines, and the slide displacement member 370 provided below the middle member 330 is seen through.

  The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is slid in the front-rear direction at the branch point BP1, but its front end does not come into contact with the side surface of the discharge hole 337 that is also opposed to the front position (see FIG. 78). Gaps are maintained. The gap is formed as a gap having a dimension short enough to prevent the ball from entering the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  This avoids the situation where the front end of the slide displacement member 370 is scraped or deformed due to contact with the side surface of the discharge hole 337, while achieving the purpose of preventing the ball from entering the positive change detection sensor SE11. can do.

  Further, the front end of the slide displacement member 370, that is, the front end of the thin plate portion 371 is formed so as to be inclined such that the arrangement is shifted rearward toward the left and right outer sides. Accordingly, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being trapped and staying between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side surface of the discharge hole 337.

  That is, even when a sphere is sandwiched between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side surface of the discharge hole 337, the front end of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface, so Since the generated load has a directional component directed to the left and right sides, the ball can be pushed to the left and right sides. Thereby, ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a device for guiding the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 will be described. Since the benefit of the player can be changed depending on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 requires reproducibility (stability) and smoothness.

  FIG. 79A is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the slide displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in FIG. 78. FIG. 79B is a sectional view taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in FIG. FIG. 79C is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the slide displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 78. In the description of FIG. 79, FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are appropriately referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (a), the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 on the front side of the upper protruding portion 376 is formed as an inclined surface which is located on the lower side toward the left and right sides, and the sphere flows along this inclination. obtain. In the present embodiment, in order to stabilize the flow of the ball rolling on the inclined surface, the posture of the slide displacement member 370 that changes the inclination of the inclined surface is suppressed.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 is supported not only on both left and right end portions but also on the lower protrusion 373 by the plate-shaped portion 382 of the lower member 380. Thereby, each of the pair of ball guide portions 371b divided into left and right by the recessed portion 372 can be supported under both sides (supported by both ends), so that a change in the posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be suppressed. it can.

  In other words, even if the load applied from the ball to the pair of left and right ball guides 371b is different (even if the balls ride with an unbalanced number), each ball guide 371b is supported by the left and right ends. Therefore, the inclination of the ball guide 371b and the slide displacement member 370 to the left and right (displacement in the rotation direction about an axis extending in the front-rear direction) can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the partition 338 is disposed on the upper side of the edge of the recess 372, upward displacement is restricted. That is, the lifting operation of the slide displacement member 370 and the tilt displacement in the backward tilt direction can be suppressed.

  Accordingly, the posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be easily maintained in an appropriate state, the displacement resistance of the longitudinal displacement can be suppressed, and malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 can be prevented.

  The ball guide portion 371b is a plate-like portion that is formed so as to protrude forward on the protruding base end side of the upper protruding portion 376, and is inclined so that the upper surface on which the ball can roll is lowered toward the left and right sides. Formed as a surface.

  The contact between the ball guide 371b and the ridge 383 is configured to be a point contact. That is, in the present embodiment, a pair of hemispherical protruding portions 372a is protruded from the recessed portion 372 to the protruding portion 383 side, and when the space is filled, the hemispherical protruding portion 372a and the protruding portion are formed. 383 is configured to make point contact.

  Here, as described above, since the upper surface on which the ball can roll is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined in the left-right direction, the load applied to the ball guide 371b by the weight of the ball is vertical. The slide displacement member 370 can be displaced in the left-right direction (the direction intersecting the front-rear direction which is the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370) due to the left-right component.

  At this time, it is preferable to reduce the left-right gap between the recessed portion 372 of the slide displacement member 370 and the ridge 383 because the left-right position of the ball guide portion 371b is easily stabilized, while contact friction is easily generated. , May cause functional problems.

  For example, when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction while the ball rides on the ball guide 371b, a situation occurs in which the displacement in the front-rear direction becomes poor (for example, no displacement occurs) if the contact friction becomes excessively large. there's a possibility that.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the contact between the hemispherical protrusion 372a and the ridge 383 is a point contact, the area where the frictional force is generated can be reduced, and the contact friction can be reduced. Can be kept small. Accordingly, even when the ball is on the ball guide 371b, the slide displacement member 370 can be favorably displaced in the front-rear direction.

  In particular, the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370 when the ball is on the ball guide portion 371b is such that the ball can enter the certainty detection sensor SE11 from the state where the ball cannot enter the certainty detection sensor SE11. Since this is a displacement operation for switching the state to a proper state, by performing this displacement operation satisfactorily, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  In addition, by setting the displacement speed of the displacement operation to be high, an action of changing the rotation of the ball on the ball guide portion 371b when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction can be generated.

  FIGS. 80A and 80B are side views of the slide displacement member 370 and a ball riding on the upper surface of the ball guide 371b. FIG. 80 (a) illustrates a state where a ball is riding on the slide displacement member 370 at the front position, and FIG. 80 (b) illustrates a state where the slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the rear position. In FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b), an example of the rotation direction of the sphere is shown by an arrow.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the rotation direction of the ball that has rolled rearward and reached the slide displacement member 370 is the forward rotation direction. When the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13) is driven so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced back and forth to the rear position while the ball is on the slide displacement member 370, the load applied to the ball from the slide displacement member 370 Acts so that the rotation direction (guiding direction) of the ball is reversed (backward rotation direction).

  Accordingly, the rotation of the ball can be suppressed, so that the ball can be easily subjected to the action of gravity, and the ball can be easily dropped directly below. Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is driven while the ball is on the slide displacement member 370, the ball can easily flow down to the positive change detection sensor SE11.

  The front-rear long projecting portion 317 has a function of guiding the ball reaching the branch point BP1 to the slide displacement member 370 side. In other words, the front and rear long projecting portions 317 are not limited to the function of guiding the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11, and the ball can be moved regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 disposed on the upstream side of the probability change detection sensor SE11. It is configured as an appropriately guided shape.

  When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear side position, the ball that has contacted the front and rear long projecting portion 317 passes through the positive change detection sensor SE11 due to the path configuration. At this time, since the curve of the end of the long front and rear protruding portion 317 has a substantially circular arc shape whose front and rear width is longer than the vertical width (see FIG. 18), The downward component gives a larger load than the directional component. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a situation where the ball abutting on the front-rear long projecting portion 317 rebounds in the front-rear direction and flows backward through the third flow path forming portion 336.

  On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position, the flowing direction of the ball is left to the shape of the slide displacement member 370. In the present embodiment, since the front side surface 376a of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 forms a curved surface that curves to the left and right outside, the ball is guided to the left and right outside along this curve.

  Here, in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is located at the front side position, when a ball flowing in the front-rear direction collides with the slide displacement member 370 with a momentum, the load at the time of the collision pushes the slide displacement member 370 backward. It is possible that the state may be switched to a state where the ball can pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the velocity direction of the ball is corrected to be lower by contacting the front and rear long protrusion 317 before the ball collides with the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Therefore, since the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 due to the load from the ball is mainly downward, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the slide displacement member 370 is pushed backward.

  In addition, since the load applied from the ball in the direction of displacing the slide displacement member 370 backward is reduced, the urging force (the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13) for maintaining the slide displacement member 370 at the front position is provided. The urging force of the return spring) can be reduced, and the electromagnetic force for driving the plunger against the urging force can be reduced. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the electromagnetic solenoid 361 can be improved.

  Even when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position in a state where the ball is arranged at the branch point BP1, it is possible to easily avoid the backflow of the ball.

  The left and right inner protruding portions 318 abut against the ball at a position forward of the front side displacement end position of the upper protruding portion 376, and the momentum of the ball is directed right and left outward and downward. In addition, the momentum of the ball is directed downward by the front and rear long projecting portions 317. Thereby, the velocity of the ball in the front-rear direction can be reduced, so that the arrangement is stabilized by the inertia due to its own weight, and it is possible to make the ball less likely to flow backward under the load applied from the slide displacement member 370.

  Further, the contact between the ball and the upper protruding portion 376 occurs when the ball is lower than the height position at which the ball contacts the front-rear long protruding portion 317. (See FIG. 80 (a)), the portion in contact with the ball is the ball guide portion 371b, which is disposed at a position lower than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336. Accordingly, even if the ball is displaced to the near side by receiving a load in the front-rear direction from the upper protruding portion 376, considerable energy is required to ride on the lower bottom surface 336a from the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b. , The degree of backflow of the sphere can be reduced.

  Further, the upper protruding portion 376 has a front end portion on the partition plate portion 338 side formed in an acute angle shape, and does not have a collision mode in which the plane collides with the ball in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 78). That is, the load applied to the ball from the upper protruding portion 376 is large in the left-right direction and small in the front-rear direction.

  As a result, the ball abutting on the upper projecting portion 376 can flow smoothly in the left and right outer directions, so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position in a state where the ball is disposed at the branch point BP1. When the control mode is such that the ball is caught between the upper protruding portion 376 and the front side surface of the discharge hole 337, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a malfunction occurs.

  Returning to FIG. 78, FIG. 79 (b) and FIG. 79 (c), the description will be continued. Because the slide displacement member 370 is configured to project toward the branch point BP1 (front side), there is a possibility that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the forward falling direction by the weight of the ball riding on the ball guide 371b.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the portion formed on the rear side of the upper protruding portion 376, that is, the portion where the upper and lower protruding ridges 374 are formed on the left and right sides of the front and rear sides, is reduced. The lower frame portion 332 is configured to be sufficiently secured and to be able to contact the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 over the front and rear width. Accordingly, the tilt displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction can be prevented.

  In addition, since the upper and lower ridges 374 are formed long in the front and rear direction, when a load for tilting and displacing the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction is applied, a load applied to the rear frame-shaped portion 332 is one point. You can avoid concentrating on Thereby, the deformation of the slide displacement member 370 can be suppressed (the rigidity can be increased).

  In a state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at a front position where the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b, the front side surface of the projecting portion (hereinafter, also referred to as projecting portion 378a) on which the recessed portion 378 is formed. It comes into contact with the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338.

  In other words, the front position of the slide displacement member 370 is set as a position at which the front side surface of the projecting portion 378a contacts the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338. For this purpose, a light diffusion processing surface is not formed on the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, and a surface that is disposed opposite to the protruding portion 378a so as to be in contact with each other is formed as a flat surface. Thereby, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 at the front position can be stabilized.

  Since the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is disposed inside the recessed portion 378, the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 transmitted through the lower cylindrical portion 363c is applied to the front side flesh of the protruding portion 378a. It is hung on the rear side surface of the partition plate part 338 through.

  As described above, since the position where the driving force is transmitted is the left and right central portion of the slide displacement member 370, the drive force can be transmitted to the slide displacement member 370 in a well-balanced manner. That is, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a posture shift in the rotation direction about the vertical axis in the slide displacement member 370 at the time of longitudinal displacement.

  Further, since the front side surface of the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, the posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be easily corrected in the rotation direction about the vertical axis. .

  Here, when maintaining the posture and returning the posture of the slide displacement member 370 by abutting the partition plate portion 338 and the hemispherical protruding portion 372a, the contact area between the partition plate portion 338 and the hemispherical protruding portion 372a. Is small, the load is locally applied, and the durability of the hemispherical protrusion 372a may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, before the front side surface of the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the rotational direction about the vertical axis. Even when the sliding force occurs, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be eliminated in the process of transmitting the driving force while the front surface of the protruding portion 378a is in surface contact with the rear surface of the partition plate 338. Can be corrected to posture.

  The partition plate portion 338 against the protruding portion 378a functions not only for the purpose of positioning the slide displacement member 370 by abutting at the time of longitudinal displacement, but also for receiving a load in the forward tilt direction applied to the slide displacement member 370. Having.

  That is, in the state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position, when the load on the slide displacement member 370 changes its posture in the forward tilt direction due to its own weight of the ball riding on the ball guide portion 371b, the slide is performed. When the protruding portion 378a is displaced (displaced in the forward tilting direction) within the gap allowed by the displacement member 370, the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338.

  In this case, resistance in the opposite direction is applied to the protruding portion 378a from the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, so that the displacement of the protruding portion 378a is suppressed. can do.

  Next, portions of the operation units 600, 700, and 800 that have not been described in detail will be described again. First, as a detailed description of the first operation unit 600, the rotating member 620 will be described.

  FIG. 81 (a) is a front view of the rotating member 620, FIG. 81 (b) is a rear view of the rotating member 620, and FIG. 81 (c) is the direction of the arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81 (a). It is a side view of the rotation member 620 in a visual view.

  FIG. 82 is a front view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 83 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600. FIGS. 82 and 83 show a state in which the dish-shaped lid C2 displaced along the guide elongated hole 616 is arranged at the right end of the displacement range.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a) to FIG. 81 (c), the rotating member 620 is designed to be asymmetrical in relation to the load applied to the rotating member 620 when performing the operation. Hereinafter, the details of the rotating member 620 and the action on the rotating member 620 will be described.

  The main body 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a first side surface 621a, a second side surface 621b, and a third side surface 621c as flat side surfaces that receive a load when stopped. A first side surface 621a, a second side surface 621b, and a third side surface 621c are formed in order from the cylindrical portion 622.

  The first side surface 621a is a side surface formed on the tilting displacement side of the rotating member 620, and has a surface formed on a base-side projecting portion 617a projecting from the front lid member 612 to the front side in a U-shaped cross section. It is formed in a shape that can be abutted (the shape is designed in relation to the base-side protruding portion 617a). The displacement of the first side surface 621a is restricted by the base-side protruding portion 617a, thereby defining the range in which the rotating member 620 can be displaced (see FIG. 45 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range). ).

  The second side surface 621b is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and comes into contact with a front-side projecting portion 617b projecting from the front lid member 612 to the front side in a U-shaped cross section. It is formed in a shape that allows contact (the shape is designed in relation to the tip-side protruding portion 617b). The displacement of the second side surface 621b is restricted by the distal-side protruding portion 617b, so that the range in which the rotating member 620 can be displaced is defined (for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range, see FIG. 40). .

  The third side surface 621 c is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is in contact with a rectangular box portion 618 formed in a substantially rectangular box shape on the front side of the front lid member 612. It is formed in a shape that allows contact (the shape is designed in relation to the rectangular box portion 618). The displacement of the third side surface 621c is restricted by the rectangular box portion 618, so that the range in which the rotating member 620 can be displaced is defined (for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range, see FIG. 40).

  As described above, at the displacement end of the rotating member 620, the side surfaces 621a to 621c of the rotating member 620 abut on the corresponding front lid member 612, and the displacement is regulated. In particular, a plurality of contact locations are formed at the end of the displacement on the rising side of the rotating member 620.

  The purpose of forming a plurality of contact portions in this way is to distribute the load in the turning direction received at the time of contact at the plurality of positions, and to disperse the load in the front-rear direction that may occur on the rotating member 620 at the plurality of positions. This has the purpose of suppressing deformation of the rotating member 620 in the front-rear direction.

  The load in the front-rear direction that can be generated on the rotating member 620 includes, for example, a load in the forward falling direction due to receiving the weight of the second decorative rotating member 660 and a twist due to inertia when the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped. Load in the direction of rotation (load in the direction of rotation about the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620).

  In particular, since the load in the forward falling direction is a load in the forward tilting direction with the cylindrical portion 622 as a fulcrum, by considering the moment of force, the farther the contact position receiving the load is from the cylindrical portion 622, the more the load becomes. The load generated at the contact position is reduced. The second side surface 621b and the third side surface 621c are formed at positions away from the cylindrical portion 622 for one purpose of reducing the load generated at the contact position.

  The main body portion 621 of the rotating member 620 is a range including the concave portion 621d formed in a direction to be retracted from the drive motor 631 in order to avoid interference with the drive motor 631, and the concave portion 621d. And a thickened portion 621e formed as a rotating portion centered on the cylindrical portion 622 so as to include a region in contact with the base-side protruding portion 617a.

  Since the rotation base end side of the rotation member 620 has a narrow width due to the formation of the concave portion 621d, it is possible that breakage due to an impact load may occur without any countermeasure. Is formed, the influence of the concave portion 621d on the strength surface can be offset. Accordingly, it is possible to easily avoid the breakage of the rotating member 620.

  Further, since the thickened portion 621e is formed in a range including a portion that can come into contact with the base-side protruding portion 617a, an impact load that can be generated between the rotating member 620 and the base-side protruding portion 617a. , The durability of the rotating member 620 can be improved.

  FIG. 84 is a front view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 85 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600. FIGS. 84 and 85 show a state in which the width direction end of the extension 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1.

  The extension 634b is formed to have a width (circumferential length) that is at least three times as long as the width of the detection sensor KS1 in rear view. Here, forming the extension 634b to have a sufficiently large width has a structural purpose in addition to the purpose of detection.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the supported member 640 is connected to the front side of the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, and the second decorative rotating member 660 is disposed in front of the supported member 640. However, where a load in the forward falling direction can be applied to the rotating member 620, without any countermeasure, the rotating member 620 may be bent and deformed in the front-rear direction, resulting in malfunction.

  On the other hand, by forming the extended portion 634b facing the back surface of the fixed member 610 in a wide shape behind the cylindrical portion 634a connected to the rotating member 620 as in the present embodiment, The load applied from the extending portion 634b to the fixed means 610 via the portion 634a in the forward falling direction of the rotating member 620 can be received in a wide angle range of the arc-shaped hole 613d. Can be secured). Thus, the load received per unit area can be reduced, so that the forwardly displaced displacement of the rotating member 620 can be suppressed while preventing the extension portion 634b from being damaged.

  In the present embodiment, a structurally advantageous effect can be obtained by securing a long width of the extension 634b, while the end of the extension 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1. Even if the control mode is such that the driving of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction is stopped in the state (see FIG. 84), the rotating member 620 is moved to the end position on the initial position side (see FIG. 40) due to a load such as inertia. The structure is devised to reach.

  For example, first, the inertial force of each member is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 to the end position on the initial position side. Not only the inertial force due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 itself, but also the inertial force due to the rotational displacement in which the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are rotated clockwise around the axis O1 in rear view. This occurs in a direction in which the rotating member 620 is displaced to the end position on the initial position side (a direction in which the rotating member 620 is rotated counterclockwise in rear view).

  For example, secondly, the center of gravity of the front rotating member 652 (this embodiment) which is arranged to operate integrally with the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a constituting the gear mechanism via the intermediate gear 644. Here, the same as the center of the overhanging decorative portion 652b) is disposed at a position left and right away from the vertical position of the axis O1 as the rotation axis of the gear teeth 654a.

  Therefore, the weight of the front rotating member 652 occurs in the direction in which the gear teeth 654a rotate. In the present embodiment, the gear teeth 654a receive a load in a direction in which the gear teeth 654a rotate counterclockwise in rear view due to the weight of the front rotation member 652.

  The load is transmitted to the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 625 in this order, so that a load is applied to the rotating member 620 via the gear teeth 625 in the direction of rotating counterclockwise in rear view. That is, as a load different from the inertia of the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, a load in the rotating direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in a direction for displacing the rotating member 620 to the end position on the initial position side.

  As described above, due to the inertial load generated on the rotating member 620 and the load in the rotating direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652, the load for rotating the rotating member 620 even after the energization of the drive motor 631 is cut off. Configured to occur.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85, when the extending portion 634b is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, and the turning member 620 has not reached the displacement end position, the drive motor 631 is energized. Even when the cutting is controlled, the turning displacement of the turning member 620 is continued by the above-mentioned load, and the turning member 620 can reach the displacement end position on the initial position side (see FIG. 40).

  FIGS. 86 (a), 86 (b), 87 (a), 87 (b) and 88 show the extended portion of the guide slot 616, the dish-shaped lid C2, the detection sensor KS1 and the transmission gear cam 634. It is a rear view of 634b.

  In FIGS. 86 (a), 86 (b), 87 (a), 87 (b) and 88, the rotation operation of the transmission gear cam 634 started from the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 is time-series. Is illustrated in FIG.

  86A corresponds to the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600, FIG. 86B corresponds to the state illustrated in FIG. 85, and FIG. 87A corresponds to the first operation unit. FIG. 87 (b) corresponds to the state illustrated in FIG. 83, and FIG. 88 corresponds to the extended state of the first operation unit 600.

  The arrangement of the electric wiring passing through the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid C2 will be described. An electric wiring 618d whose end is fixed to a connector 618c provided on a substrate accommodated in the rectangular box portion 618 is provided so as to enter the second decorative rotating member 660 through the opening C2a.

  The electric wiring 618d is disposed so as to bypass the lower side of the partition 619 formed protruding from the front lid member 612 toward the base member 611 (see FIG. 39) and to enter the opening C2a. The electric wiring 618b has a length in consideration of the movement trajectory of the dish-shaped lid C2 having the opening C2a, and is arranged between the connector 618c and the opening C2a so as to be bent by its own weight.

  The partitioning portion 619 includes a columnar portion 619a formed at both upper and lower ends, and a plate-like portion 619b protruding in a long plate shape so as to connect between the columnar portions 619a. The columnar portion 619a and the plate upper portion 619b abut on the front side surface of the base member 611.

  A female screw is formed inside the columnar portion 619a, and a fastening screw passing through an opening formed in the base member 611 in a position corresponding to the columnar portion 619a is screwed into the base member 611 and the front lid. The member 612 is fastened and fixed. That is, the partition portion 619 can not only function to limit the arrangement position of the electric wiring 618d but also function to secure the rigidity of the base member 611 and the front lid member 612.

  Next, focusing on the movement of the opening C2a, a device for the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d will be described. First, description will be given focusing on the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 started from FIG. 86 (a). The dish-shaped lid C2 is displaced downward in the time series of FIGS. 86 (a), 86 (b), 87 (a), 87 (b), and 88.

  In the operation from the effect standby state (see FIG. 86 (a)) to the state where the width direction end of the extension 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 86 (b)), the dish-shaped lid is used. While the vertical arrangement of the portion C2 does not change much, the arrangement of the opening C2a is rotationally displaced counterclockwise in rear view.

  Thereby, before the dish-shaped lid part C2 starts full-scale downward displacement, the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d near the opening C2a can be moved in a direction away from the partition part 619, and the dish-shaped lid part C2 can be displaced downward. In this process, the electric wiring 618d can be prevented from being caught between the dish-shaped lid C2 and the partition 619.

  In particular, at the timing when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partitioning portion 619 come closest to each other (see FIG. 87B), the opening C2a faces the side (downward) where the electric wiring 618d is retracted from the partitioning portion 619. ing.

  This can avoid a situation where the electric wiring 618d is sandwiched between the partition 619 and the electric wiring 618d is disconnected even if the dish-shaped lid C2 is designed to be disposed close to the partition 619. And the like can be avoided.

  As shown in FIGS. 86 (a) to 88, during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid C2, the posture of the opening C2a is continuously rotationally displaced counterclockwise in rear view. At the lower displacement end of the dish-shaped lid C2, the opening C2a faces the opposite side (lower side) of the connector 618c, so that the electric wiring 618d is intentionally loosened downward. Thereby, while the length of the electric wiring 618d itself is secured, unnecessary loosening of the electric wiring at the displacement end position (for example, fluttering due to loosening in the front-back direction) can be avoided.

  Further, the length of the electric wiring 618d is designed to be a length that does not abut on the extension 634b during the operation of the first operation unit 600. Thus, even if a partition is not provided between the extending portion 634b and the electric wiring 618d, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the electric wiring 618d contacts the extending portion 634b and receives a load.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is closest to the transmission gear cam 634 (see FIG. 88), the extension portion 634b is disposed away from the connector 618c (the connector 618c is based on the rotation axis of the transmission gear cam 634). Is arranged on the opposite side), it is possible to secure a large range in which the electric wiring 618d is arranged while avoiding contact with the extending portion 634b, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the length of the electric wiring 618d. be able to.

  Next, description will be made focusing on the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 started from FIG. The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is displaced upward in the time series of FIGS. 88, 87 (b), 87 (a), 86 (b), and 86 (a).

  In the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid part C2, the opening C2a does not face the partition part 619 side from the displacement lower end position (see FIG. 88) until the dish-shaped lid part C2 comes closest to the partition part 619, and the lower side. Is facing. Thereby, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be displaced upward while ensuring that the electric wiring 618d is loosened downward.

  The direction of the opening C2a is such that even after the dish-shaped lid C2 has passed through the lower end of the partition 619, the opening C2a faces downward while rotating gradually (the electric wiring 618d in the vicinity of the opening C2a is closed by the partition 619). The state of being arranged along the longitudinal direction is maintained (see FIG. 87 (a)).

  Then, in a state where the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is sufficiently separated from the partition portion 619, the opening C2a is rotated to a posture facing the partition portion 619 side (see FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b)), and the electric wiring 618d is formed. It is arranged so as to enter (accommodate) between the partition part 619 and the dish-shaped lid part C2.

  Thus, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the electric wiring 618d is sandwiched between the dish-shaped lid part C2 and the partition part 619 to cause a disconnection, and the electric wiring 618d is caused by the vertical displacement of the dish-shaped lid part C2. Can be suppressed.

  In other words, the arrangement of the openings C2a is changed in accordance with the arrangement relationship between the partition 619 and the dish-shaped lid C2 to limit the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d, and the dish-shaped lid C2 and the dish 619 Since the electric wiring 618d is prevented from being disposed between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partitioning part 619 when the distance between them becomes narrow, the load applied to the electric wiring 618d can be suppressed.

  Therefore, compared to the case where the electric wiring 618d is arranged at an arbitrary position, the electric wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid C2 can be designed to be arranged closer to each other, so that the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid C2 can be designed. Degree of freedom can be improved.

  Further, the restriction on the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d is realized not by using a separate member such as a binding band but by the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid C2. As described above, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is a member used for fastening and fixing the first decorative rotating member 650 to the main body member 651, and is also used to restrict the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d.

  This eliminates the need for a dedicated member for bundling the electric wiring 618d such as a binding band. Further, unlike the binding band, the direction of the opening C2a can be changed so that the electric wiring 618d can be arranged on an appropriate side corresponding to the arrangement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, so that the electric wiring 618d is stretched or bent. Can be easily avoided.

  In the present embodiment, the opening C2a is formed as a fan-shaped opening having a center angle of about 110. Since the opening C2a is formed as a wide opening, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of a shape adopted as a portion (connection terminal or the like) of the electric wiring 618d passing through the opening C2a.

  Next, an arrangement structure of the electric wiring 618d arranged on the front side with respect to the opening C2a will be described. FIG. 89 is a front perspective view of the first decorative rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660.

  In FIG. 89, only parts necessary for explanation are shown, and illustration of other parts is omitted. That is, the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 of the first decorative rotating member 650 and the electric decoration board 662 and the wiring retaining plate 663 of the second decorative rotating member 660 are illustrated by solid lines, and the box is provided for easy understanding. The shape member 661 is shown by an imaginary line so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 89 illustrates an example of the arrangement of the electric wiring 618d, and illustrates a dish-shaped lid C2 having an opening C2a through which the electric wiring 618d is inserted. The electric wiring 618d is configured such that the wiring connected to the terminal of the electric decoration board 653 (see FIG. 41) and the wiring connected to the terminal of the electric decoration board 662 branch between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the wiring retaining plate 663 is a disk-shaped member having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and is formed in a long hole shape through which the electric wiring 618d can be inserted. And a pair of insertion holes 663b formed as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted on both sides of the insertion hole 663a.

  Since the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, the rotation member 657 (see FIG. 39) perpendicular to the shaft is prevented from falling off from the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. This can be prevented by the wiring retaining plate 663.

  Fastening screws passing through the insertion holes 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 are screwed into female screws formed on the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, respectively. As a result, the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are integrally fixed.

  As described above, the wiring retaining plate 663 has both a function of preventing the rotation member 657 from falling off and a function of integrally fixing the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. In addition, the wiring retaining plate 663 has a function of temporarily retaining the electric wiring 618d.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the electric wiring 618d passes through the inside of the wiring insertion long hole 663a of the wiring retaining plate 663, and is temporarily held in such a manner that displacement is suppressed by being sandwiched. In the present embodiment, the rotation operation of the second decorative rotation member 660 is a rotation operation in which a rotation operation of less than half a rotation (a rotation operation of about 135 degrees) is performed in a reciprocating direction instead of an operation of one or more rotations. Therefore, it is configured such that the second decorative rotating member 660 does not rotate a plurality of times and the electric wiring 618d is not twisted.

  The load (the load in the twisting direction) applied to the electric wiring 618d when the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates is considered to be large in the vicinity of the wiring insertion long hole 663a where twisting is likely to occur, but in this embodiment, Since the wire insertion long hole 663a is formed in a long hole shape and the electric wiring 618d is temporarily held between the wire insertion long holes 663a, the displacement of the electric wiring 618d within the long hole shape is allowed. ing.

  Therefore, even if an overload in the twisting direction occurs in the electric wiring 618d, the load can be released by displacing the electric wiring 618d in the wiring insertion long hole 663a. Thereby, the durability of the electric wiring 618d can be improved.

  The relationship between the twist direction of the electric wiring 618d disposed inside the main body member 651 and the direction of the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid C2 will be described. Since the main body member 651 rotates integrally with the rotation of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 shown in FIGS. 86A to 88, the electric wiring 618d disposed inside the main body member 651 includes Rotational twisting occurs. That is, with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction, a twist in the counterclockwise direction in rear view occurs.

  The opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid C2 is also displaced in the counterclockwise direction in rear view with the rotational displacement of the pivoting member 620 in the tilting direction, so that the load applied to the electric wiring 618d by the twist can be reduced. The durability of the electric wiring 618d can be improved).

  The dish-shaped lid C2 rotates while being displaced vertically along the guide slot 616. Here, in the time series from FIG. 86 (a) to FIG. 88, the electrical wiring 618d changes from a state where the slack between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid C2 is large to a state where the slack is small.

  Correspondingly, the rotation operation of the illuminated board 662 starts from a state in which the terminal of the electric wiring 618d on the illuminated board 662 side is disposed on the back side (the main body member 651 side) (see FIG. 89). It is configured as an operation of changing the state to a state of being arranged on the front side (the wiring receiving member 655 side). Accordingly, the state can be changed such that the electric wiring 618d is pulled to the front side.

  That is, in the time series from FIG. 86 (a) to FIG. 88, the electric wiring 618d is in a state where the electric wiring 618d inside the main body member 651 has a large slack (the state where the terminal on the electric decoration board 662 side is arranged on the back side). ) Changes to a state in which the slack is small (a state in which the terminal on the illumination board 662 side is arranged on the front side).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the magnitude relationship of the slack is reversed (balanced) between the relationship between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the relationship inside the main body member 651. Thus, the load applied to the electric wiring 618d due to the operation of the first operation unit 600 can be reduced.

  The relationship between the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d in the portion arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d in the portion arranged between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 will be described. I do.

  In the time series operation shown in FIGS. 86 (a) to 88, the electric wiring 618d disposed inside the main body member 651 is twisted counterclockwise as viewed from the rear, while the electric wiring 618d is not connected to the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655. The electric wiring 618d of the portion disposed therebetween is twisted in the rotational direction of the electric decoration board 662 (counterclockwise when viewed from below in FIG. 89 (viewing the insertion hole 663b from the electric decoration board 662 side)). That is, they are twisted in opposite directions.

  In the present embodiment, the first operation unit 600 is designed to minimize the torsion of the electric wiring 618d in the effect standby state, and to maximize the torsion of the electric wiring 618d in the extended state. I have.

  Thus, even if the electric wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a has a large slack, the electric wiring 618d is loosened in a state where a problem hardly occurs (effect standby state, see FIG. 86A). In a state in which it is preferable to reduce the slack of the electric wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a (extended state, see FIG. 88) while reducing the generated load, the main body member 651, the wiring receiving member 655, and the power The twisting of the decorative board 662 due to the rotation operation can be maximized, and the slack of the electric wiring 618d can be suppressed (the displacement of the electric wiring 618d can be suppressed).

  As described above, as a means for improving the durability of the electric wiring 618d, a state in which the twist is minimized and sufficient slack is generated, and the slack is reduced by the twist and the surrounding member (for example, the extension portion 634b) is electrically connected to the electric wiring 618d. It is configured to switch between a state of avoiding contact with the wiring 618d.

  As another embodiment, in the time series operation shown in FIGS. 86 (a) to 88, the direction of rotation of the illuminated substrate 662 is reversed (when viewed from the bottom in FIG. 89 (from the side of the illuminated substrate 662 to the insertion hole 663b). In the clockwise direction). In this case, the torsion direction of the electric wiring 618d disposed inside the main body member 651 and the torsion direction of the electric wiring 618d due to the rotation of the illuminated board 662 are in the same direction. Deformation can be offset.

  Next, features of the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the operation of the first operation unit 600 will be described. FIGS. 90 (a), 90 (b), 91 (a), 91 (b), and 92 show front views schematically showing the guide slot 616, the rectangular box portion 618, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b. It is a schematic diagram.

  In FIGS. 90 (a), 90 (b), 91 (a), 91 (b) and 92, the outlines of the guide slot 616 and the rectangular box 618 are schematically shown, so that it is easy to understand. In this state, in a state where the gear teeth 652a of the front rotation member 652 are omitted, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b from the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 is illustrated in a time series.

  In FIG. 90 (a), an arrangement corresponding to the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 40) is shown, and in FIG. 90 (b), the width direction end of the extending portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is formed. An arrangement corresponding to a state (see FIG. 84) arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 is shown. In FIG. 91 (a), an arrangement corresponding to the intermediate effect state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 43) is shown. FIG. 91 (b) shows an arrangement corresponding to a state in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 displaced along the guide slot 616 is arranged at the right end of the displacement range (see FIG. 82). An arrangement corresponding to the extended state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 45) is shown.

  In the effect standby state (see FIG. 90 (a)), the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged to the right so as to overlap the rectangular box portion 618 in a top view. Thus, the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be arranged outside the player's field of view (see FIG. 28). Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect standby state, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged behind the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2), so that the line of sight is easily blocked by the outer edge member 73. Visibility can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in a case where the overhanging decorative portion 652b is displaced downward while the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged rightward enough to overlap the rectangular box portion 618 in a top view, the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the rectangular It will collide with the shape box part 618 and cause a problem.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the posture of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is changed prior to the downward displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b or with the downward displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b ( FIG. 90 (b) and FIG. 91 (a)). This change in posture occurs as a rotation operation in a direction to retreat from the rectangular box portion 618 (obliquely upper left direction when viewed from the front, a rotation direction around the axis O1), so that the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 Collision can be easily avoided.

  In the present embodiment, after the overhang decorative portion 652b is retracted from the position above the rectangular box portion 618 (see FIG. 91 (a)) due to this posture change, the full-fledged dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the overhang decorative portion are provided. The downward displacement of the portion 652b is started.

  The downward displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is caused by the downward displacement of the axis O1. In the downward displacement, the direction in which the axis O1 approaches the rectangular box portion 618 along the shape of the guide slot 616 (rightward direction). ) (See FIG. 91 (b)), the overhanging decorative portion 652b may collide with the rectangular box portion 618.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rectangular box portion 618 is provided with a recessed portion 618 a formed on the left side surface along the shape of the guide elongated hole 616. In particular, the recessed portion 618a is formed as a recess at a position where the guide elongated hole 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are closest to each other, that is, at a position to the right of the right end of the guide elongated hole 616. As described above, the design of the shape of the rectangular box portion 618 is examined with one object of avoiding collision between the front rotating member 652 and the rectangular box portion 618.

  Further, the posture change of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is continued with the downward displacement of the axis O1, so that the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be displaced in a direction to retreat from the rectangular box portion 618. In the present embodiment, in the displacement from FIG. 91 (a) to FIG. 91 (b), the displacement dimension XL1 (retreat distance) of the overhanging decorative portion 652b to the left is the displacement dimension XR1 of the axis O1 to the right. Designed to be above (equal or exceed). Thereby, collision between the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 can be avoided.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (b), the left-right displacement of the axis O1 and the left-right displacement caused by the change in the posture of the overhanging decorative portion 652b are in opposite directions, and cancel each other. The displacement in the left-right direction of the overhanging decorative portion 652b was suppressed to be small.

  On the other hand, in the state shown in FIGS. 91 (b) to 92, the left-right displacement of the axis O1 and the left-right displacement caused by the change in the posture of the overhanging decorative portion 652b are in the same direction. Are superimposed, the displacement amount of the overhanging decorative portion 652b in the left-right direction increases.

  Thereby, despite the fact that the rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is constantly changed about the axis O1, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is displayed to the player from FIG. 90 (a). As shown in FIG. 91 (b), it is displaced in the vertical direction with a small lateral displacement (narrow width displacement trajectory), and from FIG. 91 (b) to FIG. I can show you.

  Therefore, a difference can be provided between the structure (member shape) for guiding the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the structure assumed by the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b seen by the player. Thereby, a surprising effect can be executed.

  That is, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be shown to the player as if the overhanging decorative portion 652b protruded from the right side of the rectangular box portion 618 to the left. Therefore, in the range of the left and right of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 30), where the width is small and the lateral displacement cannot be sufficiently secured, the unexpected displacement of jumping in the lateral direction can be shown to the player. Therefore, attention to the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be improved.

  Although the lateral displacement of the axis O1 and the lateral displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b are compared for convenience, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, since the axis O1 is a part of the rotation axis of the configuration of the first operation unit 600, the left-right displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the left-right displacement of the axis O1 configured to be rotatable about this rotation axis are described. The meaning is the same. Therefore, the above description may be understood as a comparison between the lateral displacement of the dish-shaped lid C2 and the lateral displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

  FIG. 93 is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit 600 along the line XCIII-XCIII in FIG. 85. FIG. 93 illustrates a cross-sectional view in a plane where the axis O <b> 1 and the rotation axis of the intermediate gear 644 pass. As shown in FIG. 93, the rear rotating member 654 is disposed on the bottomed cylindrical portion 645 from the front side, while the intermediate gear 644 is disposed on the main body portion 641 from the rear side, and an opening 645a is formed and communicated therewith. The gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 mesh with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 93, the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is formed larger than the outer diameters of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and the inner diameter of the rotation member 657 is smaller than the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663. Therefore, the displacement of the rotation member 657 in the axial direction can be restricted by the wiring retaining plate 663.

  In the present embodiment, the vertical rotation member 657 has a small gap between the step formed on the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a on the base end side in the axial direction (the upper side in FIG. 93) and the wiring retaining plate 663. It is arranged in a space. This can prevent the shaft perpendicular rotation member 657 from falling off and stabilize the arrangement of the shaft perpendicular rotation member 657 in the direction of the central axis of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

  Fastening screws passing through the insertion holes 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 are screwed into female screws formed on the half-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, respectively. As a result, the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are integrally fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 93, the overhanging decorative portion 652 b is disposed on the rear side as compared with the second decorative rotating member 660, and thus the third symbol display device 81 is compared with the second decorative rotating member 660. (See FIG. 2). In other words, the third symbol display device 81 is arranged close to the opening 511a (see FIG. 26) in the front-rear direction.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the third symbol display device 81 and the overhang decoration portion 652b are arranged apart from each other, the overhang decoration portion 652b is overlapped with the region right end RE1 of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Are arranged (see FIG. 29), and it is possible to easily cause an effect of making the player see (illusion) as if the display area is enlarged to the right.

  In particular, when the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the second decorative rotating member 660 are visually recognized at the same time (for example, see FIG. 29), the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged away from the third symbol display device 81 on the near side. On the other hand, the overhanging decorative portion 652b disposed close to the third symbol display device 81 from the front side is part of the display because it is easy to visually recognize independently of the display of the third symbol display device. The effect shown (illusion) can be emphasized.

  In other words, by preparing one object that is particularly conspicuous (corresponding to the second decorative rotating member 660), the other configuration (corresponding to the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the overhang decorative portion 652b) is determined. We try to reduce the degree. This makes it difficult to distinguish the display of the third symbol display device 81 from the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

  The overhanging decorative portion 652b is a portion formed of a hard resin and cannot change its shape on the way. However, the overhanging decorative portion 652b has a light emitting mode (color or brightness) of a light emitting unit such as an LED provided on the electric decoration board 653. By controlling so as to change the appearance (color, brightness, etc.) of the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

  Therefore, by changing the light emission mode of the light emitting means such as the LED provided on the electric decoration board 653 so as to match the moving image displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol display device 81 is changed. The overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to overlap the region right end RE1 of the display region (see FIG. 29), and it is easy to cause an effect of making the player see (illusion) that the display region is enlarged to the right. be able to.

  Next, the details of the second operation unit 700 will be described again. FIG. 94 is a front view of the second operation unit 700 in the extended state, and FIG. 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 along the line XCV-XCV in FIG.

  As described above, the second operation unit 700 is configured so that the vertical displacement and the longitudinal displacement are generated synchronously (sliding in the longitudinally inclined direction) in the sliding displacement. It is devised that the displacement occurs smoothly so that the displacement is not excessively conspicuous.

  For example, in the sliding displacement of the second operation unit 700, the displacement in the front-back direction inclined obliquely does not consist of a single displacement, but is a combination of the displacement in the up-down direction and the displacement in the front-back direction. It is configured.

  That is, first, the elevating plate member 740 connected to the rotating arm member 720 is guided by the metal bar 702 at the left end so as to be vertically displaced in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the metal bar 702. At the left end, in addition, a left rear plate member 750 and a blind decoration member 768 are disposed before and after the elevating plate member 740 to prevent the elevating plate member 740 from being freely displaced in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the displacement direction of the lifting plate member 740 can be restricted in the up-down direction.

  The right side of the elevating plate member 740 is supported by the rotating arm member 720. The right end of the lifting plate member 740 is not supported by a fixed member (a member fixed to the rear case 510), but is indirectly fixed via the rendering device 780 (a front upper inclined portion 714, 751). And the receiving inclined portion 762) (see FIG. 54). This prevents the right end of the elevating plate member 740 from being freely displaced in the front-rear direction, so that the displacement direction of the elevating plate member 740 can be restricted in the up-down direction.

  The effect device 780 supported by the elevating plate member 740 is guided by the cylindrical portion 744 (see FIG. 50) so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction. As described above, in realizing the sliding displacement in the front-back direction that is inclined obliquely, the guide of the displacement of the elevating plate member 740 or the rendering device 780 as a component is configured separately in the gravity direction and the horizontal direction. Have been.

  This makes it easier to maintain the displacement resistance low as compared to a configuration in which the guide is guided in the front-back direction that is inclined obliquely.

  The extended state of the second operation unit 700 illustrated in FIGS. 94 and 95 is a state that can be controlled to execute a displacement (see FIG. 57) for switching the state of the covering member 787. That is, in this embodiment, in other states of the overhang state (for example, the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 33)), The second operation unit 700 is controlled so as not to generate a displacement for switching the state of the installation member 787.

  By controlling in this manner, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 are placed at positions overlapping the left and right positions reached by the left and right end portions of the covering member 787 when the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 is executed. Even if it arrange | positions so that it may arrange | position, it can avoid that the cover member 787 collides with the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 can be improved.

  A description will be given of a configuration of the effect device 780 with respect to a displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787. First, a drive motor 782 (see FIG. 56) that generates a driving force of displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 is located at the left and right center positions of the rendering device 780 (the center of the insertion cylindrical portion 773 inserted into the cylindrical portion 744). (Where the center is located directly above).

  Thus, not only can the posture of the effect device 780 be tilted left and right due to the weight of the drive motor 782, but also the left and right balance of the driving force generated by the drive motor 782 can be stabilized.

  Further, in the extended state (see FIG. 95) of the second operation unit 700 capable of executing the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787, the cylindrical fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 supporting the elevating plate member 740. The left and right positions are equal to the right and left center positions of the rendering device 780 or the right positions.

  As described above, the right side portion of the elevating plate member 740 is supported only by the rotating arm member 720 that can be displaced in the left-right direction with the cylindrical portion to be fastened 724 serving as the supporting position, but in particular, the arrangement of the staging device 780. When the position of the cylindrical fastening part 724 at the time of execution of the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 is assumed to be likely to occur or the posture of the posture is likely to fluctuate, By setting, it is possible to stabilize the arrangement and posture of the effect device 780.

  Note that the control for executing the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 is performed only when the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state, but after the state of the covering member 787 is switched, It is possible to control to change the state of the two operation unit 700 to the effect standby state or the intermediate effect state.

  That is, for example, in order to switch the state of the covering member 787 from the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700 and to set the second operation unit 700 to the intermediate effect state, the second operation unit 700 is temporarily set. As the projecting state, after performing the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787, the second operating unit 700 is controlled to be displaced downward so as to change to the intermediate effect state.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the light diffusing member 778b is formed to be long in the left-right direction so as to overlap the inner end of the pair of front support members 760 when viewed in the front-back direction. Thereby, the rotating cylinder portion 774e (see FIG. 54) supported by the front support member 760 can be hidden so as not to be seen by the player, so that the player can grasp the arrangement and the shape of the rotating cylinder portion 774e. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the player knows that the effect device 780 is displaced in the front-back direction.

  Further, when the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state, the light diffusing member 778b is visually recognized so as to overlap the fixedly arranged three-dimensional decoration portion 768a in a right and left line in a front view (see FIG. 94). The arrangement of the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a in this state is arranged along the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81 in front view and over the left and right lengths of the lower edge.

  On the back side of the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration part 768a, substrates to which LEDs are fixed are provided on the front side, respectively, and the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration part 768a are irradiated with light emitted from the corresponding LED. Can be performed. With this light-emitting effect, an effect is provided in which the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 appears to be separated by light, or the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is brightened with light. And can be directed.

  Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the light diffusing member 778b has a function as a member for hiding the rotating cylindrical portion 774e (see FIG. 54) and a function as a member for performing a light emission effect jointly with the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a. It can be configured to have both.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the horizontally long member 742 is a cover that is provided behind the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a and separated from the back of the light diffusing member 778b (left side range) with a front-side interval therebetween. The cover 742a is provided.

  The covering cover 742 a is a blindfold member formed over the vertical width of the horizontally long member 742, and is disposed so that electric wiring can be passed through a gap between the horizontally long member 742 and the horizontally long member 742. That is, the electric wiring for supplying electricity to the rendering device 780 is guided to the rendering device 780 side from behind the blindfolding decorative member 768 through the gap between the covering cover 742 a and the horizontally long member 742, and the drive motor 782. , An electric decoration board 778a, a detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56), and the like.

  At this time, not only the covering cover 742a but also the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a are arranged in a folded state in front of the electric wiring, so that the configuration is such that the line of sight of the player is easily blocked. This makes it easier to prevent the player from being visually recognized.

  In other words, by arranging the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a, which are originally provided for producing light, in front of the path of the electric wiring in order to function as a blindfold of the electric wiring, The size of the cover 742a required for blindfolding can be reduced to the minimum size.

  Since the arrangement of the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a is fixed, the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a does not overlap with the horizontally long member 742 in the effect standby state (see FIG. 31) or the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33). Not available.

  In consideration of this, in the present embodiment, the formation range of the horizontally long member 742 is set to the outside of the light diffusion member 778b when viewed from the front. Thus, the electric wiring can be hidden by the horizontally long member 742 and the light diffusing member 778, and therefore, regardless of the state of the second operation unit 700 (the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the extended state), the electric wiring can be hidden. Can be prevented from being visually recognized by the player.

  FIG. 96 and FIG. 97 are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the direct acting plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785. FIG. 96 shows a horizontal arrangement state of the upside-down reversing member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c are arranged on the same straight line extending in the left-right direction. FIG. 97 shows an upside-down vertical arrangement state of the upside-down inversion member 781. (See FIG. 59 (c)).

  The pair of intermediate arm members 783 are not formed in the same shape, but include a curved forming portion 783d that is formed to be curved upward from the lower side surface in the state where the vertically reversing member 781 is horizontally arranged. The curve forming portion 783d is formed so as to protrude in a direction to withdraw from the drive gear 782a in order to avoid a collision between the intermediate arm member 783 and the drive gear 782a when the vertically reversing member 781 is vertically arranged.

  FIG. 98 is a front perspective view of the elevation reversal effect device 770. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the covering member is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines so that the inside can be seen through the covering member 787.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the magnet Mg is not disposed on the side where the pair of covering members 787 are disposed close to each other but near the left and right ends. Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg does not act so as to unite the covering members 787 directly, but acts independently on the pair of covering members 787.

  Thus, for example, when the operation of one of the covering members 787 becomes defective, it is possible to prevent the operation of the other covering member 787 from becoming defective.

  Further, for example, at the start of the displacement in which the pair of covering members 787 start to separate from each other in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent the magnetic force from acting in the direction opposite to the left-right displacement. That is, when the rotation operation is started from the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781, the timing at which the magnetic force acts can be delayed.

  Accordingly, at the time of starting displacement when the pair of covering members 787 start moving away from each other in the left-right direction, a change in load applied to the covering member 787 by the magnet Mg can be suppressed. Compared to the case where it is necessary to remove the magnet, when the pair of covering members 787 starts to be displaced from each other in the left and right direction, the covering member 787 vibrates due to a sudden change in magnetic force, and the displacement is not good. It becomes stable, and it is easy to avoid a situation in which an operation failure occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the magnets Mg are arranged on the left and right sides on opposite sides, and this effect will be described. The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f to which the metal screw that is in contact with the magnet Mg and to which a magnetic force is applied is fixed is disposed on the same side in the front-rear direction (the front side when the upside-down reversing member 781 is in the upright vertical position, FIG. 55). Therefore, the direction of the load generated in relation to the metal screw on the magnet Mg is the same in the front and rear directions on both the left and right sides.

  More specifically, for example, when the upside down member 781 changes from an upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59 (a)) to an inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59 (c)), the left side of the front view is covered. Since the member 787 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the forward movement of the attracting force is applied to the magnet Mg by the forward displacement of the metal screw disposed close to the magnet Mg (disposed on the upper side). While a load is generated, the cover member 787 on the right side in the front view rotates in the backward direction, so that the metal screw disposed close to the magnet Mg (disposed on the lower side) is displaced forward with the magnet. A forward load is generated on Mg as a reaction of the attraction force.

  Also, for example, when the upside down member 781 changes from an inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59 (c)) to an erect vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59 (a)), the left side cover member 787 in a front view is shown. Rotates backward, so that a rearward load is applied to the magnet Mg as a reaction to the attraction force due to the rearward displacement of the metal screw disposed close to the magnet Mg (located on the upper side). On the other hand, since the cover member 787 on the right side in the front view rotates in the forward rotation direction, the cover member 787 is moved closer to the magnet Mg (disposed on the lower side) by the rearward displacement of the metal screw. Generates a backward load as a reaction of the attraction force.

  As described above, the direction of the load generated by the magnet Mg between the rotating covering member 787 and the main body member 771 or the linear motion plate member 784 that supports the covering member 787 while maintaining the posture is determined on both the left and right sides. In the same direction.

  Here, in the case where a load in the front-rear direction is generated on both the left and right sides (for example, by disposing the left magnet Mg in the lower position, the arrangement of the left and right magnets Mg is set to the lower position, and the left shaft rotating member 785 is In the case where the design is changed so that the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f is arranged on the back side of the magnet Mg in the upright vertical arrangement state), the magnet Mg and the metal screw are raised and lowered by a load generated when the metal screw is peeled from the attracted state. The mode of the displacement applied to the reversal effect device 770 is such that the up-down reversal effect device 770 is rotated about a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction.

  In this case, it is easy for the vertical reversal effect device 770 to generate vibration in the rotation direction on the rotation shaft extending in the vertical direction. In particular, as in the present embodiment, the beveled tooth member 785c (see FIG. 96) is elastically deformed in the process of removing the attraction of the magnet Mg, and the elastic recovery of the beveled tooth member 785c is used after the attraction of the magnet Mg is removed. In the configuration in which the cover member 787 is rotated vigorously, it is assumed that the vertical reversal effect device 770 is likely to generate vibration in the rotation direction on the rotation shaft extending in the vertical direction.

  Furthermore, it is difficult to release the load from the lifting / reversing effect device 770, and the lifting / reversing effect device 770 may be damaged, or the durability of the lifting / reversing effect device 770 may be reduced. Therefore, from the viewpoint of stabilizing the displacement of the elevation reversal effect device 770 for a long time, it is considered that a countermeasure is required.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled from the attracted state, the cover member 787 that rotates and the main body member 771 that supports the cover member 787 while maintaining the posture and the straight member 771 Since the direction of the load generated between the moving plate member 784 and the left and right sides is the same in the front-rear direction, the up-down reversal effect is produced by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled from the attracted state. The mode of the displacement applied to the device 770 may be a mode in which the up-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, it can be easily offset by the displacement (displacement having a component in the front-rear direction) of the elevating / reversing effect device 770, and the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled from the attracted state is damaged by the elevating / reversal effect device 770. Can be avoided.

  In the second operation unit 700, the direction of the slide displacement of the rendering device 780 (the direction having the vertical component and the front-rear component, that is, the direction in a plane orthogonal to the horizontal direction) and the covering member 787 are arranged close to each other. The displacement start direction (left-right direction) from the state (vertical arrangement state of the upside-down reversing member 781) is orthogonal.

  Therefore, it is easy to avoid that one displacement is caused by the inertia of the other displacement. For example, when the slide displacement of the effect device 780 is performed, it is easy to avoid a situation in which a displacement (displacement in a direction away from each other) from a state in which the covering members 787 are arranged close to each other is unintentionally started. be able to.

  Next, the details of the third operation unit 800 will be described again. First, details of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described. FIG. 99 (a) is a front perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 99 (b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), the intermediate arm member 850 has a characteristic shape in which the axial position of the long rod is switched at the thickened portion 852.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (a), the thickened portion 852 is disposed to face the distal rod 853 of the adjacent rotating member 850, and the base reinforcing portion 852 a disposed to be opposed to the distal rod 853. And a recessed portion 852b formed by cutting out light from the front side along the axial direction.

  The base-side reinforcing portion 852a is lightened like the recessed portion 852b, but is designed so that the relative lightening amount is reduced and the deformation resistance is increased. Accordingly, even when the rotating arm member 850 comes into contact with the distal end side rod portion 853 formed on the side where the inertial force in rotation tends to increase, it is possible to avoid an excessive amount of deformation. can do.

  The concave portion 852b acts to reduce the deformation resistance of the thickened portion 852 due to elastic deformation. Thereby, the flexibility of the thickened portion 852 can be ensured, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

  Curved portions 852c that are concavely formed in a curved shape are formed on both side surfaces in the short direction of the thickened portion 852. The curved shape portion 852c can smoothly receive the curved shape portion 854d formed on the rotation base end side of the rotation transmitting portion 854 formed on the end of the distal end rod portion 853 of the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in the united state. Formed from various shapes.

  In the present embodiment, in the individual united state (see FIG. 66 (a)) and the unified state, the rotation direction of the intermediate arm members 850 when the adjacent intermediate arm members 850 are rotated and arranged close to each other is changed. Since this is reversed, which side of the short side surface of the intermediate arm member 850 is disposed closer to the curved portion 854d depends on which united state is configured.

  On this premise, since the curved portion 852c is formed on both side surfaces, the curved portion 854d can be smoothly received in any of the united states. Thereby, the state change to the united state can be smoothly performed.

  In addition, since the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d are designed to be able to abut against each other in a plane, an excessively large load is locally applied between the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d in the united state. Can be suppressed, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

  The third operation unit 800 is configured to be able to move up and down by the elevating arm member 801. The direction of the up and down displacement and the start of the displacement of the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834 from the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. The directions are not necessarily orthogonal to each other.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 66A, since the virtual position line 832F recognized as the displacement start direction of the rotating member 834 is set as a direction different at intervals of 72 degrees, the displacement starting direction of all the rotating members 834 is , And the direction of the vertical displacement cannot be orthogonal.

  Therefore, there is a possibility that a rotation operation (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) may occur unintentionally due to a load or inertia generated when the third operation unit 800 is displaced vertically. Means for taking measures against this malfunction will be described.

  FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram of the third operation unit 800 schematically illustrating the displacement between the metal bar 832 and the intermediate arm member 850.

  In FIG. 100, among the virtual position lines 832F of the metal bar 832, the virtual position line 832F extending downward in the individual united state, and the angle between the virtual position line 832F and the longitudinal direction of the intermediate arm member 850 is 0.5 degrees. A virtual position line 832F rotated counterclockwise in front view until it changes is illustrated.

  That is, FIG. 100 illustrates a state in which the angle θ51 is 45 degrees and the angle θ52 is 44.5 degrees.

  As shown in FIG. 100, at the start of the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 slides the rotation member 834 along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832 in a state where the rotation operation of the rotation member 834 is suppressed. It is configured to be able to.

  The amount of change in the angles θ51 and θ52 in FIG. 100 means the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with respect to the metal rod 832, and corresponds to the angle at which the bevel teeth 834a and 854c (see FIG. 61) cause the meshing rotation. .

  Here, a backlash (gap) is indispensable for erecting the meshing of the gear teeth, and the setting of the size of this gap changes the quality of rotation response. Various modes can be selected for setting the backlash, but in the present embodiment, the backlash is set at 0.5 degrees.

  That is, until the angle θ51 in the united state changes to the angle θ52, the backlash (gap) is only filled, and the meshing rotation is not started. On the other hand, the pivotal tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 slides radially outward of the third operation unit 800 along the virtual position line 832F.

  That is, at the time of starting the switching rotation operation from the united state (individual united state), the rotation operation of the rotating member 834 is suppressed, and the slide movement mainly along the metal rod 832 occurs.

  FIG. 101 is a schematic front view of the third operation unit 800. In the description of FIG. 101, FIG. 100 is appropriately referred to. In FIG. 101, the third operating unit 800 in the union state is illustrated, and the torque limiter 866 and the magnet Mg2 that generate a resistance to the displacement of the third operating unit 800 are illustrated.

  Here, the rotation member 834 is configured not to rotate when the inner rotation member 830 slightly rotates (eg, rotates about 5 degrees (see FIG. 100)) with respect to the outer rotation member 840. ing.

  Thus, as in the present embodiment, even in a configuration in which the magnet Mg2 is employed to maintain the united state of the plurality of first decorative members 870 and the second decorative members 880, an attractive force is generated in the circumferential direction. In addition, since the displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the united state can be limited to the linear displacement, the united state by the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 can be easily maintained.

  In other words, when the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 rotate around the metal rod 832 at the time of starting displacement from the united state, the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 rotate in the direction orthogonal to the direction of the magnetic force. Since the 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced, it is considered that the magnetic force is easily lost. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the displacement at the time of starting the displacement from the combined state of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 is only the displacement (the metal rod 832) along the plane on which the five magnets Mg2 are arranged. (Displacement in the sliding direction along the axis), it is easy to maintain the united state by the magnetic force.

  Accordingly, even when the inner rotating member 830 is slightly rotated unintentionally (for example, rotated about 5 degrees) due to an unintended load or the like, the plurality of first decorative members 870 and the second decorative members 870 are formed. The united state of the member 880 can be easily maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the forward rotation, the torque limiter 866 disconnects when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied, so that the switching rotation DR1 is generated so as to reduce the resistance (slip). In the rotation in the opposite direction, the idle rotation AR1 is generated so that the resistance is reduced (idle). The torque limiter 866 is configured as a set in which the forward and reverse rotations are reversed.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, the left rotation of the torque limiter 866 generates a resistance until the applied load reaches an allowable value in a clockwise rotation when viewed from the front, and causes the switching rotation DR1 to idle when the applied load exceeds the allowable value. On the other hand, in the counterclockwise rotation direction as viewed from the front, the motor is configured to generate an idling rotation AR1 of idling.

  In addition, the right torque limiter 866 is configured to generate an idling rotation AR1 of idling in a clockwise rotation direction in a front view, while the applied load is an allowable value in a counterclockwise rotation direction in a front view. The switching rotation DR1 is generated until the resistance is reached, and the idle rotation occurs when the rotation exceeds the allowable value.

  As described above, the pair of torque limiters 866 function as safety clutches in different rotation directions, so that the switching rotation operation can be performed in both directions as described above.

  Further, in a state where no load exceeding the allowable value in the rotational direction is generated, resistance in both the forward and reverse directions is applied to the outer rotating member 840 via the load response gear 865 (see FIG. 61) mounted on the torque limiter 866. In addition, it is possible to suppress a rotating operation of the outer rotating member 840 that may be caused by an unintended load (an inertial force of vertical displacement or an impact force when the door is opened and closed). Therefore, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 can be maintained by the set of torque limiters 866.

  As shown in FIG. 101, the magnet Mg2 is fixed to one side in the width direction of the second covering portion 885, and is arranged concentrically in a state where the five second covering portions 885 are united in an annular shape. The magnet Mg2 generates an attraction force between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 fixed to the second covering portion 885 which is arranged adjacent to and adjacent to the magnet Mg2.

  With such a configuration, when the magnet Mg2 is disposed on both sides in the width direction of the specific second covering portion 885 (that is, the second second covering portion 885 is disposed adjacent to and adjacent to the specific second covering portion 885 on both sides). Both of the covering portions 885 are separated from the specific second covering portion 885 in the combined state as compared with the case where both of the covering portions 885 receive the urging force in the direction approaching the specific second covering portion 885 from the magnet Mg2). It is possible to prevent the gap generated between the second covering portions 885 from increasing at the position, and to make the gaps between all adjacent second covering portions 885 uniform.

  In addition, as described above, the displacement of the second decorative member 880 from the united state is configured as a slide movement in the radially outward direction, and the uniting by the magnetic force is started before the rotation around the metal rod 832 is started. At a position where the magnets Mg2 are separated to such an extent that they are released (see FIG. 100), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 acts in the direction of shortening the circumference of the concentric circle in which the second decorative member 880 is aligned (the direction toward the center of the concentric circle). The second decorative member 880 serves as a resisting force for the radially outward sliding movement of the second decorative member 880.

  In addition, since this resistance force is generated with the same magnitude from each direction obtained by dividing 360 degrees into five equal parts, the load received by the third operation unit 800 from the magnet Mg2 can be balanced. That is, the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be more easily stabilized than when the magnetic force Mg2 acts non-uniformly.

  Since the shape of the second decorative member 880 is common to all five and the arrangement of the magnets Mg2 is also common, the front and rear positions of each magnet Mg2 are equal. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid applying a load having a component in the front-rear direction to the second decorative member 880 due to the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2, so that the magnetic force is generated at the time of starting displacement from the combined state or immediately before reaching the combined state. Occur in the front-rear direction, and the second decorative member 880 can be easily prevented from vibrating in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 102 is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. In FIG. 102, an arrangement state corresponding to the individual united state of the decorative members 870 and 880 is illustrated, and for easy understanding, the intermediate arm member 850 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and the outer rotating member arranged on the rear side is illustrated. 840 is made visible.

  As shown in FIG. 102, in the present embodiment, at least one portion that restricts rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 in one direction (clockwise direction in front view in FIG. 102) can be secured, In many cases, the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted at two places. A configuration for restricting the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described.

  First, there is a contact protruding portion 845 protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840. The contact protruding portion 845 is formed to have a shape tapering outward in the radial direction at an intermediate angle position between the adjacent extending arm portions 842, and the inside thereof is hollowed out in a direction parallel to the axial direction of the main body portion 841. ing.

  The contact protruding portion 845 is disposed so as to face the intermediate arm member 850 in the rotation direction of the intermediate arm member 850, and is disposed so as to be able to contact the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850. , The intermediate arm member 850 is prevented from rotating excessively.

  In the thickened portion 852, the deformation resistance of the elastic deformation is reduced by the concave portion 852b (see FIG. 99 (a)). Similarly, the contact protruding portion 845 is lightened. Accordingly, even when the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced at a high speed and the curved shape portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 collides with the contact protruding portion 845, the load generated at that time is reduced by the contact protruding portion. Since it can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the thickening portion 845 and the thickened portion 852, the damage of the contact protruding portion 845 and the thickened portion 852 can be avoided.

  The contact protruding portion 845 is not provided at all positions as the intermediate angular position of the extending arm portion 842, but is omitted at the angular position where the detected portion 844 is formed. Thus, the arrangement of the contact protruding portion 845 and the detected portion 844 in the axial direction is shifted, and the direction in which the outer rotating member 840 is pulled out of the molding die can be set in the axial direction of the main body portion 841. . Therefore, the design of the molding die can be facilitated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the formation of the contact protruding portion 845 is omitted as a price for facilitating the design of the molding die, but in the present embodiment, the rotation of the rotating arm member 850 is restricted. As a second configuration, a base-side reinforcing portion 852a is formed in the thickened portion 852.

  The proximal reinforcing portion 852a is disposed to face the distal rod portion 853 (see FIG. 99 (a)) in the rotation direction of the adjacent rotating member 850, and can be contacted when the distal rod portion 853 rotates excessively. Is arranged to prevent the intermediate arm member 850 from over-rotating.

  The base-side reinforcing portion 852a is lightened like the recessed portion 852b, but is designed so that the relative lightening amount is reduced and the deformation resistance is increased. Accordingly, even if the rotation arm member 850 comes into contact with the rotation tip side, which is the side where the inertia force in rotation tends to be large, it is possible to prevent the deformation amount from becoming excessive.

  The curved portion 852c is designed to be able to abut on the curved portion 854d in a plane, so that an excessive load is locally generated between the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d in a united state. Can be suppressed, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

  As described above, when the contact protruding portion 845 is disposed to face the contact portion 845, the displacement of the rotating arm member 850 is caused by not only the contact with the contact protruding portion 845 but also the adjacent turning arm member 850. The curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d can be brought into contact with each other, or the proximal reinforcing portion 852a of the adjacent rotating arm member 850 and the distal end rod portion 853 can be brought into contact with each other. Thus, excessive rotation of the rotating arm member 850 is restricted.

  On the other hand, even when the arrangement of the contact protruding portion 845 is omitted, the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d of the adjacent rotating arm member 850 are brought into contact with each other, or the adjacent rotating arm member 850 is contacted. With such a configuration that the base end side reinforcing portion 852a and the front end side rod portion 853 of the base 850 can be brought into contact with each other, excessive rotation of the rotating arm member 850 can be restricted.

  The configuration of these abutments is such that the five rotating arm members 850 are related to each other (circulated). Therefore, at first glance, the formation of one contact protruding portion 845 is omitted, and there is little configuration that restricts the rotation only of the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to the omitted portion. However, in reality, the load at the time of contact can be dispersed by the interaction of the five rotating arm members 850.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the durability of the single rotating arm member 850 (the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to the portion where the formation of the contact protruding portion 845 is omitted) from being extremely reduced.

  Also, the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 extending in an annular shape from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 841 on one plane along the rear side end of the abutting projecting portion 845 is performed by the abutting and projecting. Similarly to the portion 845, it is omitted in a portion overlapping the detected portion 844 in the axial direction.

  The omission of the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 can be described as a cost of facilitating the design of the molding die, similarly to the omission of the formation of the contact protruding portion 845 described above. The effect of the portion 846 is realized by (the configuration for supporting) the rotating arm members 850 adjacent to each other even in a place where the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is omitted.

  That is, the effect of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 can be described as a correction of the displacement of the front and rear positions of the rotating arm member 850. That is, when the rotating arm member 850 is displaced radially outward from the united state (see FIG. 64A) (see FIG. 65A), and returns to the united state, the leading end of the rotating arm member 850 is moved. Even if the disposition is unintentionally shifted back and forth, the rear side surface of the proximal end rod portion 851 (see FIG. 99 (b)) is arranged to face the annular plate-shaped portion 846 so that it can be contacted. By doing so, the front and rear positions of the rotating arm member 850 can be corrected by the contact.

  This operation cannot be achieved when the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is omitted, because the contact with the annular plate-shaped portion 846 does not occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the rear side surface of the distal end rod portion 853 of the rotating arm member 850 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extending arm portion 842, the distal end of the rotating arm member 850 is disposed at a lower position. Even if it is displaced back and forth, the rear side surface of the distal end rod portion 853 is disposed to be in contact with the front side surface of the extension arm portion 842 so that it can be brought into contact therewith. The front-back position of the arm member 850 can be corrected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is generated by the extended arm portion 842. Thus, the effect of correcting the front-rear arrangement of the rotating arm member 850 can be exerted on all the rotating arm members 850 while partially forming the annular plate-shaped portion 846.

  FIG. 103 (a) is a rear view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 103 (b) is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b) show the relative arrangement of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850 in the united state.

  The state illustrated in FIG. 103A is a state in which the virtual position line 832F has been rotated from the state in FIG. 65B to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in the present embodiment) (a state in which the switching rotation operation has been completed). The state illustrated in FIG. 103B corresponds to the state in which the virtual position line 832F has been rotated from the state in FIG. 67B to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in the present embodiment) (the switching rotation operation is performed). (Completed state).

  Comparing the union state and the individual union state (see FIGS. 64A and 66A), the short side of the intermediate arm member 850 near the outer rotating member 840 is reversed, so There is a difference that the curved portion 852c abutting on the projecting portion 845 is on the opposite side, and the curved portion 852c abutting on the curved portion 854d is reversed.

  For the purpose of coping with this difference, the contact protruding portion 845 has a line-symmetric shape in a front view with respect to the radial direction of the main body portion 841, and the pair of curved portions 852c and 854d , A line symmetrical shape in a front view with respect to a longitudinal direction line (a straight line connecting the rotation base end and the supported hole 854a) of the intermediate arm member 850.

  Further, the curved shape of the contact protruding portion 845 and the curved shape of the curved portion 854d are designed to have the same curved shape in accordance with the shape of the curved portion 852c. Thus, in the individual united state and the one united state, the united state can be configured in a similar engagement relationship.

  In the combined state, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 is configured to be sandwiched between the contact protruding portion 845 and the curved portion 854d from both sides. This can suppress the displacement of the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 in any of the rotation directions, so that the state of the intermediate arm member 850 can be easily maintained, and the united state is maintained. Can be made easier.

  104 and 105 are front views of the third operation unit 800. FIG. FIG. 104 illustrates a state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter positions (a state intermediate between the individual united state and the united state), and FIG. 105 illustrates the united state.

  FIG. 106 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit 800 along the line CVI-CVI in FIG. 105, and FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit 800 along the line CVII-CVII in FIG. As the configuration of the third operation unit 800, the front and rear arrangement of the metal bar 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 can be arbitrarily set.

  If the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged on the front side of the metal bar 832, the player can visually recognize the metal bar 832 through the intermediate arm member 850, so that the visibility of the metal bar 832 can be reduced. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the metal bar 832 is arranged on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850.

  With this arrangement, the metal bar 832 as a support member functions as a shielding member that partially hides the intermediate arm member 850. Thereby, the middle arm member 850 as a functional member, not a decorative member, can be prevented from being conspicuous, and the appearance of the third operation unit 800 can be improved.

  In the exposed state (see FIG. 104), the metal bar 832 also functions as an effect member that reflects light due to the gloss of the surface, so that the light effect by the light emitted from the outer light emitting portion 823b (see FIG. 107) is obtained. The production effect can be improved. That is, the metal bar 832 can be used as a reflection member for producing light.

  When the intermediate arm member 850 is disposed on the front side of the metal bar 832, light that enters the player's eyes may be blocked by the intermediate arm member 850, but in the present embodiment, the intermediate arm member 850 is connected to the metal bar 832. Since it is arranged on the back side of 832, it is possible to avoid that light is blocked by the intermediate arm member 850 and the appearance is deteriorated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the light is reflected via the metal rod 832 in a state where the metal rod 832 is exposed (see FIGS. 104 and 107) during the switching rotation operation. The range in which the light effect is performed can be extended. That is, it is arranged not only in a range behind the translucent decorative member 824 on which the electric decoration board 823 (see FIG. 60) is disposed, but also so as to protrude radially outward of the translucent decorative member 824 in front view. Also in the range ER1 (see FIG. 104) where the metal bar 832 is exposed and visible, the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player.

  The bulging portion 824a has a light diffusion shape portion 824b (see FIGS. 106 and 107) having a light diffusion shape formed in an annular shape on the inner peripheral surface as a portion for receiving light. The light emitted from the inner light emitting portion 823a can be applied to the light diffusion shape portion 824b, and the light diffusion shape portion 824b that receives the light shines brightly in an annular shape.

  Accordingly, the light diffusion shape portion 824b is visually recognized as being annularly bright not only during the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880, but also during the switching rotation operation in which the annular arrangement of the decorative members 870 and 880 is released. Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the effect of utilizing the annular shape of the third operation unit 800.

  As shown in FIG. 104 and FIG. 105, the translucent decorative member 824 is not only a bulged portion 824 a visually recognized in the united state, but also an extended portion that extends radially outward from the bulged portion 824 a in front view. 824c.

  The extended portion 824c is hidden by the decorative members 870 and 880 in the united state, and has a low function as a decorative portion. However, the extension portion 824c has an effect of blindfolding the mechanism during the switching rotation operation shown in FIG. .

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 107, the extending portion 824c is difficult to use for production, such as the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 and the extending arm portion 842 of the outer rotating member 840 (see FIG. 61). It is formed in such a size as to be able to cover and block the mechanism.

  Since the decorative pattern is provided not only on the bulging portion 824a but also on the front side of the extending portion 824c, the decorative pattern can be visually recognized in a range where the mechanical portion is shielded and blindfolded. The effect can be improved.

  An example of drive control of the third operation unit 800 will be described. First, the relationship between the vertical displacement of the third operation unit 800 due to the drive control of the vertical arm member 801 and the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 due to the drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described.

  According to the present embodiment, the up / down displacement and the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 are configured to be executable independently. For example, due to the inertial load at the time of the up / down displacement of the third operation unit 800, There is a possibility that a rotational displacement occurs in the third operation unit 800 in conjunction therewith. In this case, the posture of the third operation unit 800 changes, or the combined state of the third operation unit 800 is released (the decorative members 870 and 880 are displaced radially outward against the attraction force of the magnet Mg2). As a result, there is a possibility that the production effect is reduced.

  In order to avoid this, for example, the vertical movement of the third operation unit 800 and the rotational displacement (particularly, the integral rotation operation) of the third operation unit 800 may be controlled to be executed simultaneously.

  Thereby, the rotational displacement at the time of the vertical movement of the third operation unit 800 can be shown to the player as a rendering operation, so that a reduction in the rendering effect can be prevented. Further, while the integral rotation operation is continued, a load is continuously applied in the direction of displacing the decoration members 870 and 880 inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 101), so that the union state of the third operation unit 800 is released. Can be avoided.

  In addition, even if control for simultaneously executing the vertical displacement and the rotational displacement is not performed, the posture of the third operation unit 800 is set in advance so that the rotating arm member 850 is not easily displaced by the vertical displacement. Control may be performed to adjust the attitude of the unit 800 in the rotation direction.

  The fact that the detection mode of the detected portion 844 of the outer rotation member 840 by the detection sensor 813 changes (see FIG. 68) indicates that in the present embodiment, the rotation mode of the inner rotation member 830 is executed by an integral rotation operation. means. Therefore, based on this, it is assumed that the detection mode of the detection sensor 813 and the control of the third operation unit 800 are associated with each other and designed.

  This premise is based on the fact that the switching rotation operation is performed in a state where the posture of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained (a state in which the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are not linked). Therefore, it is preferable to avoid a state in which this assumption may be broken.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 is controlled by the driving force of the drive motor 861, the resistance applied by the torque limiter 866 acts to suppress the rotation of the outer rotating member 840. The position of 840 is maintained.

  Therefore, for example, during the execution of the switching rotation operation, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotation member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 increases, and the operation resistance between the inner rotation member 830 and the outer rotation member 840 increases. Becomes larger and exceeds the resistance applied by the torque limiter, the outer rotating member 840 and the inner rotating member 830 may be interlocked and the switching rotation operation may not be properly performed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced.

  For example, the direction of displacement of the rotation tip of the intermediate arm member 850 for displacing the translation member 833 and the rotation member 834 from the combined state is a direction along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832. That is, since the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced in a direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the metal rod 832, it is possible to make the resistance of the rotation of the metal rod 832 unlikely to occur, and the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, and the rotation member 834. And the resistance generated between the arm member 850 and the intermediate arm member 850 can be reduced.

  In a state where the translation member 833 and the rotation member 834 are arranged at the radially outer end positions (see FIG. 104), the displacement direction of the rotation tip side (for example, the supported hole 854a) of the intermediate arm member 850 is determined by the metal rod. Since it is along the rotation direction of 832, especially when the speed is insufficient, it is easy to configure a state in which the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 move in parallel. In this case, the switching rotation operation becomes defective.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a control mode is adopted in which the drive is continued at a sufficient speed until the united state is reached after the start of the switching rotation operation, and the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 834 have the radial outer end. In the state of being placed at the position (see FIG. 104), the decorative members 870 and 880 receive inertia so as to rotate around the metal rod 832.

  Under the influence of this inertia, the rotating member 834 fastened and fixed to the decorative members 870 and 880 rotates, and the beveled tooth portion 834a and the beveled tooth portion 854c mesh with each other. It passes through the radially outer end position and pivots radially inward (see FIGS. 65 (b) and 67 (b)).

  In a state where the outer end of the intermediate arm member 850 is out of the radially outer end position, the rotation tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 is easily displaced in the direction along the metal bar 832, so that resistance to the rotating operation of the metal bar 832 can be easily suppressed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, reduction of the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotation member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 is realized by the relationship between the members and the design of the drive control. I have.

  During the switching rotation operation, the posture of the outer rotation member 840 is maintained, and the arrangement of the detected portion 844 does not change. Therefore, the end timing of the switching rotation operation is determined by the change in the detection mode of the detection portion 844 by the detection sensor 813. It cannot be determined.

  For example, the control for stopping the drive motor 861 at the timing when the united state is reached can be realized by setting a sufficient drive time necessary for the switching rotation operation in advance, and controlling to stop the drive at the drive time. However, depending on the degree of resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850, the displacement amount may be different even if the driving time is the same, and before the united state is reached. Driving may be stopped. In this case, the effect may be reduced.

  On the other hand, instead of the control mode in which the drive motor 861 is stopped at the timing when the united state is reached, the change in the detection mode of the detection target 844 by the detection sensor 813 causes the switching rotation operation to end and the integrated rotation operation to be completed. It may be determined that it has started (see FIG. 68), and after this determination, control may be performed to stop the drive motor 861. With this control, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive of the drive motor 861 is stopped in a state where the decorative members 870 and 880 have not reached the united state after the execution of the switching rotation operation.

  As described above, the switching rotation operation is performed in the extended state of the third operation unit 800 as the drive control. However, the integral rotation operation can be performed without being affected by the state of the third operation unit 800. It is.

  As the drive control, the switching rotation operation can be performed without being affected by the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 in the rotation direction. Therefore, as described above with reference to FIG. Can be avoided. That is, the state is not limited to the state in which the detected portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 66A), and the state in which the detected portion 844 is not arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. The switching rotation operation can be performed even from.

  On the other hand, unlike the case where the switching rotation operation is performed in a state where the detection target portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the detection target portion 844 moves to the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 after the switching rotation operation ends. Until the vehicle enters, the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change, so it is necessary to devise a control mode.

  For example, regardless of the output of the detection sensor 813, the switching rotation operation may be performed in a driving period that is set in advance as a driving period necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation. Control may be performed such that driving of the drive motor 861 is continued until the drive motor 861 enters the detection groove.

  In the latter case, the operation mode shifts to an integral rotation operation after the end of the switching rotation operation, and the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so that the switching rotation operation has already ended and the decorative member 870, 880 can be determined to be in the united state.

  On the other hand, although the drive of the drive motor 861 is executed for a time period sufficient for the detected portion 844 to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by shifting from the switching rotation operation to the integral rotation operation. If the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change, it can be determined that the third operation unit 800 has an operation failure based on the output of the detection sensor 813.

  In the latter case, the switching rotation operation is performed from an arbitrary rotation arrangement of the third operation unit 800, and the detection groove is detected in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 in a state where the union state (see FIG. 32) is maintained. The driving is continued until the section 844 enters.

  In the united state of the third operation unit 800, as described above, the appearance is unlikely to differ even if the rotational arrangement is different. Therefore, even if the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 is continued until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 in the union state, it is easy to avoid a reduction in the effect.

  Further, in the case of performing the control for returning from the reversal effect to the normal effect shown in FIG. 68, since the detected portion 844 is already arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor The period until the output of the signal 813 changes can be minimized. In other words, a short drive period in which the detected portion 844 disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 is retracted from the detection groove is sufficient, and thus the length required for the control for returning from the reverse effect to the normal effect. Can be minimized.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the degree of freedom of the rotational arrangement of the third operation unit 800 for starting the switching rotation operation for switching from the normal effect to the reverse effect is improved, and the return operation is usually prolonged. However, there is a case where the switching rotation operation from the reversal effect as the return operation to the normal effect is shortened.

  That is, a part of the return operation for returning the difference in the rotational arrangement of the third operation unit 800 (the rotational displacement until the detected portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813) is viewed even if the rotational arrangement is different. By performing in the one union state in which the appearance is unlikely to change, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the effect of the third operation unit 800 during the return operation.

  Further, by performing a part of the return operation in advance, the period required for the switching rotation operation as the remaining return operation can be shortened.

  Among the operation units 600, 700, and 800, the structure commonly used by the plurality of operation units 600, 700, and 800 will be described in cross-section, including the reason for the difference in the adoption mode.

  First, as a first cross-sectional description, the configuration of the detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, and 813 commonly used in each of the operation units 600, 700, and 800 is confirmed, and the mode of adoption (the number of sensors, The reason for the difference in the shape of the detection piece will be described.

  The detection sensor KS1 of the first operation unit 600 is a detection device for detecting the arrangement of the first operation unit 600, and the extension 634b can enter the detection groove. The detection device included in the first operation unit 600 is only one detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 41). With respect to a plurality of displacement members such as the rotation member 620, the supported member 640, the overhanging decoration part 652b, and the second decoration rotation member 660, if the posture of the rotation member 620 is determined, the arrangement and posture of the other displacement members are determined. , The arrangement and posture of the plurality of displacement members can be determined based on the detection result of one detection sensor KS1. This makes it possible to reduce the number of detection devices provided.

  The detection sensor 713 of the second operation unit 700 is a detection device for detecting the attitude of the gear cam member 734 of the second operation unit 700, and the detection target 735 can enter the detection groove. There are three detection devices for the second operation unit 700 to detect the attitude of the gear cam member 734 (see FIG. 50), corresponding to the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the overhang state of the second operation unit 700, respectively. I do.

  The detection sensor 713 that determines the effect standby state is necessary to determine the return to the initial position. The detection sensor 713 for judging the overhang state is necessary for judging the arrival at the end position of the ascending displacement, in addition to the reversing operation of the elevating and reversing effect device 770 and the judging of the displacement due to the unintended load. Is required. The detection sensor 713 that determines the intermediate effect state is necessary for determining whether the vehicle has reached the vertical position in the intermediate effect state, and is also necessary for determining a position shift due to an unintended load. Hereinafter, the inversion operation and the effect of an unintended load will be described in order.

  First, the inversion operation will be described. In the second operation unit 700, in addition to the vertical displacement of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 generated in conjunction with the rotation operation of the gear cam member 734, the inverting operation of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 (see FIG. 59) is possible.

  The reversing operation may cause the up-down reversal effect device 770 to be displaced in the up-down direction. For example, when only a single detection sensor 713 (a detection device that determines an effect standby state) is employed, the overhang state It is not possible to determine the vertical position shift in the intermediate effect state, and there is a possibility that an appropriate effect operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the overhang state of the second operation unit 700 is provided. Therefore, for example, it is possible to determine that the elevating / reversing effect device 770 has been displaced in the up-down direction by performing the inverting operation of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 in the extended state, and appropriately adjust the attitude of the gear cam member 734 based on the determination result. By rotating the drive motor 731 in the direction to be corrected (to be in the overhang state), it is possible to keep the arrangement of the vertical inversion effect device 770 properly.

  In the present embodiment, since the reversing operation is allowed only when the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state (when the gear cam member 734 is at the end of operation), the correction of the displacement during the reversing operation is performed by the gear cam. It is easy to rotate the member 734 to the operation end side, which is easy.

  Next, the effect of an unintended load will be described. In the second operation unit 700, in addition to the vertical displacement of the lifting / lowering plate member 740 generated in conjunction with the rotating arm member 720 that rotates by the rotation operation of the gear cam member 734, the front / rear position corresponding to the vertical position of the lifting / lowering plate member 740 The longitudinal reversal effect device 770 is displaced back and forth with reference to the lift plate member 740 for displacement (see FIGS. 52 to 54).

  Therefore, with the vertical reversing effect device 770 being displaced in the front-rear direction by the load applied in the front-rear width direction of the gaming machine, the vertical position of the reversing effect device 770 and the elevating plate member 740 fluctuate. The posture of the member 734 may change. Examples of the load applied in the front-rear width direction of the gaming machine include an impact load when a player hits the gaming machine, a load when opening and closing the front frame 14, and the like.

  Since there is a possibility that the up-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the vertical direction due to the load in the front-rear width direction, for example, when only a single detection sensor 713 (detection device for judging the effect standby state) is used, It is not possible to determine the vertical position shift in the appearing state or the intermediate effect state, and there is a possibility that the vertical reversing effect device 770 cannot be maintained in an appropriate arrangement.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the overhang state of the second operation unit 700 is provided. Therefore, for example, when a load in the front-rear width direction is applied to the gaming machine in the intermediate effect state and the vertical position of the elevating / reversing effect device 770 and the elevating plate member 740 fluctuates, the posture of the gear cam member 734 changes in conjunction with the change. The drive motor 731 can be rotated in a direction in which the attitude of the gear cam member 734 is appropriately corrected (to be in an intermediate effect state) based on the determination result. Thus, the arrangement of the elevation reversal effect device 770 can be appropriately maintained.

  Note that, when it is determined that the detected portion 735 has deviated from the detection sensor 713 due to an unintended load from the state in which the detected portion 735 of the gear cam member 734 is disposed on the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state, In the embodiment, although it is not possible to determine in which direction the detected portion 735 has deviated, control is performed such that the drive motor 731 is driven in a direction in which the effect device 780 is displaced downward. This can prevent a situation in which the second operation unit 700 and the third operation unit 800 collide with each other.

  In the present embodiment, when the detected portion 735 enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state again by this driving, the displacement of the detected portion 735 due to an unintended load causes the effect device 780 to be displaced upward. It can be seen that this has occurred on the side to be driven, and if the drive is stopped at that point, the effect caused by the unintended load can be offset.

  In addition, if the detected portion 735 enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the effect standby state without entering the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state by this driving, the detected portion 735 due to an unintended load is generated. Is found to have occurred on the side that lowers the effect device 780, and when the detected part 735 enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state by continuing to drive to effect the upward displacement again. By stopping the driving, it is possible to offset the influence caused by the unintended load.

  Note that the detected portion 735 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 does not have a structural purpose as described in the extended portion 634b, and therefore a plate having a width appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 713 is used. It is formed as a shape. Thereby, the resolution for detecting the attitude of the gear cam member 734 can be increased.

  The detection sensor 778d is a detection device for detecting the posture of the upside down member 781 of the second operation unit 700, and the arc-shaped projecting portion 781d can enter the detection groove. There are two detection devices for the second operation unit 700 to detect the posture of the vertically inverted member 781 (see FIG. 56), and the vertically inverted member 781 is in an upright vertical state and an inverted vertically arranged state, respectively. And corresponding to.

  The second operation unit 700 is disposed as a pair of left and right in an upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59A) and an inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59C) of the upside down member 781. Are placed in a united state in which the covering members 787 close to each other.

  For example, when only a single detection sensor 778d (a detection device that reverses the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781) is used, the posture shift of the upside down rotation member 781 from the upright vertical arrangement state is reduced. Since the determination can be made, it is possible to control the driving of the drive motor 782 so as to maintain the united state of the covering member 787 based on the determination result. On the other hand, since it is not possible to determine the posture shift of the upside down member 781 from the inverted vertical arrangement state, the union state of the covering member 787 in the inverted vertical arrangement state may be changed due to unintended load or poor control. Even in the case of a change, the change in the state cannot be determined by the detection sensor 778d, and the state in which the united state has been released is continued, which is not preferable in production.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 778d corresponding to the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781 and the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781 is provided. Therefore, regardless of the upright or inverted vertical arrangement state, the detection sensor 778d can determine that a state change from the union state has occurred, and based on the determination result, the union state can be determined. By controlling the drive of the drive motor 782 to the return side, the covering member 787 can be returned to the combined state. Thereby, the effect of the second operation unit 700 can be improved.

  Note that the arc-shaped protruding portion 781d that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d does not have a structural purpose as described in the extended portion 634b, and therefore has an appropriate width for the detection width of the detection sensor 778d. Is formed as a plate-shaped portion. Thereby, the resolution for detecting the attitude of the upside down member 781 can be increased.

  The detection sensor 813 of the third operation unit 800 is a detection device for detecting the attitude of the outer rotation member 840 of the third operation unit 800, and the detection target 844 can enter the detection groove (FIG. 60). reference). The third operation unit 800 has one detecting device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840, and this single detecting device stops the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 itself and the rotation of the outer rotating member 840. The rotation (switching rotation operation) of the inner rotating member 830 in the state of being performed is used (also used).

  Note that the detected portion 844 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 does not have a structural purpose as described in the extended portion 634b, and therefore a plate having a width appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 813 is used. It is formed as a shape. Thus, the resolution for detecting the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 can be increased.

  The detection sensor 813 is provided for the purpose of detecting the attitude of the outer rotating member 840, and has a small number of one. Therefore, the detection sensor 813 is insufficient to determine the deviation of the decorative members 870 and 880 from the combined state. For example, even if a displacement occurs such that the united state is released when the outer rotation member 840 is maintained in a posture in which the detection target portion 844 is not disposed on the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor 813 determines the displacement. Can not.

  Therefore, rather than performing control to determine the deviation from the united state and then return to the united state, the direction in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are returned to the united state at fixed time intervals (individual united state (FIG. 66 (a) )), The drive motor rotates in the direction of rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise in a front view, and in the union state (see FIG. 103 (b)) in the direction of rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise in a front view). It is considered that control for driving the 861 to rotate for a predetermined time (for example, a short time) is preferable.

  With this control, even when the union state of the decorative members 870 and 880 is unexpectedly released, the decorative members 870 and 880 can be returned to the union state by driving the drive motor 861 at a fixed time interval. Since it is possible, it is possible to prevent the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 from being maintained for a long time while being released.

  As a second transverse explanation, the operation of the magnets Mg and Mg2 will be described. As described above, in the second operation unit 700, the magnet Mg functions to maintain the posture of the covering member 787, and in the third operation unit 800, the magnet Mg2 functions to maintain the united state of the decorative members 870, 880. As described above, similar techniques are employed, but the design philosophy of the directions of the loads generated by the magnets Mg and Mg2 is different from each other.

  The second operation unit 700 is designed such that the directions of the magnetic forces generated between the magnets Mg and the metal screws disposed on the left and right sides are aligned in the front-rear direction at both left and right positions. In other words, it is designed such that the line of action of the magnetic force is parallel to a plane orthogonal to the metal rod 785a as the rotation axis of the rotation operation of the covering member 787.

  In this case, the degree (magnitude) of the magnetic force generated as the resistance of the slide displacement in which the covering member 787 approaches and separates from each other can be reduced as compared with the case where the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is generated in the axial direction of the metal bar 785a. Thus, the operating resistance of the covering member 787 at the start of the operation can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the third operation unit 800, the direction of the line of action of the magnetic force generated between the magnet Mg2 disposed on the decoration member 880 and the metal screw Nj2 is the five rotation axes of the rotation operation of the decoration member 880. It is designed to be arranged on a plane parallel to a plane on which the metal rod 832 is arranged (a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the inner rotation member 830).

  In this case, the degree to which the decoration members 870 and 880 are loaded in the rotational operation direction by the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 can be reduced, so that it is easy to avoid a malfunction in which the decorative members 870 and 880 wobble in the rotational operation direction due to the magnetic force. be able to.

  As a third cross-sectional description, a description will be given of a display on a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 and an effect of visually recognizing the operation units 600, 700, and 800 integrally.

  In the first operation unit 600, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is disposed so as to overlap with the right end RE1 of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 29). Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the overhang decorative portion 652b is arranged near the region right end RE1 of the display region of the third symbol display device 81, the display region and the overhang decorative portion 652b are united. Can be easily recognized as a display effect.

  In the second operation unit 700, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 is disposed so as to have the same height between the inner lower edge of the center frame 86 and the lower edge of the opening 511a (FIGS. 26 and 52). reference). Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 is arranged near the lower edge of the display region of the third symbol display device 81, the display region and the first sub-decoration surface 787a2 are combined. It is possible to make it easy to visually recognize as a united display effect.

  In the third operation unit 800, each of the first covering portions 875 that can be visually recognized by the player in the individual united state has a different decoration, and in the extended state, the third covering unit 875 surrounds the perimeter in a front view. The display area of the symbol display device 81 is arranged. Therefore, for example, in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in a range close to the first covering section 875, a display corresponding to the position where the first covering section 875 is arranged is performed, so that the display area and the first The covering portion 875 can be easily recognized as a group of display effects.

  Further, if the third operation unit 800 is driven and controlled to rotate integrally, a roulette-like operation effect in which each first covering portion 875 rotates can be executed. By moving the display so as to run in parallel with the first covering portion 875 in the range close to the first covering portion 875 in the display region of the symbol display device 81, the display region and the first covering portion 875 are moved together. It is possible to make it easy to visually recognize as a united display effect.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the internal shapes of the flow path components 334 to 336 are fixed has been described. However, in the distribution device 2300 of the second embodiment, the first flow path components 2334 having a variable internal shape. Is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  When describing the first flow path component 2334 as an alternative to the first flow path component 334 in the first embodiment, the configuration disposed on the right side is illustrated and described, but is disposed on the left side. The configuration can also be the first flow path configuration section 2334. Further, the left and right sides may be configured differently so that only one of the left and right sides is the first flow path forming section 2334 and the other is the first flow path forming section 334.

  FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 2300 in the second embodiment along a line corresponding to the XVI-XVI line in FIG. As shown in FIG. 108, the first flow path component 2334 of the distribution device 2300 includes a through hole 2410 formed in the front-rear direction below the curved protrusion 334 b, and slides back and forth along the through hole 2410. It includes a slide member 2420 guided to be displaceable, and a solenoid 2430 disposed inside the rear frame-shaped portion 332 so as to generate a driving force for slidingly displacing the slide member 2420.

  In FIG. 108, the front side arrangement FP of the slide member 2420 in a state where the solenoid 2430 is not excited is illustrated by a solid line. When the solenoid 2430 is energized, the slide member 2420 is slid to the rear position RP by the driving force of the solenoid 2430.

  In the present embodiment, in the front arrangement FP of the slide member 2420, the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 is the bottom surface of the fixed flow path and projects inward (upper side) from the bottom surface 2334c where the ball can roll, and the rear side In the arrangement RP, the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 is configured not to protrude (submerge) inside (upper side) of the bottom surface 2334c.

  That is, in the front arrangement FP of the slide member 2420, the ball contacts the upper surface of the slide member 2420, and in the rear arrangement RP of the slide member 2420, the slide member 2420 does not contact the ball.

  The upper side surface of the slide member 2420 is formed as a plane parallel to the bottom surface 2334c. Therefore, even if the slide displacement of the slide member 2420 occurs while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334c, the influence on the flow-down state of the ball can be suppressed.

  The falling direction of the sphere rolling on the bottom surface 2334c is a diagonally forward and downward direction, and the sliding displacement direction of the sliding member 2420 is the front-back direction. Therefore, the sliding displacement direction of the sliding member 2420 follows the flowing direction of the sphere. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 2420 affects the strength of the rotation of the ball.

  Since the sphere rolls forward with the bottom surface 2334c, rotation in a direction in which the sphere rolls forward in the traveling direction (forward) occurs. When the solenoid 2430 is energized from the non-excited state (see FIG. 108) to slide the slide member 2420 from the front arrangement FP to the rear arrangement RP, the upper surface of the slide member 2420 is rolled. A rearward load (frictional force) is generated on the lower end of the moving ball. Therefore, the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction is accelerated, the degree of rotation of the ball can be increased, and the rolling speed of the ball can be increased.

  On the other hand, when the solenoid 2430 is changed from the energized state to the non-excited state (see FIG. 108), and the slide member 2420 is slid from the rear arrangement RP to the front arrangement FP, the bottom surface 2334b A load (frictional force) is generated in the forward direction via the upper surface of the slide member 2420 with respect to the lower end of the ball rolling. Therefore, the rotation of the ball in the forward rotation direction is reduced, the degree of rotation of the ball can be reduced, and the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced.

  Further, since the upper and lower positions of the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 in the front side arrangement FP are higher than the upper and lower positions of the bottom surface 2334b, in addition to the frictional force from the slide member 2420, the load in the direction of pushing the ball upward. Occurs. Therefore, the vertical speed of the ball rolling downward can be reduced, and the falling speed of the ball can be reduced.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, by performing the control of causing the slide displacement of the slide member 2420 when the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334b, the flow of the ball flowing down the inside of the distribution device 2300 is performed. The speed can be variable. Thus, the time from when the ball passes through the ball passage hole 163b to when it reaches the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 74) can be controlled to be variable.

  In the present embodiment, since the slide member 2420 is disposed behind the second flow path component 335, it is difficult for the player to grasp the state where the ball is being affected by the slide member 2420. be able to.

  In other words, the ball is brought into contact with the slide member 2420 at a stage before the ball is introduced into the second flow path forming portion 335, which is easy for the player to visually recognize and attract attention, so that rotation is added to the ball. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the state of being displaced or displaced in the vertical direction. Thereby, a sense of incongruity given to the player who visually recognizes the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, when the slide member 2420 is displaced when the sphere is disposed above the bottom surface 2334c, a contact load is applied, while before and after the slide member 2420 is displaced (at the time of stop), the contact load is applied. No contact load is applied to the ball passing through the slide member 2420.

  Therefore, the ball arranged above the bottom surface 2334c during the operation of the slide member 2420 and the ball arranged above the bottom surface 2334c during the stop of the slide member 2420 flow down (rotation, change in rotation, flow down speed). , Flow velocity change, etc.).

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side has been described. However, in the distribution device 3300 of the third embodiment, the position of the probability change detection sensor SE11 is the normal detection sensor. By being moved to the rear side of SE12, the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As a modification example of the arrangement of the positive change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, a description will be given on the right side of the left and right center, but the configuration on the left side of the left and right can be arbitrarily designed. For example, on the left side, the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side similarly to the first embodiment, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged on the left and right sides of the distribution device 3300. May be configured to be different from each other, and also on the left side, as will be described in detail below, may be arranged side by side so that the positive detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged on the left and right of the distribution device 3300. May be configured to be symmetric.

  FIGS. 109 (a) and 109 (b) are cross-sectional views of the distribution device 3300 according to the third embodiment along a line corresponding to the line XVII-XVII in FIG. FIG. 109 (a) shows a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) is de-energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the front position. In FIG. 109 (b), the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized. The state where the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear side position is illustrated.

  Further, in FIGS. 109 (a) and 109 (b), the guide route of the sphere after flowing through the third flow path component 336 is illustrated by imaginary lines. Thus, the guide path of the ball is changed by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (a) and FIG. 109 (b), the rear frame 3332 which partitions the ball guide path to the positive change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 is provided in the middle member 3330 of the distribution device 3300. Is configured to be open from the left side so as to receive a ball.

  The slide displacement member 3370 is configured to be slidable between a front position and a rear position. The rear position of the slide displacement member 3370 (see FIG. 109 (b)) is at the right end of the front side surface 376a of the upper protruding portion 376 and the rear frame portion 3332 as a path entrance for guiding the ball to the positive change detection sensor SE11. Is set as a position where the rear side inner surface of the open portion 3332g formed on the left and right is aligned on the left and right (or the right end of the front side surface 376a is disposed slightly forward).

  By setting the position of the slide displacement member 3370 in this manner, if the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the front position, the sphere that has passed through the third flow path component 336 is placed on the front side surface 376a of the slide displacement member 3370. If the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear side position while the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the rear side position while flowing to the right while abutting, the ball that has passed through the third flow path component 336 is It can be configured to flow to the right while abutting on the front side surface 376a and pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  That is, both the downflow path of the sphere passing through the normal detection sensor SE12 and the downflow path of the sphere passing through the positive change detection sensor SE11 flow to the right after passing through the third flow path component 336. It consists of. The only difference is the front and rear position flowing to the right.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the ball has flowed to the positive change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 from the viewpoint of the player who views the third flow path component 336 from the front side.

  The slide displacement member 3370 includes a pair of rod-shaped guide portions 3371c extending in a rod shape from the front end of the thin plate portion 371 to the front side, an upper front projecting portion 3376b formed integrally with the upper projecting portion 376, And an upper horizontal projecting portion 3376c formed integrally with the upper projecting portion 376.

  The rod-shaped guide portion 3371c has an upper surface flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, and is formed as a pair of left and right holes on the left and right sides of the center of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336. And is configured to be able to be housed on the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path component 336.

  That is, when the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the front position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is disposed behind the lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336, so that the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c does not contact the ball, and the slide displacement member 3370 Is disposed at the rear side position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is disposed over the front-rear gap between the front side surface of the discharge hole 337 and the ball guide portion 371b.

  By configuring the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c in this way, the lower left and right portions of the ball can be supported by the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c when the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the rear position, and the ball can be displaced by sliding. Bridges can be made to member 3370.

  Accordingly, when the slide displacement member 3370 is disposed at the rear position, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the ball flows down toward the normal detection sensor SE12. That is, erroneous guidance of the falling ball can be easily avoided by the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c.

  In addition, the arrangement of the sphere passing through the third flow path component 336 is such that the sphere is placed on the upper surface of the rod-shaped guide 3371c formed flush with the upper surface of the sphere guide 371b. 371b can be prevented from colliding head-on in the front-rear direction. That is, the ball-shaped guide portion 3371c causes the ball to collide with the ball guide portion 371b head-on, causing the ball to flow backward, or the ball being pinched between the front side surface of the ball guide portion 371b and the front side surface of the discharge hole 337. This can make it easier to avoid a situation in which the operation becomes defective.

  The upper front protruding portion 3376b has the same shape as the front-rear long protruding portion 317 (see FIG. 18) described in the first embodiment, and is the same as the relative position at the front position of the slide displacement member 370 of the first embodiment. Are formed integrally with the upper protruding portion 376 in the positional relationship described above.

  The upper horizontal protruding portion 3376c has the same shape as the left and right inner protruding portions 318 (see FIG. 18) described in the first embodiment, and is the same as the relative position at the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 of the first embodiment. Are formed integrally with the upper front protruding portion 3376b.

  Accordingly, the action of the upper front protruding portion 3376b and the upper horizontal protruding portion 3376c on the abutted ball is an action on the ball flowing down near the upper protruding portion 376 regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370. Occurs.

  In other words, unlike the case where the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear side position, unlike the case where the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear position, unlike the case where the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged fixedly like the front and rear long projecting portion 317 or the left and right inner projecting portion 318 (see FIG. 18). The action of the portions 3376b and 3376c for urging the ball reaching the front position of the upper protruding portion 376 toward the normal detection sensor SE12 can be eliminated.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side has been described, but in the distribution device 4300 of the fourth embodiment, the position of the normal detection sensor SE12 is By being moved to the rear side of SE11, the positive detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 110 (a) and 110 (b) schematically show a configuration on the downstream side of the third channel configuration unit 336 in the fourth embodiment, a third variation detection sensor SE11, and normal detection. It is a schematic top view of sensor SE12 and slide displacement member 4370.

  FIG. 111A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component 336, the positive change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 along the line CXIa-CXIa in FIG. 110B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component 336, the positive change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 along line CXIb-CXIb in FIG. In FIG. 111B, the illustration of the upper contact portion 4373 is omitted for easy understanding.

  The slide displacement member 4370 is configured to block one of the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 so that the ball cannot pass, and open the other to allow the ball to pass. The front slide member 4371 that slides left and right and the rear slide member 4375 that slides right and left above the normal detection sensor SE12 are provided.

  The front slide member 4371 and the rear slide member 4375 slide and displace in opposite directions to each other by the driving force of the solenoid. That is, when the state changes from the front open state shown in FIGS. 110 (a) and 111 (a) to the rear open state shown in FIGS. 110 (b) and 111 (b), the front slide member 4371 moves leftward. , And the rear slide member 4375 is configured to slide to the right.

  The front slide member 4371 includes a slide plate 4372 disposed so as to cover over the probability change detection sensor SE11, and an upper contact portion 4373 formed in a shape similar to the shape of the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 17). , And are integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373 are integrally slid and displaced.

  The upper side surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372 is flush with the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336, and is formed as an inclined plane having the same inclination in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 111 (b)). Therefore, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111B), a ball rolling on the upper side surface 4372a can flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12 due to the inclination of the upper side surface 4372a. On the other hand, in the front open state (see FIG. 111A), the sphere that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a contacts the upper contact portion 4373, receives a load, and flows downward (to the lower right).

  Therefore, when the front slide member 4371 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, the front slide member 4371 comes into contact with the ball at a different location, and the state changes so as to guide (flow) the ball in different directions. Is done.

  The rear slide member 4375 has a slide plate 4376 arranged so as to cover the normal detection sensor SE12 and an upper contact portion 4377 formed in a shape similar to the shape of the front and rear long projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 17). And are integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 slide and displace integrally.

  The upper side surface 4376a of the slide plate 4376 is an inclined plane formed in a shape opposite to the upper side surface 4372a in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 111A). Therefore, in the front open state (see FIG. 111A), the ball disposed on the upper side surface 4376a can flow toward the positive change detection sensor SE11 due to the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a. On the other hand, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111 (b)), the sphere that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a and the upper side surface 6372a comes into contact with the upper contact portion 4377 and receives a load, thereby flowing downward.

  Therefore, when the rear side slide member 4375 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, the rear side slide member 4375 comes into contact with the ball at a different location, and the state changes so as to guide (flow) the ball in different directions. Be composed.

  With this configuration, the ball that has passed rearward above the probability change detection sensor SE11 may return to above the probability change detection sensor SE11 and pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11. The attention power to the sphere that has passed through the flow path configuration portion 336 can be improved.

  As a mode of returning to above the probability change detection sensor SE11 again, for example, it is assumed that the solenoid is driven so that the state changes from the rear open state to the front open state at the timing when the ball passes backward on the upper side surface 4372a. You. In this case, the ball normally rides on the upper side surface 4376a before passing through the detection sensor SE12, flows backward along the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a, and returns to the positive change detection sensor SE11 side.

  As described above, when the timing at which the ball passes through the third flow path forming portion 336 matches the drive timing of the slide displacement member 4370, the ball can return to the positive change detection sensor SE11. Therefore, as compared with a gaming machine configured so that a ball that has passed over the certainty detection sensor SE11 on the downstream side does not pass through the certainty detection sensor SE11, the ball after passing through the third flow path forming part 336 is compared with a gaming machine configured so as not to pass through the certainty detection sensor SE11. The attention to the driving timing of the ball and the slide displacement member 4370 can be improved.

  Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the spherical flow path is common up to the third flow path component 336 and the branch point BP1 is arranged behind the third flow path component 336 has been described. In the sorting device 5300 in the form, the slide displacement member 5370 is disposed on the upstream side of the third flow path component 336, and the flow path of the sphere changes on the upstream side of the third flow path component 336. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the distribution device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment along a line corresponding to the line XVII-XVII in FIG. FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which the slide displacement member 5370 is disposed at the right position and the ball is guided to the positive change detection sensor SE11 by the slide displacement member 5370. In FIG. 112 (b), the slide displacement member 5370 is The state in which the ball is guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the slide displacement member 5370 is shown in the left side position.

  Also, in FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b), the guide route of the sphere after flowing through the first flow path forming part 334 is illustrated by imaginary lines. Thus, the guide path of the ball is changed by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 5370.

  The slide displacement member 5370 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown), and is provided so as to protrude upward from an upper surface of the thin plate portion 5371 which forms a rolling surface of the ball. And an upper protruding portion 5376.

  The thin plate portion 5371 is formed so thin that a ball that has passed through the first flow path forming portion 334 can ride on. Since the left side surface 5376a facing the sphere of the upper protruding portion 5376 is formed in an arc shape having a concave channel side, the flowing sphere can flow smoothly backward.

  According to the present embodiment, as in the distribution device 5300, the front and rear width of the flow path of the ball is formed longer, and the visibility of the ball flowing on the near side is higher than that of the ball flowing on the rear side. While adopting the configuration, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 5370 is on the near side where the visibility of the ball is high, so that it is possible to make it easier for the player to determine the flow-down state (flow-down path) of the ball.

  In the present embodiment, when the slide displacement member 5370 is disposed at the right position, the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is not particularly closed, and has a structure in which a ball can enter. On the other hand, the sphere flowing down the upstream side of the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 flows toward the front side while flowing down the first flow path component 334.

  Therefore, immediately after passing through the first flow path forming portion 334, a velocity in the reverse direction hardly occurs, so that a ball does not easily enter the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11. Therefore, in the present embodiment, provision of a member for closing the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is omitted, and the member cost is reduced.

  Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right flow paths are separated by the partition plate portion 338 and the flow paths do not merge has been described. However, in the distribution device 6300 of the sixth embodiment, the right third flow path configuration section A junction channel 6341 extending to the right from the downstream side of the left curved projection 334b is connected to 336. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 6300 in the sixth embodiment along a line corresponding to the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. As shown in FIG. 113, the flow path on the right side of the distribution device 6300 is formed from flow path components 334 to 336 as in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, the flow path on the left side of the distribution device 6300 is formed by a merged flow path 6341 that extends linearly to the right from a space with a space for one ball on the front side of the curved projection 334b. The passage 6341 is connected to the third passage component 336 as the right passage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the spheres flowing down the right flow path and the spheres flowing down the left flow path merge at the connection point JP1 where the flow paths are connected, so that the spheres may collide with each other.

  The junction channel 6341 includes a raised floor 6342 at the lower end of the channel. The raised floor portion 6342 is formed as a floor surface at a position higher than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336. This makes it possible to make a difference in the height position between the sphere flowing into the connection point JP1 from the merging flow path 6341 and the sphere flowing down the right flow path and flowing down the third flow path component 336. It is possible to reduce the degree of backflow generated at the time of collision between them.

  The flow of the sphere can be delayed by the contact between the spheres at the connection point JP1 as compared with the case where the sphere does not contact with each other. This makes it possible to change the time required for the ball passing through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 16) to reach the branch point BP1, depending on whether the balls contact each other or not.

  Since the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is set by a constant operation from the opening timing of the opening / closing plate 65b regardless of the ball entering mode, the slide displacement member is changed by changing the timing at which the ball reaches the branch point BP1. There is a possibility that the ball can reach the branch point BP1 when the positions 370 are different.

  The premise of the contact between the spheres is that the spheres merge, and that there are spheres flowing down the merge channel 6341. When the player wants to make contact between the balls, the player only has to adjust the firing intensity so that the balls enter the pair of left and right ball passage holes 163b (see FIG. 74) and play the balls. If it is desired to avoid the contact, the game may be adjusted by adjusting the firing intensity so that the ball enters only the ball passing hole 163b on one side (right side).

  According to the present embodiment, the adjustment of the launching strength of the sphere is related to the presence or absence of contact of the sphere at the connection point JP1, and is related to the state of the slide displacement member 370 at the timing when the sphere reaches the branch point BP1. , Which directly affects the interests of the player. Therefore, the player's willingness to adjust the firing strength of the ball can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the contact at the connection point JP1 is closely related to the formation of the open ball. That is, the two balls contacting at the connection point JP1 can be caused to flow down to the branch point BP1 in a state of being arranged close to each other.

  Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow-down path to the branch point BP1 is only the flow path constituted by the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 has been described. However, in the distribution device 7300 of the seventh embodiment, the flow path is the first flow path. The sphere is configured to be able to flow down to the branch point BP1 without passing through the flow path forming section 334 and the second flow path forming section 335. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 114 is a front perspective view of the distribution device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 7300 along the line CXV-CXV in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the sorting device 7300 has a ball formed at a substantially central position on the left and right as well as the ball passing hole 163b as a path through which the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a can pass. A passage hole 7163b is provided.

  The ball passing hole 7163b is the same as the detection sensor SE1 that is used to detect a ball entering the variable winning device 65 and to detect the timing of changing the state of the opening / closing plate 65b to the closed state based on the determination of the specified number of balls. Is formed as a sphere passage opening of the detection sensor SE71 having the function of.

  On the downstream side of the ball passage hole 7163b, a tubular channel 7164 extending in a rectangular tubular cross section in a direction inclined downward toward the rear is provided. The cylindrical flow path 7164 is formed large enough to allow a sphere to flow down inside, and its end portion extends to the upper front side of the branch point BP1. That is, the sphere that has passed through the sphere passage hole 7163b flows down the inside of the cylindrical flow path 7164, and is configured to be able to reach the branch point BP1.

  The length of time required for the sphere to pass through the cylindrical flow path 7164 is set to be shorter than the length of time required for the sphere to pass through the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336, and the first flow path constituent part It is set to be equal to the length of time required for the ball to pass through 334.

  Therefore, for example, when the distribution device 7300 is drive-controlled in the above-described operation pattern Y (see FIG. 25), as described above, the distribution device 7300 passes through the ball passage hole 163b and passes through the flow path components 334 to 336. The ball that moves can reach the branch point BP1 only after the slide displacement member 370 has returned to the front position, whereas the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 7163b and has flowed down the cylindrical flow path 7164 is the slide displacement member 370. May reach the branch point BP1 while the is located at the rear position.

  In particular, the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 7163b immediately after the opening / closing plate 65b has changed to the open state easily reaches the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position.

  That is, even if the drive control pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is the same, whether the ball having entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the ball passage hole 163b or the ball passage hole 7163b, the probability change detection is performed. It can be configured such that whether or not a sphere passes through the sensor SE11 changes. This makes it possible to improve the player's attention to the downward flow of the ball inside the specific winning opening 65a.

  As shown in FIG. 114, when viewed in a general direction during a game, the tubular channel 7164 reduces the visibility of the branch point BP1, the slide displacement member 370, and the channel components 334 to 336. The arrangement of the cylindrical flow path 7164 is devised so as to avoid it.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, while maintaining the visibility of the branch point BP1 high, the number of flow paths through which the ball is guided to the branch point BP1 is increased, so that the ball reaches the branch point BP1. The type of time required can be increased, and the player's attention to the specific winning opening 65a can be improved.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 of the first operation unit 600 connects the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b at one place, and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connection position to displace the axis O1. Has been described, but in the first operation unit 8600 of the eighth embodiment, the guide long holes 8616 are connected at a plurality of places (two places), and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connection position and the displacement direction is changed. The displacement direction of O1 is switched. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 116 is a schematic front view schematically showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 8616 and the rotating member 620 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the guide slot 8616 is bent right and left twice below the linear portion 616a.

  That is, the guide slot 8616 includes a linear portion 616a, a first curved portion 8616b connected to the lower end of the linear portion 616a and formed on a curve (substantially arc shape), and a first curved portion thereof. The first curved portion 8616b is connected to a lower end portion of the second curved portion 8616b, and includes a second curved portion 8616c formed on a curved line (substantially circular arc shape) in which the center of the radius of curvature is reversed left and right.

  In the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, when the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the first curved portion 8616b, the axis O1 Since the displacement direction is switched, the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (dropped).

  In addition, when the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end position of the first curved portion 8616b, that is, at the connecting portion between the first curved portion 8616b and the second curved portion 8616c, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched. Therefore, the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (dropped).

  As described above, the intermediate position at which the axis O1 can be easily stopped can be configured at a plurality of positions. Therefore, the axis O1 is stopped halfway, and the second decorative rotating member 660 (see FIG. 43) stopped halfway is stopped. The types (variations) of postures can be increased.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the guide slot 616 of the first operation unit 600 is constituted by a single path has been described. However, in the first operation unit 9600 of the ninth embodiment, the guide slot 9616 is formed by a straight line. It has a first path composed of the shape part 616a and the curved part 616b, and a second path connected to the right side of the first path. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 117 is a schematic front view schematically showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 9616 and the rotating member 620 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117, the guide long hole 9616 has a straight portion 616a and a curved portion 616b similarly to the guide long hole 616 of the first embodiment, and also includes a straight portion 616a and a curved portion 616b. An angle maintaining portion 9616c that extends inclining rightward from the connection portion, and a connecting portion 9616d that extends from the right end of the angle maintaining portion 9616c toward the curved portion 616b and is connected to a middle position of the curved portion 616b. .

  The angle maintaining portion 9616c is used when the rotation member 620 is turned to the tilting side from the state where the axis O1 is arranged at the connecting portion between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b (see FIGS. 43 and 44). When it is assumed that the axis O1 is displaced while the angle θ is maintained, it is formed in the same direction as the displacement trajectory of the axis O1.

  As described above, the angle θ is maintained while the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining unit 9616c, so that the posture of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 in the rotation direction is such that the third production surface 661c faces the front. The facing posture (see FIG. 43) is maintained.

  In other words, when the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining portion 9616c when the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced, the box-shaped member 661 that rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction. As a rotation mode, the posture in which the third production surface 661c faces the front can be maintained over the formation length (formation angle width) of the angle maintaining portion 9616c.

  When the axis O1 of the connecting portion 9616d is displaced, a change in the angle θ due to the rotation of the rotating member 620 is allowed, so that the box-shaped member 661 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620. .

  On the other hand, even when the tilt angle of the rotating member 620 is the same, the magnitude of the angle θ when the axis O1 is disposed on the curved portion 616b and the angle when the axis O1 is disposed on the connecting portion 9616d is different from the magnitude of θ, so that the path along which the axis O <b> 1 is displaced differs between the left and right, so that the middle position of the box-shaped member 661 interlocked with the rotation of the rotation member 620 can be changed.

  Also, regardless of whether the axis O1 is displaced on the left or right, the angle θ when the axis O1 is disposed at the upper end of the displaceable range and the angle θ when the axis O1 is disposed at the lower end are of one type. The posture of the box-shaped member 661 when O1 is arranged at the upper end or the lower end of the displaceable range can be maintained (see FIGS. 40 and 45).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 related to the arrangement of the axis O1 in a state where the axis O1 is arranged between the ends of the displaceable range (middle position) (see FIG. 43 and FIG. 44), the displacement speed of the supported member 640 related to the displacement speed of the axis O1, and the rotation speed of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be generated in a plurality of types. it can.

  The guide slot 9616 is formed of only a plurality of paths, and does not include a mechanism for limiting a path along which the axis O1 can be displaced. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of operation failure due to the failure of the mechanism that restricts the path, and to reduce the product cost by simplifying the configuration.

  On the other hand, the branch of the displacement path of the axis O1 can be controlled in the direction of the load applied to the axis O1 via the rotating member 620. Hereinafter, this will be described. First, a case where the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced in the tilting direction will be described.

  First, when the axis O1 is displaced along the left path (the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b), the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is used so that the turning displacement of the turning member 620 does not stop halfway. Drive control.

  In this case, the axis O1 enters the curved portion 616b by the inertia of displacement along the direction (vertical direction) in which the linear portion 616a extends, and is displaced as it is to the lower end position of the guide slot 9616.

  Second, when the axis O1 is displaced along the right path (the angle maintaining portion 9616c and the connecting portion 9616d), the rotating member 620 is provided at the stage where the axis O1 is disposed at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. The drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is drive-controlled so as to stop or decelerate halfway, and then the drive motor 631 is drive-controlled again in the same direction.

  In this case, the inertia of the displacement along the direction in which the linear portion 616a extends (vertical direction) is reduced. Therefore, whether the axis O1 displaces the path on the left side or the path on the right side has little displacement resistance. The side is chosen.

  Here, when the axis O1 enters the angle maintaining portion 9616c, since the magnitude of the angle θ is maintained, the intermediate gear 644 (see FIG. 44) that meshes with the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 is used. Also, there is no need to transmit the driving force to the members downstream of the transmission of the driving force. That is, since the displacement resistance is smaller by that amount, the axis O1 can enter the angle maintaining portion 9616b side.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the drive control of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction, control is performed such that the path along which the axis O1 is displaced is selected depending on whether the drive motor 631 is stopped or not stopped in the middle. be able to.

  In the displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the axis O1 receives a load directed obliquely to the upper right from the rotating member 620. The axis O1 can be displaced upward along the curved portion 616b.

  In the present embodiment, the connecting portion between the connecting portion 9616d and the curved portion 616b is set at an intermediate position of the curved portion 616b, so that the right side surface of the curved portion 616b is located at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b. It is formed as an upper left inclined surface arranged on the upper right side of the arranged axis O1.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being upwardly displaced (bounced back) along a circle centered on the circular through hole 624 in a state where the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball once flows down to the near side by the distribution device 300 and then flows down backward has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time required for the ball to flow down may be secured by forming a plurality of path bends or forming a deceleration convex portion for decelerating the ball without forming a part that flows down to the near side.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 has a curved surface shape is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Any shape can be used as long as the shape can be used. For example, it may be configured in an inclined plane shape, or may be formed so as to protrude a large number of fine projections from the plane, so that an irregular load can be applied to the colliding sphere.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows down the distribution device 300 and flows down the flow path components 334 to 336 in sequence has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. Not something. For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed at the left and right central portions of the specific winning opening 65a, and a ball may be formed so as to be able to flow directly into the third flow path component 336 through this opening.

  For example, when the balls enter the ball one by one, the ball does not pass through the opening, but when a plurality of balls collectively enter the specific winning opening 65a, the ball can pass through the opening. Is also good. In this case, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the opening or not.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning opening 65a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged immediately below the downstream end of the second flow path forming part 335. Further, in this case, the order of the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 335 may be reversed. That is, when entering the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, a branch to each of the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after the flow in the left-right direction, or immediately after the flow in the front-rear direction (flow toward the front side). May branch to each of the detection sensors SE11 and SE12.

  In the first embodiment, the flow direction and the inclination of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 have been described as features of the distribution device 300 alone, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed on an island, the direction of the flow path and the inclination may be designed in consideration of the daily “kick”.

  The term “lay” means that the pachinko machine 10 is not installed in a vertical posture, but installed in a state of being inclined in the front-rear direction. Normally, the pachinko machine is installed in a posture (nekase) that has fallen backward by about one degree (fifty-fourths). In consideration of the installation angle of about 1 degree in comparison with the above description of the distributing device 300 alone (in a state where there is no skein), the first flow path forming portion 334 and the second flow path having the front-back inclination are considered. The meaning of the inclination of the component 336 changes.

  That is, in the distributing apparatus 300 alone, as described above, the first flow path forming part 334 is inclined downward by 7 degrees from the horizontal to the front side, and the third flow path forming part 336 is lowered by 5 degrees from the horizontal to the rear side. Although it is designed to be inclined, when the installation angle is also examined, both the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 similarly form a flow path which is lowered and tilted by 6 degrees. . On the other hand, since the second flow path component 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, it is hardly affected by the installation angle, and can be regarded as having an inclination of about 5 degrees as described above.

  In this case, regarding the flow of the sphere in the distribution device 300, the acceleration of the sphere in the first flow path component 334 and the sphere in the third flow path component 336 is the same, and the acceleration is slightly increased in the second flow path component 335. Become smaller. Therefore, the falling speed of the ball in the left-right direction can be reduced, and the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 can be easily recognized by the player. In addition, since the first flow path component 334 is shorter than the third flow path component 336, the first flow path component 334 is shorter than the third flow path component 336. Can be passed between.

  As described above, the flow of the ball inside the distribution device 300 is affected by the slapping of the pachinko machine 10 due to the presence of the flow path in the front-rear direction. Therefore, when the inclination angle of each of the flow path components 334 and 336 is smaller than the angle of the skewing (about 1 degree), the flow direction of the sphere in the flow path components 334 and 336 changes depending on the quality of the skewing (angle setting). Therefore, it is necessary to set the inclination angle to be larger than the angle of the skewing.

  Further, the flow of the sphere inside the distribution device 300 has a flow path in the front-rear direction, and in a configuration in which the flow path is visible, a slight difference in the flow velocity of the sphere flowing down the flow path causes There is a possibility that the degree of slack of the pachinko machine 10 may be grasped. If one wishes to grasp the degree of skein, a configuration may be adopted in which the flow path of the distribution device 300 is easily visible.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, the fixed member 161 and the front design member around the front side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 so as not to grasp the degree of “skew” from a slight difference in the flow speed of the ball. 162 is arranged so as to surround it, the variable winning device 65 is arranged so as to cover it on the upper side, and the light diffusion processing surface 340 is configured to lower visibility on the lower side.

  In this way, the visibility of the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is made worse, except for the normal player's eyes (a range of 0 ° to about 30 ° in front view). Thereby, it is possible to avoid comprehending the degree of the “pause” of the pachinko machine 10 by comparing the flow speeds of the balls flowing down the respective flow path components 334 to 336.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the inclination of the first flow path component 334 is greater than the inclination of the third flow path component 336 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the relationship of the inclination may be reversed, or the inclination may be similar.

  In addition, each of the flow path components 334 to 336 has been described as forming a spiral flow path by bending a straight flow path, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a meandering channel shape or a channel shape bent stepwise may be used.

  In addition, the flow path is configured so that the flow path is bent at a right angle at the connection point of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may be bent at an acute angle or an obtuse angle at the connection point. Further, a clune may be used as each of the flow path components 334 to 336.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path component 336 is designed to be 0.3 seconds is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be designed so that the time required to pass through the third flow path component 336 is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). Thereby, even if the ball enters the distribution device 300 while maintaining the firing interval (0.6 seconds), the upstream ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 is moved downstream of the ball. In this case, the third flow path component 336 can function as a blind for a ball flowing down.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the flow time of the sphere is secured by securing the path length of the flow path components 334 to 336 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, protruding ridges are formed from both inner walls of the path to the slide displacement member 370 in a direction intersecting with the flow-down direction of the game ball, and are provided alternately so as to collide with the game ball. Thus, the ball may be decelerated. As a result, it is possible to secure the time required for the ball to flow down without increasing the length of the path.

  The deceleration ridges may be arranged uniformly over the entire range of the path to the slide displacement member 370, or may be unevenly arranged. For example, the first flow path forming section 334 and the second flow path forming section 335 are not formed with a ridge, and the ridge is formed only in the third flow path forming section 336, so that the third flow path forming section 336 is formed. Up to this point, the sphere can be made to arrive quickly, while the sphere flows down the third flow path component 336 slowly.

  Also, the projecting direction of the ridge may be a direction in which the ridges are alternately projected from the left and right along the flow path of the ball toward the inside of the path, or may be projected upward from the lower side at a predetermined interval. It may be in such a direction.

  In the case of projecting from the left and right, the load applied to the ball from the ridge has a component in the left and right direction. Therefore, it is preferable to consider the arrangement so that the ball is not erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by this load. For example, at the position closest to the slide displacement member 370, by projecting inward from the left and right outer wall portions to the left and right inner sides, the load from the ridge goes to the partition plate portion 338 side without going to the normal detection sensor SE12 side. By doing so, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

  In the case of projecting from the lower side to the upper side, since the ridge itself may function as a blind of the slide displacement member 370, it is preferable to design the formation height and the formation position in consideration of the line of sight of the player. .

  In addition, the protrusion may be formed to be movable. In this case, the falling of the ball may be dammed in the outgoing state, and the falling of the ball may be restarted in the case of the sunken state.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball is blinded by the ball flowing down on the front side of the slide displacement member 370 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable makeup member may be arranged in front of the distribution device 300, and the makeup member may blind the flow path components 334 to 336. This decorative member may be driven or may operate with the weight of a sphere.

  Further, when the ball is blindfolded, it is not limited to the case where the ball is arranged on the near side. For example, when a mirror is provided on the back side of the slide displacement member 370 and the state of the slide displacement member 370 is visually recognized using the reflection of the mirror, a ball is placed between the slide displacement member 370 and the mirror. Then, a blindfold function can be generated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the ball reaching the slide displacement member 370 is blindfolded has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning opening 64 may be disposed behind the game area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning opening 64 may be blindfolded, or the other general winning openings 63 may be blindfolded. It may be something.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case has been described where the flow path components 334 to 336 are formed of linear flow paths that can guide balls one by one. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a meandering flow path, may be formed as a flow path in which a plurality of branches occur, or may have a large or small flow path width so that spheres can easily stay there. It may be configured.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the effect of the blindfold is produced by the ball heading to the slide displacement member 370 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge path for discharging the balls that have entered the other winning ports 63, 64, 65, and 140 is disposed on the front side of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, disposed so as to intersect on the near side), and The slide displacement member 370 may be blindfolded by a discharge path and a ball arranged in the discharge path.

  In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described where the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a flows exclusively through the first flow path component 334 to the second flow path component 335 side (front side). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism for distributing the balls is disposed downstream of the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution mechanism sorts the balls flowing to the second flow path component 335 side, so that some of the balls are sorted out. The sphere may be made to flow to the second flow path component 335 side.

  The distributing mechanism may be one that is displaced by its own weight of the ball, may be driven by a driving device so as to perform a constant operation from opening and closing of the opening and closing plate 65b, or may be driven in a fixed pattern when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. Control may be performed as follows.

  In the case of drive control, for example, when the type of entering ball changes, control may be performed so that the ball flows to the second flow path forming portion 335 side. For example, in a case where a ball (excessive winning) exceeding the counted number (10 / round) is found in a ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, the ball is configured to flow to the second flow path forming unit 335 side. May be. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 side can be compared with the number of payouts of the extra prize balls, so that the player can grasp the additional profit obtained at an early stage. In this case, the configuration of the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream may be maintained or may be omitted.

  Also, for example, in a configuration in which a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 flows down the distribution device 300, if the number of special symbols 1 to be held is four (full), then if there is an incoming ball, The sphere may be configured to flow to the second flow path forming section 335 side. In this case, by visually recognizing the ball flowing on the side of the second flow path forming portion 335, the player can be made aware that the reserved number of the special symbol 1 is full. In this case, the configuration of the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream may be maintained or may be omitted.

  When the ball is displaced by its own weight, the predetermined operation may be repeated each time the ball arrives, or a different operation may be performed depending on the number of balls that arrive. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, it does not flow to the second flow path forming portion 335 side, and when two or more balls collectively enter the specific winning opening 65a. The sphere may flow to the second flow path component 335 side. Alternatively, the reverse may be used.

  In addition, these operation modes may be the same downstream of the pair of detection sensors SE1 disposed on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, or may be different from each other.

  Here, if the ball flows from the specific winning opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370 for a long time, there is a possibility that the game is prolonged due to the long ball discharging time. Therefore, for example, by using the above-described distribution mechanism, up to the number of balls that have entered the specific winning opening 65a are caused to flow down to the second flow path forming unit 335 side, and the subsequent balls are set to the second You may comprise so that it may discharge | emit without passing through the flow-path formation part 335. This eliminates the need to wait for the ball of the counted number to flow down the flow path components 334 to 336, so that the length between rounds can be set short.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the sorting device 300 is arranged below the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is caused to flow toward the near side near the lower end of the game area, but is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, the specific winning opening 65a is disposed above the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the flow path components 334 to 336 of the distribution device 300 are arranged close to the third symbol display device 81 or in front view. You may comprise so that it may be arrange | positioned at the near side of a display area.

  In this case, the line of sight for viewing the sphere flowing down the distribution device 300 can be the line of sight facing the display area side of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, by associating the magnitude of the profit obtained by the player by the flow of the ball with the distribution device 300 with the content of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player can confirm the display to determine whether the profit is large or small. It can be easily grasped whether or not it has been acquired.

  Further, the case where the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 is visually recognized at a position shifted downward in front view with reference to the ball rolling on the third flow path forming portion 336 has been described, but this is not necessarily required. It is not limited. For example, the ball that rolls on the inner rail 61 is configured so that the ball that rolls on the third flow path forming part 336 does not displace vertically in front view and can be visually recognized in an overlapping manner. Is also good. In this case, not only the ball that has entered the distribution device 300 but also the ball that rolls on the inner rail 61 can function as a blindfold for the ball that flows down the third flow path component 336.

  In the first embodiment, as the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370, the case where the slide displacement member 370 is switched to the front position at a time when the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a cannot reach has been described. It is not limited to. For example, control may be performed such that the slide displacement member 370 is switched to the front position after 1.2 seconds have elapsed from the opening timing of the opening / closing plate 65b.

  In this case, the forward flow ball that has reached the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds has elapsed can be made to enter the through hole of the positive change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that flows following the preceding ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds elapses enters the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

  Here, when the trailing ball has a positional relationship functioning as a blindfold for the leading ball, the player sets the timing at which the flow of the leading ball switches (downward) to the probability change detection sensor SE11 to the trailing ball. Being hidden makes it invisible. In addition, since the trailing ball normally enters the detection sensor SE12, the player may assume that the ball has not entered the probability change detection sensor SE11.

  In this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the ball has not entered the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, so that the display effects of the time saving state and the probability change state are made similar to maintain the player's expectation. In a simple gaming machine, the effect of the display effect can be improved.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball that has collided with the left and right inner protruding portions 318 does not flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12 only with the load due to the collision has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path on the upstream side of the left and right inner protruding portions 318 is configured so that the velocity and rotation of the ball until being guided by the left and right inner protruding portions 318 can be configured in a plurality of types (for example, a crow And increasing the width of the path to increase the degree of freedom of the ball in the downflow direction). Depending on the speed and rotation of the ball, only the load caused by the collision with the left and right inner protruding portions 318 can be used. It may be configured to be guided by the normal detection sensor SE12.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the slide displacement member 370 and each of the projecting portions 317 to 319 are formed as a separate body has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may be formed integrally with the slide displacement member 370. That is, at least one of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may project from the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370.

  In the first embodiment described above, the operation pattern Y considering the possibility of being hidden by a sphere was described as the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control for causing the LED of the light emitting means 351 to emit light at a timing hidden by a sphere may be interwoven.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed by the shape of the guide slot 616 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by forming the outer phase of the gap by changing the width of the guide slot 616, or the displacement resistance may be changed by utilizing the magnetic force or the urging force of the coil spring.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the shape of the guide elongated hole 616 is configured to be bent at an intermediate position, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be bent a plurality of times. In this case, a plurality of positions where the resistance of the vertical displacement of the axis O1 in the vertical direction increases can be formed.

  Further, the shape of the guide slot 616 may be designed for the purpose of changing the magnitude of the change amount of the angle θ during the rotation of the rotating member 620. For example, the guide slot 616 may be formed in a shape that can guide the supported member 640 so that a range in which the magnitude of the angle θ can be maintained during the rotation of the rotating member 620 can be partially formed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the guide slot 616 is fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of guide slots 616 in which the axis O1 can move are formed, and the axis O1 is moved by a predetermined switching unit (for example, another driving device or a button-type switching device that switches by contacting the rotating member 620). The guide slot 616 to be guided may be configured to be switchable, or the guide slot 616 may be configured to be changeable in shape.

  In the first embodiment, the configuration in which the first effect surface 661a is directed obliquely to the front left in a state where the second decorative rotating member 660 is disposed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but is not limited thereto. Not something. For example, the rendering surface may be directed obliquely forward and rightward in a state where it is arranged on the left side of the third symbol display device 81, or may be arranged below (upper side) the third symbol display device 81. The effect surface may be configured to face obliquely upward (downward) to the front.

  In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is configured to be arranged on the base end side of the displacement. However, the present invention is not limited to this. good. On the other hand, the use of the rotating member 620 instead of the direct-moving member suitably functions to ensure the rotation angles of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

  For example, when the member that slides horizontally is fixed to the driven side of the supported member 640, the angle that affects the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b is an angle above horizontal (such as the angle a1). Is limited to On the other hand, if the rotating member 620 is used, not only the angle above the horizontal but also the angle below (such as the angle b1) can be used. Regardless of this preferred effect, a member that slides linearly may be connected to the driven side of the supported member 640.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the second decoration rotating member 660 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped and the decoration is applied to three side surfaces that intersect at right angles has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotating member 660 may be formed in a pentagonal cross section, and may be configured to be stop-controllable in a posture in which each side faces the front side.

  In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, it is possible to easily switch the display easily integrated with the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the rotation member 620 and the second decoration rotation member 660 can intersect at a right angle has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 may be configured with a component in the front-back direction as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the second operation unit 700 is configured to be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state from the setting of the urging force of the coil spring CS2 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet is provided in the vicinity of the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and this magnet generates an attraction force between the magnet and the magnet provided at the right front plate member 710. May easily occur in the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700.

  Further, for example, the inclined portions 751 and 762 may be formed not in a straight line but in a bent shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape. Also, when the coil spring CS2 is used, the biasing force is not limited to being generated only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, but may be configured to generate the biasing force against the extension displacement of the coil spring CS2.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the attitude of the shaft rotating member 785 is maintained by elastically deforming the beveled tooth portion 783c and the beveled tooth member 785c until the attraction force of the magnet Mg is exceeded has been described. It is not limited to. For example, instead of the elastic deformation of the gear, an allowable value may be provided for sliding friction between a rotating shaft and a support cylinder supporting the shaft.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the covering member 787 rises from below and enters the front side from the rear end of the game area, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mode in which it projects to the front side by a downward displacement may be used. In this case, a mode in which the upper edge of the center frame 86 is extended from below to the front, or a mode in which the center frame 86 projects forward from above the game area (for example, above the front frame 14) may be used.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the rotation of the covering member 787 is in the opposite direction and the sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are not visually recognized in a uniform manner to reduce the discriminating power has been described. is not. For example, instead of rotating the sub-decoration surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 toward the front side, the embodiment may be configured to rotate while facing the left and right outer sides. In addition, even in the case of rotation in the same direction, the rotation angle may be shifted to rotate.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the shaft rotation member 785 and the rotation member are commonly used in the second operation unit 700 and the third operation unit 800 by using the rotation angle of the link mechanism (the intermediate arm member 783 and the intermediate arm member 850). The 834 is configured to be rotated (reversed), but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug in a single stroke in a metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834, and a protrusion protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotating member depends on the design of the groove. 834 rotation timing can be defined.

  In the above-described first embodiment, a case will be described in which the detection sensor 813 is controlled to determine that the switching from the switching rotation operation to the integral rotation operation has been performed by switching the output of the detection sensor 813 from the state where the detection target portion 844 is disposed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after reversing the drive direction of the drive motor 861 in a state where the detection unit 844 is not disposed on the detection sensor 813, it is detected that the detection unit 844 has entered the detection sensor 813. It may be determined that the operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the configuration of the first decoration member 870 and the configuration of the second decoration member 880 are different from each other has been described. However, the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the magnet Mg2 may be provided on both the decorative members 870 and 880, or the decorative members 870 and 880 may be plated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by disposing the torque limiter 866 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that generates viscous resistance may be provided. In addition, in the case of the oil damper, since the resistance is always generated regardless of the switching of the operation mode, the torque limiter can reduce the displacement resistance in the rotation direction after the operation mode is switched to the integral rotation operation. It is easy to realize high-speed rotation after switching to integral rotation operation.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plating unit 871a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light may be reflected by the metal rod 832. During the integral rotation operation, the linear member 833 is disposed on the proximal end side (the inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear member 833. When the metal rod 833 is disposed on the distal end side (the outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, the light LD1 can be reflected by exposing the base end side (the inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832. It is.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the lower bottom surface of the third flow path component 336 is inclined downward and left inward has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the first flow path forming portion 334 may be configured so as to be non-slant (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left-right direction, or to be slanted down left and right. May be. The former can reduce the momentum of the ball to the second flow path component 335 as compared to the latter.

  In addition, for example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the second flow path forming portion 335 may be configured not to be inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the front-rear direction, or may be inclined downward toward the rear. May be configured. The former can reduce the momentum of the ball to the third flow path component 336 as compared with the latter.

  Further, the case where the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow path component 336 is inclined downward in the left-right direction is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow path forming portion 336 may be configured to be non-slant (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left-right direction. In this case, the degree to which the ball is urged toward the partition plate portion 338 decreases, so that the degree of damage to the partition plate portion 338 due to collision or friction with the ball can be kept low.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the optical axis of the outer light emitting unit 351d is arranged outside the trajectory of the sphere passing through the branch point has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the outer light emitting unit 351d may be configured so that the optical axis passes through the inside of the trajectory of the sphere passing through the branch point (the arrangement position is lowered). In this case, when the outer light emitting unit 351d is turned on, the sphere passing through the branch point overlaps with the optical axis of the outer light emitting unit 351d, so that the light can be reflected to the back side. The state (dark state) that does not reach the light diffusion processing surface 333b can be obtained.

  In other words, while the lighting of the outer light emitting means 351d is continued, the flow-down state of the sphere at the branch point and the light diffusion processing surface 333b (and the light diffusion processing surface illuminated by receiving the light diffused from the light diffusion processing surface 333b) 314c, 340). Since each of the light diffusion processing surfaces 314c, 333b, and 340 has a larger area (projected area) in the player's eyes than the sphere, the player can easily understand the flow-down state of the sphere at the branch point. .

  In the first embodiment, the timing of controlling the lighting of the light emitting unit 351 has been described during the big hit game, but the timing is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light emission control may be performed based on detection of winning in the winning openings 63, 64, 140, or the like, or light emission control may be performed based on an input operation of the frame button 22. Alternatively, the light emission may be performed due to occurrence of a prize exceeding a predetermined number (a number of prizes defining the end of the round game of the jackpot game, the maximum number of times of change based on the entry of the prize holes 64 and 140). You may make it control.

  In the first embodiment, when the operation of the slide displacement member 370 is defective, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 is confirmed because the assembly position of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is defective. Thus, a case has been described where the quality of the assembly of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 can be determined at the manufacturing stage. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

  For example, a detection sensor for detecting the position of the slide displacement member 370 may be provided to detect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 during operation. In this case, although not appearing in the manufacturing stage, when the positional relationship between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is shifted due to repeated operation or some external force, the occurrence of the shift is determined by the operation of the slide displacement member 370. It can be determined based on the defect.

  In the first embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 that switches the flow direction of the ball at the branch point BP1 is the linear motion displacement in the front-rear direction, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rotation operation (for example, a roulette type) may be performed, or a shape portion (for example, a funnel-shaped crune) that makes the flow of the ball irregular may be provided so that the ball can flow in a plurality of directions. good.

  In the first embodiment, the distribution device 300 is employed as a device for switching whether the ball passes through one of the positive change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, but is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, it may be employed as a device for guiding a ball to a starting winning opening (winning holes 64 and 140), a device for guiding a ball to a specific winning opening 65a, or other winning openings. Alternatively, it may be adopted as a device for guiding a ball to a winning area.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the distribution device 300 is disposed at the lower corner of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distribution device 300 may be arranged at the upper corner (for example, above the center frame 86) of the game area, or at the left and right corners (outer left and right than the left and right edges of the center frame 86). It may be arranged on the center side of the game area. For example, in the case of being arranged at the upper corner of the game area, the line of sight of the player who looks at the distribution device 300 is inclined obliquely upward with respect to the horizontal plane. The downstream sphere may be configured to hide the upstream sphere.

  Further, the structure of the flow path components 334 to 336 may be configured to be inclined in the front-rear direction, and the certainty detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be provided near the fixed member 161.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the window 162d is designed based on the shapes of the flow path components 335 and 336 and the arrangement of the seal member 313 when viewed from the front is described, but is not necessarily limited to this. is not. For example, a shape that allows the slide displacement member 370 (only) to be visually recognized from the player's eyes (obliquely viewed downward) may be used, or a shape that reduces the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 may be used. Further, the shape may be such that one of the front side position and the rear side position of the slide displacement member 370 is visible and the other side is invisible.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the number of spheres entering one flow path can be reduced by disposing the flow path constituent parts 334 to 336 in a pair of right and left so as not to join (dispersing the entering spheres). This allows the slide displacement member 370 to switch any of the paths of the spheres that have passed through the respective flow paths, while producing an action that can easily avoid clogging of the spheres.

  In this regard, the shape of the window 162d is such that only one of the pair of left and right configurations (for example, the ball guide 371b and the upper protruding portion 376) of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized and the other cannot be visually recognized. Shape may be sufficient. In this case, it is possible to make the player predict the flow path of the ball on the side where the player cannot visually recognize the ball, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the first embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from the state where the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b is defined as the backward direction (the forward direction of the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336). Although the description has been given of the case where the rotation of the ball in the forward rotation direction is suppressed by sliding, the amount of rotation in the state immediately before the ball falls is suppressed, and the player can be seen as if the ball is temporarily stopped, but it is not necessarily described. However, it is not limited to this.

  For example, the direction in which the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the state in which the ball can ride on the ball guide 371b may be the forward direction (the direction opposite to the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336).

  In other words, the ball guide 371b is displaced in the forward direction so that the ball guide 371b enters the lower side of the third flow path component 336, so that the positive change detection sensor SE11 can be opened. The upper projecting portion 376 is formed separately from the ball guide portion 371b, and is arranged so as to project toward the branch point BP1 when the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b. When the ball guide 371b is displaced so that the ball does not ride on the ball guide 371b, the upper protruding portion 376 is displaced in the front-rear direction at the same timing as the displacement of the ball guide 371b, and the certainty detection sensor SE11 What is necessary is just to secure the passage of the ball to.

  In this case, the rotation of the ball in the forward rotation direction can be accelerated by sliding the ball at the time of sliding displacement of the ball guide portion 371b. Can be shown to the player as if it had immediately dropped (falled smoothly).

  In the first embodiment, in the control of the rotating member 620, the extension 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 in consideration of the inertial load applied to the rotating member 620 after the drive motor 631 is turned off. Although the control mode in which the energization of the drive motor 631 is cut off in response to this, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the detection sensor KS1 detects that the extension 634b is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, the drive power of the drive motor 631 is reduced, and the drive motor 631 is rotated slightly weaker and then stopped. Is also good. Thereby, the rotating member 620 can reliably reach the displacement end position (the position in the effect standby state).

  In the first embodiment, the case where the grooves of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762 are constituted by straight inclined grooves in the second operation unit 700 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, by forming a groove having a partial curve so as to be curved forward at the lower end side, the displacement of the rendering device 780 is adjusted by vertical slide displacement, longitudinal slide displacement, and longitudinal posture displacement. It can be a displacement mode.

  Various shapes are exemplified as the shapes of the grooves of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762. For example, the shape may be a U-shape (or an inverted U-shape) as viewed in the left-right direction, or may be a shape curved into an S-shape.

  In the first embodiment, in the reversing operation of the second operation unit 700, the members (for example, the main body member 771 and the covering member 787, and the driving motor 782 and the covering member 787), the case of displacing so as to avoid the collision has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

  For example, a design method for avoiding collision between members by setting the number of gears between the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 may be used.

  In the first embodiment described above, in the second operation unit 700, a case is described in which the rotation tip of the rotation arm member 720 is disposed at the left and right positions that match the left and right centers of the rendering device 780 in the extended state as the upper end position. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotating tip of the rotating arm member 720 is disposed closer to the right than the left and right center of the rendering device 780, so that the metal bar 702 supporting the left side of the lifting plate member 740 and the right side of the lifting plate member 740 are supported. It is possible to secure a long support position interval with the rotating arm member 720. Thereby, the lifting plate member 740 can be stably supported.

  In the third operation unit 800, the bulging portion 824a is configured as a portion that is invariant in shape and visually recognized by a player regardless of whether the decorative members 870 and 880 are in the individual united state or the union united state. In the union state, the bulging portion 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion 885 are connected to each other by making the bulging portion 824a partly (central portion) visible to the player. Although the case where the design is made so as to suppress the discomfort has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

  For example, a display device (segment display device or liquid crystal display device) may be provided in a positional relationship where the display portion is provided in front of the bulging portion 824a. In this case, unlike the case where the visibility of the bulging portion 824a is changed by a change in the irradiation mode (brightness or darkness or color) of the light from the inner light emitting portion 823a, the target visually recognized by the bulging portion 824a is displayed on the display unit. Can be changed by switching, so that the degree of freedom of production can be improved.

  Also, for example, the design of one of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is changed so that the shape of the covering portions 875 and 885 is extended toward the center of the circular shape in the united state. The extended portion may be configured to cover the bulging portion 824a. In this case, in any one of the individual united state or the union state, the bulging portion 824a can be hidden so that the player does not visually recognize the bulging portion 824a, the bulging portion 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion. The degree of restriction on the degree of freedom of design of the portion 885 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are attracted by the magnetic force in the third operation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the united state may be maintained by the load due to the uneven engagement, or the united state may be maintained by the urging force of the spring member.

  In the first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is realized by setting the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 of the third operation unit 800 to be smaller than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866, but is not necessarily limited to this. Not something. For example, by adopting an operation mode that gives momentum, the switching rotation operation can be realized even when the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 is equal to or more than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866.

  As an operation mode that gives momentum, for example, the rotation may be controlled in the reverse direction as a preparatory operation (preliminary operation). In this case, a reaction can be applied to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880, and a load can be generated in a direction in which the intermediate arm member 850 is released radially outward from the combined state. Thereby, it is possible to easily release the suction by the magnetic force.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the decoration members 870 and 880 are configured so that radial displacement occurs before the reversing operation has been described as a device for suppressing the wobble at the time of the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the magnet Mg2 is arranged so that the line of action of the magnetic force can be drawn on the plane on which the metal rod 832 as the rotation axis of the reversing operation is arranged, the diameter of the decorative members 870, 880 from the combined state is set. Even if the reversing operation occurs before the directional displacement, the magnetic force generated between the plurality of (five) decorative members 870 and 880 is generated on the same plane, so that the wobble generated in the third operation unit 800 during the switching rotation operation is suppressed. can do.

  In the first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is configured such that the decorative members 870 and 880 perform the 180-degree inversion operation, but are not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to unite again by a 120-degree inversion operation. In this case, before and after the switching operation, the decorative members 870 and 880 have the same visible side in front view, and the viewing angles of the covering portions 875 and 885 are different (for example, before the operation, the rightward direction is 60 degrees). (After the operation, leftward 60 degrees).

  Further, regarding the structure of the plurality of intermediate arm members 850, for example, by configuring the length to be non-common, or by forming the formation range and the shape of the beveled tooth portion 854 c to be non-common, 180 degrees in the switching rotation operation. The decorative members 870 and 880 that reconfigure the united state by the reversal operation of degrees and the decorative members 870 and 880 that reconfigure the united state by the reversal operation of 120 degrees may coexist. For example, of the five decorative members 870, 880, one decorative member 870, 880 is configured to be inverted by 120 degrees in the switching rotation operation, and the other (four) decoration members 870, 880 are switched in the switching rotation operation. It may be configured to be inverted by 180 degrees.

  Note that the angle of the inversion operation in the switching rotation operation can be arbitrarily set. The angle may be set to 180 degrees or 120 degrees as described above, 0 degrees, 360 degrees, or any angle from 0 degrees to 360 degrees.

  In the first embodiment described above, the case where the torque limiters 866 are arranged in a pair of right and left asymmetrical positions above the rotation axis of the outer rotation member 840 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, both of the pair of torque limiters 866 may be disposed on the left side, right side, or lower side of the outer rotating member 840, or may be arranged at symmetrical positions. You may make it arrange | position on the opposite side (directly opposite side) across the axis | shaft.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the case where a plurality of (five in the first embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 are configured in a common shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by changing the shapes of the supported holes 854a and the guide holes 854b in which the linear motion members 833 that slide and displace along the metal rods 832 are arranged, the start timing of the slide displacement along the metal rods 832 can be adjusted. 833 may be different from each other.

  For example, by changing the design so that the supported hole 854a is formed as a long hole or a hole having a large diameter and mixing the intermediate arm member 850 whose design of the shape of the guide hole 854b is correspondingly changed, the linear movement in the switching rotation operation is performed. A difference can be provided in the displacement start timing of the member 833.

  Thus, the decoration members 870 and 880 have a difference in the displacement timing from the united state of the decoration members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 connected to the linear motion member 833 to the radially outward position. Therefore, the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 can be separated in the shear direction (radial direction).

  In this case, the load for removing the suction can be reduced, so that the driving force required for the drive motor 862 can be reduced and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be stabilized.

  In addition, it is not necessary to cause the displacement mode in which the displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) occurs in the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 every time. For example, it is configured such that the displacement mode that causes the displacement in the shear direction occurs when the switching rotation operation is performed from the united state (outbound path), but does not occur when the switching rotation operation reaches the united state (return path). May be.

  For example, the design of the intermediate arm member 850 is changed from a united state (a state where the rotating tip is disposed on the rotation shaft side of the inner rotating member 830) to a state where the decorative members 870 and 880 are disposed at the outermost diameter position. The manner in which the intermediate arm member 850 is rotated is different from the manner in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter positions, and the intermediate arm portion i850 is rotated into a united state. With this configuration, it is possible to selectively generate a displacement mode in which a displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) is caused in the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2.

  In the first embodiment, the number of the detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, and 813 has been described for each of the operation units 600, 700, and 800. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of one detection sensor KS1, a plurality of detection sensors KS1 may be arranged at positions where the extension 634b can be detected, and instead of three detection sensors 713, two detection sensors KS1 may be used. The following or four or more detection sensors 713 may be employed. In addition, as an arrangement of the detection sensor KS1, a position where the extension portion 634b of the first operation unit 600 in the intermediate effect state or the overhang state can be detected is exemplified.

  Further, for example, only one of the two detection sensors 778d may be employed, and a plurality of detection sensors 813 instead of one detection sensor 813 are arranged at positions where the detection target 844 can be detected. You may comprise so that it may be. As the arrangement of the detection sensors 813, for example, by arranging five detection sensors 813 at equal intervals on the circumference, five arrangements (rotational) of the first decoration member 870 in the individual united state of the third operation unit 800 are provided. (5 modes differing in direction).

  In the second embodiment described above, the case where the rolling of the ball is continued irrespective of the arrangement of the slide member 2420 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distance between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 in the front side arrangement FP and the lower surface of the upper surface portion 314 of the upper member 310 may be configured to be equal to the diameter of the sphere. In this case, when the slide member 2420 is in the front-side arrangement FP, the ball can be sandwiched between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 and the lower surface of the upper surface portion 314, so that the deceleration action of the ball is enhanced. In addition, stagnation of the ball can be easily caused.

  In the above-described second embodiment, the description that the protrusion is formed inside the first flow path component 2334 is not described, but the protrusion that decelerates the ball is provided in the first flow path component 2334. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the arranging height of the ridge is brought into contact with one of a ball that rides on the slide member 2420 at the front position FP and a ball that the slide member 2420 rides on the bottom surface 2334c at the time of the rear arrangement BP. Alternatively, the height may be set so as not to contact the other. In this case, the deceleration action by the ridge can be generated when the slide member 2420 is in the front arrangement FP or the rear arrangement BP.

  In the third embodiment, the slide displacement member 3370 has been described in the case where the thin plate portion 371 and the upper front protruding portion 3376b and the upper horizontal protruding portion 3376c are integrally formed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, a state in which the upper front protruding portion 3376b and the upper horizontal protruding portion 3376c as separate members protrude and retract in the vertical direction in accordance with the timing at which the thin plate portion 371 is disposed at the front side position and the rear side position, and contact the ball. And a non-contact state.

  Note that the front and rear arrangement of the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 is not limited at all. However, as in the present embodiment, when the probability change detection sensor SE11 is provided on the rear side, an error Winning can be easily avoided.

  In the fourth embodiment, the case where the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373 and the slide plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 are integrally formed has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be configured as separate members, and may be configured to perform a synchronous operation (interlock) at the same time. In addition, you may comprise so that it may slide in the front-back direction.

  In the fourth embodiment, the case has been described in which when the slide members 4371 and 4375 slide and displace at the timing when the ball has passed rearward on the upper side surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372, the ball is returned to the front side due to the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional ball detection sensor may be provided behind the slide plate 4372 in the front open state.

  In this case, when the state is changed from the rear open state to the front open state, only the ball on the slide plate 4372 can be guided to the additional incoming ball detection sensor. The profit obtained by the player when the ball enters the additional ball detection sensor (for example, a plurality of jackpots may be acquired or ranked higher than the right obtained by entering the probability change detection sensor SE11). Of the ball that has passed through the third flow path component 336 can be improved as the right of the transition to the probable change state is obtained.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment, the case has been described where the flow path from the raised floor portion 6342 at the downstream end of the merged flow path 6341 is configured as a flow path extending in the left-right direction. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, it may be configured as a curved flow path in which the connection point JP1 side is directed rearward near the raised floor portion 6342. Thereby, both the ball that enters the connection point JP1 from the raised floor portion 6342 and the ball that enters the connection point JP1 from the second flow path component 335 can have a backward velocity component. The collision can prevent the backflow from occurring.

  Note that the connection point JP1 may be configured to be arranged at the left and right center positions of the distribution device 6300. Further, the structure of the flow path components 334 to 336 may be configured to be inclined in the front-rear direction, and the certainty detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be provided near the fixed member 161. In this case, it is possible to easily cause a situation where the spheres flow toward the front side after gathering at the connection point JP1, and it is possible to improve the attention to the spheres flowing inside the distribution device 6300.

  In the ninth embodiment, the guide slot 9616 is configured as a slot having a branch, and where the axis O1 passes through the guide slot 9616 is switched depending on how the load is applied to the axis O1. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, the shape of the guide slot 9616 may be switched. That is, in the guide long hole 9616, only the linear portion 616a is always configured as a long hole, and the curved portion 616b, the angle maintaining portion 9616c, and the connecting portion 9616d are configured as a long hole. And the case where the slot is closed may be alternately switched. In this case, since the axis O1 can be prevented from being displaced along an incorrect path, the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented from being displaced in an unintended manner.

  For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a guide valve 9616 having a branch is provided with a switching valve that restricts the displacement path of the axis O1 by closing any path. In this case, since the displacement path of the axis O1 can be limited by the switching valve while the shape of the guide slot 9616 is fixed, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced along an erroneous path. It is possible to prevent the member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 from being displaced in an unintended manner.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Points where a sphere passing through the route construction means becomes a blindfold for the passed means>
A path configuration means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path configuration means to pass therethrough, wherein the path configuration means, when viewed in a predetermined direction, Displaceable means that can be arranged at a position on the upstream side of the passed means and in front of the first game ball flowing down the route forming means and at least partially overlapping the first game ball. Gaming machine A1.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a large winning part 300 that can configure a plurality of types of flow paths of a game ball toward the ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is hardly recognized by the decorative plate 302. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the ball detecting hole 431 is not always easily recognized by the decorative plate 302, it is confirmed that the ball has entered the ball detecting hole 431 to continue or stop the launch of the game ball. It was not possible to cope with the game mode of performing, and the player might feel dissatisfied. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in a portion related to the launch operation of the game ball.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the means for lowering the visibility of the first gaming ball in the route forming means is the predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to configure a state in which the first gaming ball is easily visible. Is done. Therefore, in a state in which the first game ball is easily visible, it is easy to determine whether to continue or stop the operation of launching the game ball by confirming the downward flow of the first game ball. Improvements can be made in relevant areas.

  It should be noted that the mode of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited at all. For example, another game ball may be used, or a decoration member configured to be displaceable between a flow path of the game ball and the glass unit may be used.

  It should be noted that the mode of the passed means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, an entrance (for example, a starting port) related to a lottery of a symbol, a prize ball that is related to a payout of a prize ball, or a game ball that can pass through. Means may be used.

  The gaming machine A2, wherein the displaceable means is a second gaming ball flowing down the upstream side of the first gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the visibility of the first gaming ball can be changed by using the gaming ball guided toward the passed-through means, so that the displaceable means is provided. As compared with the case where other decorative members are prepared, material costs and design costs can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A2, the path forming means includes a front-rear path formed with a front-rear width in which a second gaming ball can be arranged in front of the first gaming ball. .

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A2, the front-rear path is configured so that the second gaming ball can be arranged on the front side of the first gaming ball. Can cover at least a part of the first game ball.

  In the gaming machine A3, when the first game ball and the second game ball flow down the route forming means at a firing interval set in a firing device, the front-rear direction route is the second game ball. A gaming machine A4, wherein a gaming ball is configured to hide at least a portion of the first gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, when a plurality of gaming balls flow down the route forming means with the firing interval kept, it is difficult to recognize the first gaming ball by the second gaming ball. Can be achieved. As a result, a situation that is difficult to recognize can be generated from normal times.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the front-rear path is such that the front-side component is located closer to the center of the game area than the rear-side component.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the front-rear direction path can be configured as a path having an inclination along the line of sight of the player looking at the passed-through means. Is easily hidden by the second game ball. That is, the effect of blindfold can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A5, the front-side component is disposed on a line of sight of a player who looks at the passed-through means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A5, a similar blindfold effect is produced irrespective of the length of the interval between the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball arranged in the front-rear direction path. be able to.

  That is, normally, it is considered that the closer the first game ball and the second game ball are, the more the blindfold effect can be improved. However, the first game ball and the second game ball appear on the line of sight. When the game balls are arranged, the effect of the length of the interval can be eliminated.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the path forming unit includes a front-rear path formed with a front-rear width that allows a second game ball to be disposed in front of the first game ball, and a front-rear direction thereof. A gaming machine A7 comprising: a left-right path formed with a left-right width that allows a game ball to flow in a left-right direction on an upstream side of the path.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the line of sight of the player can be blocked by the game ball flowing down the left-right direction path. On the other hand, the blinding effect can be produced not only in the case where the passing-through means is visually recognized with a line of sight that does not shift left and right, but also in the case of a line of sight with a horizontal shift. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner of entering the passed-through means regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (it is possible to produce a blindfold effect in all directions).

  This effect is remarkably produced by sealing the left and right sides of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction with the walls. In other words, in a configuration in which the left and right sides are sealed by the wall, the wall is blindfolded on the left and right sides, so that it is easy to configure a state in which the field of view to the passing-through means cannot pass.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the path forming means includes a first flow path in which a game ball passes through the passed means in a first mode, and a second flow path in which a game ball passes in a second mode. And the first game ball can be visually recognized by being covered at least in part by the predetermined displaceable means, regardless of which of the flow paths of the path constituting means flows down. A gaming machine A8 characterized by being configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the flow-down state of the game ball flowing down the route forming means regardless of the presence or absence of the passed means. In addition, it is possible to improve the attention of the game ball flowing down the route forming means.

  Note that the first mode and the second mode are not limited at all. For example, the flow direction of the ball may be different, or the detection sensor through which the ball passes may be different.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, a branching means for dividing a flowing direction of a game ball on an upstream side of the passed means is provided, and the branching means is provided with a switching means for switching a flowing direction of the received game ball, The game machine A9, wherein the path forming means is a game ball whose flow-down path is divided by the branching means, and wherein the game ball reaching the switching means flows down the same path in a predetermined section.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, since the gaming ball that has reached the switching means flows down the same path in the predetermined section, the gaming ball that has reached the switching means immediately It is possible to make it more difficult to grasp the downflow of the game ball as compared with the case where the downflow mode corresponds to the downflow path. Thereby, the player's attention to the game ball can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A9, the route forming means includes a projecting portion projecting from a flowing game ball, and the projecting portion acts on a branch of the game ball in the branching means. Machine A10.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A9, the projecting portion can act on the branch of the game ball. Can be improved in durability.

  In the gaming machine A10, the projecting portion includes a first projecting portion extending in a predetermined direction, and a second projecting portion extending in a direction different from the first projecting portion. A gaming machine A11 characterized in that the projecting amount of the second projecting portion is different from the projecting amount of the second projecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A10, the effect of the first projecting portion on the game ball and the effect of the second projecting portion on the game ball in accordance with the flow-down mode of the game ball. Can be different. Thereby, while utilizing the fixed first projecting portion and the second projecting portion, an action of branching the game ball according to a predetermined rule according to the flow-down mode of the game ball can be generated.

<Points where the sphere passing through the route construction means appeals to the passing means>
A route configuration unit configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a passed unit configured to allow a game ball flowing down the route configuration unit to pass therethrough, wherein the route configuration unit is more than the passed unit. A gaming machine B1 comprising a predetermined portion constituting an upstream side, wherein the predetermined portion is arranged on a side more conspicuous than the passed means, and is configured to be able to guide a game ball to the passed means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a large winning prize part 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a game ball toward the ball detection hole 431 is provided, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is hardly recognized by the decorative plate 302. Depending on the difference in the state of the winning parts 300, there are gaming machines in which a game ball flows down from a position deviating from the decorative plate 302 or a game ball flows down as it is hidden behind the decorative plate 302 (for example, See Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game balls with good visibility that fall off the decorative board 302 are rather configured to flow off the ball detection holes 431 and are hidden behind the decorative board 302. Since a part of the flowing game ball is guided to the ball detection hole 431, the visibility of the game ball does not correspond to the profit obtained by the player, and the player pays attention to the game ball. The player was likely to be dissatisfied because things were easily wasted. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in that the manner in which the game balls flow down after the attention has been made is significant.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the game balls flowing down the predetermined portion arranged on the conspicuous side are configured to be able to be guided to the passed means, the degree of improvement in the attention to the game balls, It can be associated with a game ball passing through the passed means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the possibility that the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined portion passes through the passed-through means, and thus it is possible to improve the game ball after the attention has been paid.

  In addition, with this configuration, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight with the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion, and to reduce the possibility that the player misses that the game ball is going to the passed means. be able to.

  It should be noted that the mode of the passed means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, an entrance (for example, a starting port) related to a lottery of a symbol, a prize ball that is related to a payout of a prize ball, or a game ball that can pass through. Means may be used.

  In addition, the aspect on the conspicuous side is not limited at all. For example, it may be a display device side that is easy to catch the eyes of the player, a winning port side or a starting port side, a front side (front side) that is easy for the player to see, or a specific entrance port. The stage where the line-of-sight is likely to converge as a place where the probability of entering the ball becomes remarkably high (mainly at the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame where the game ball temporarily stays) or directly connected to the jackpot acquisition The V winning opening side, the ball lending device side as an operation target, the staging operation button side, the range where the game ball escaping from the entrance port flows down (the range where the player frustratedly follows the ball with eyes) and Alternatively, the light side may be switched between light and dark on the bright side or on the other side. Alternatively, the inconspicuous side may be intentionally formed so as to be relatively conspicuous.

  In the gaming machine B1, the route configuration unit includes a second predetermined unit that makes the game ball entering the route configuration unit less noticeable than when the ball is entered, and the predetermined unit is more than the second predetermined unit. A gaming machine B2 which is arranged on a prominent side.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, before the game ball entering the route forming means flows down the predetermined portion, the attention power is reduced in the second predetermined portion, so that the predetermined portion flows down. The attention power of the game ball at the time of playing can be emphasized.

  The gaming machine B3, wherein in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the predetermined portion includes a section in which a flowing speed of a game ball is different.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the effect of collecting the player's line of sight can be improved as compared with the case where there is no difference in the flowing speed of the gaming ball.

  In the gaming machine B3, the second falling speed of the game ball flowing down the second predetermined portion is configured to be higher than the first flowing speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion. Gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B3, it is possible to shorten the period until the gaming ball that has entered the route forming means reaches the predetermined portion.

  The gaming machine B5 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, wherein the predetermined portion includes a section in which the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a predetermined direction is different.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the section in which the apparent displacement speed of the gaming ball in the predetermined direction is different regardless of the actual flowing speed of the gaming ball is different. Since it can be configured, by reducing the displacement speed of the game ball in a predetermined direction at any predetermined position, the player's line of sight can be easily collected at a predetermined position, and the eyes can be turned away from other parts .

  The manner in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball is made different is not limited at all. For example, when displacing on a straight line arranged on a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction in front view, and when displacing on a straight line having a front-rear component, or when displacing on a straight line, It may be different from the case of displacing in a curved or meandering manner, or may be other differences.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the game machine may further include an introduction unit configured to be capable of introducing a game ball into the path configuration unit, and the predetermined unit may be disposed outside the introduction unit in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine B6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, visibility of the introduction means can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to achieve both the securing of the visibility of the introduction unit and the improvement of the attention of the game ball that is likely to pass through the passed unit.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, an avoiding means is provided which is configured so that a game ball on the front side of the route forming means flows down to avoid the line of sight toward the passed means or the predetermined portion. Gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6, the game sphere is configured to be able to flow on the front side of the path forming means, and the flowing path of the game sphere is directed toward the passed means. Since avoidance means is provided for avoiding the problem, it is possible to ensure both the securing of the size of the game area and the visibility of the game ball toward the passed means.

  In addition, the flow-down mode of the game ball affected by the avoiding means is not limited at all. For example, it may flow down avoiding the front position of the passed-through means, may flow down a straight line connecting the passed-through means and the position of the eyes of the player, or may play a game ball heading to the passed-through means. With reference to the last position that can be confirmed by the player, it may flow down avoiding the front position of that position, or may flow down the straight line connecting the last position and the eye position of the player. Good and others.

  In the gaming machine B7, the route forming unit includes an accepting state changing unit configured to be capable of changing a state between an accepting state capable of accepting a flowing game ball and an unacceptable non-accepting state, and the accepting state changing unit includes: A game machine B8 configured to be able to guide a game ball, which has reached the receiving state changing means in the receiving state, to the route forming means side in the state change from the receiving state to the non-receiving state. .

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B7, it is also possible to prevent a gaming ball flowing down so as to be bridged after arriving at the receiving state changing means to block the line of sight toward the passed means. Can be.

  In the gaming machine B7 or B8, the game machine B7 or B8 is provided above the passed means in a front view, and includes a partitioning means for partitioning a game area, and the partitioning means is configured so that a game ball can flow down the left and right outer sides. A gaming machine B9 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B7 or B8, the situation in which the game ball flows down the front position of the passed-through means can be avoided by the partitioning means. It can be easily secured.

  It should be noted that the mode of the partition means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a plate-like portion that forms the lower surface of a game ball, or a ball-opening-portion-forming unit that allows a game ball to enter. The partitioning means may be a means for fixing the shape (appearance) or a means for changing the shape (appearance).

  In the gaming machine B9, the route forming means includes receiving state changing means configured to be capable of changing a state between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down can be received and a non-receiving state in which the ball cannot be received. A gaming machine B10 characterized in that a portion on the state changing means side is configured to easily guide a game ball to the receiving state changing means side.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B9, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a game ball being received by the receiving state changing means is received by the partitioning means by being pushed into the receiving state changing means. This makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the game ball that has slid in the middle of being accepted is deviated from the acceptance state changing means and falls on the front side of the passed means.

  For example, a special winning device having an opening / closing plate that tilts and displaces in the horizontal direction is assumed as the receiving state changing means, and a first winning opening arranged above the special winning opening of the special winning device is assumed as the dividing means. . A game ball that has reached the special winning opening just before the closing of the opening / closing plate is often sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening / closing plate and the edge of the opening covered with the opening / closing plate, and the direction of forming the edge ( (Slides in the direction of the rotation axis of the open / close plate).

  Since the game ball after skidding can reach any position in the range of formation of the pivotal tip of the opening and closing plate, if at least a part of the opening and closing plate is arranged above the passed means, it slides. There is a possibility that the subsequent game ball may pass through the front position of the passed means after dropping to the front side, and the game ball after skidding should not be dropped to the front side.

  If it is not possible to avoid the falling of the game ball to the front side after skidding, it will be necessary to dispose the open / close plate so as to avoid the position of the passed means in front view, which reduces the design freedom of the open / close plate become.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, it is possible to easily prevent the gaming ball after the skidding from falling to the front side of the opening and closing plate, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the opening and closing plate.

  In any one of the gaming machines B7 to B10, a game ball flowing down the route forming means and a game ball flowing down the front side of the route forming means flow down in a similar manner. Gaming machine B11.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B7 to B10, a game ball which may flow down the route forming means and pass through the passed means, and flows down the front side of the route forming means. By making it difficult to distinguish game balls that do not pass through the passed means, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the number of game balls flowing down the route forming means.

  In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a case where the game ball easily enters the route forming unit and a case where the game ball does not easily enter from the game ball flowing down near the route forming unit.

  A gaming machine B12, comprising: any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, provided with a light emitting means for emitting light from the rear side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, it is possible to easily avoid that the front side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion is reflected by light and the ball becomes difficult to see.

<Points to save the route length to the V entrance with space saving>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, a passed-through means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass therethrough, and a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the passed-through means. State switching means configured to be switchable between a first state and a second state different from the first state, wherein the path forming means includes a delay means for delaying the vertical displacement of the game ball, and the delay means A gaming machine C1 configured to allow a game ball to flow down to the passed means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or the like, an allocating unit 75 configured to be movable left and right in a flow path of the gaming ball entering the second big winning opening 12 is provided. There is a gaming machine configured to be able to change the flowing direction of the game machine (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is essential to operate the distribution unit 75 for a short period of time to prevent erroneous winning in the specific area 73 and biting of the ball by the distribution unit 75. In some cases, the player felt that the behavior of the division 75 was distrustful and could not continue the game with peace of mind.

  As an example of a means for solving this problem, it is assumed that the length of the flow path from the second big winning opening 12 to the distribution unit 75 is increased. For example, by changing the arrangement of the distribution unit 75 from a position directly below the second special winning opening 12 to a position near the center of the left and right of the game area (near the first special winning opening 10), the position from the second special winning opening 12 is changed. A long flow path length to the distribution unit 75 can be ensured. Thus, it is considered that the possibility of erroneous winning in the specific area 73 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when this means is executed, it is necessary to ensure the visibility of the flow path of the game ball over a wide range from the second special winning opening 12 to the first special winning opening 10, and in this range, the design of the game area can be freely performed. The degree is limited. That is, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the game area is restricted in a wide range in order to avoid erroneous winning in the specific area 73.

  In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of avoiding erroneous entry of game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the route forming unit includes the predetermined delay unit, even if the vertical length of the route forming unit in a front view is reduced to save space, the route forming unit enters the route forming unit. It is possible to secure a long time that elapses until the ball that has been hit passes through the passed means.

  Therefore, the timing at which it is necessary to operate the state switching means in order to switch whether or not a game ball can enter the passed-through means can be made a predetermined time after the game ball enters the route forming means, so that the route An erroneous winning can be avoided without operating the opening / closing device for switching whether or not to enter the constituent means for a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening / closing means is operating in a hurry. This makes it possible to avoid erroneous entry of game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

  The mode of the delay unit is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which a convex portion for deceleration is formed in the flow-down path, or a mode in which a predetermined flow-down path through which a game ball flows down in a flow-down path having a longitudinal component, may be used.

  In the gaming machine C1, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are such that the flow path toward the front side is lower than the flow path toward the rear side, and the game balls flow down. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the acceleration of the game machine is increased.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, it is possible to secure a long period of time in which a player can visually recognize a game ball flowing down a predetermined flow path.

  The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the inclination of the predetermined flow path with respect to the horizontal plane may be large or small, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow path on the game ball side may be designed.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow path is such that the flow path toward the front side is lower than the flow path that flows while maintaining the front-rear position. The gaming machine C3, wherein the acceleration of the flowing game balls is increased.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1 or C2, it is possible to secure a long period for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing on the near side. Thereby, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

  The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the inclination of the predetermined flow path with respect to the horizontal plane may be large or small, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow path on the game ball side may be designed.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the delay means includes a plurality of predetermined flow-down paths, and the predetermined flow-down path is such that a game ball is positioned in front of the passed means in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine C4 configured to pass through.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, when the gaming ball is arranged at the near position, the visibility near the passed means can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the range near the passed means.

  A gaming machine C5, wherein a plurality of the near positions can be configured in the gaming machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C5, at least a part of the game balls on the back side can be hidden by the game balls on the near side by arranging the game balls at a plurality of front positions. Since the passed-through means is disposed on the back side of the game balls on the back side, the field of view toward the passed-through means can be blocked by a plurality of game balls, and the visibility of the passed-through means can be reduced. .

  In this case, when the pitch of the game balls entering the predetermined flow path is short, it is possible to configure a state in which the game balls are always arranged at any of the near positions, so that the passed means cannot be visually recognized. It becomes possible.

  The gaming machine C6, wherein in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the path forming means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a spiral manner in a top view.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the vertical width required for disposing the route forming means having the same length can be shortened.

  Further, compared with the case where the folded path is formed, it is not necessary to reduce the thickness of the path wall, so that the strength of the flow path can be improved, and compared with the folded path that is folded at 180 degrees, The possibility of clogging of the ball or the like can be reduced.

  The gaming machine C7 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, wherein the path forming unit includes a front-rear flow path portion extending in the front-rear direction.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, since the left and right widths of the route forming means can be suppressed, the pair of route forming means can be symmetrically configured with the suppressed left and right widths. Can be.

  The gaming machine C8 according to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, wherein the passed means is disposed obliquely downward and rearward with respect to a ball receiving portion of the route forming means.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C1 to C7, it is possible to make it easier to fit the passed-through means and the ball receiving portion of the route forming means in the field of view of the player visually recognized from the front side. .

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the route forming unit is configured to be a first receiving unit configured to receive a game ball, and to be a unit different from the first receiving unit and configured to receive a game ball. And a second receiving means to be performed, wherein a profit obtained by the player is changed depending on a mode of receiving the game ball by the first receiving means and the second receiving means. Machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to always receive game balls, and further, the first receiving means and Since the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the mode of receiving the game ball by the second receiving means, the attention to the game ball can be improved.

  It should be noted that the mode of receiving game balls is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which game balls are received only by the first receiving means, a mode in which game balls are received only by the second receiving means, or a mode in which a predetermined number of game balls are received by the first receiving means. A mode in which a predetermined number is accepted by the means may be adopted. Further, the mode of entering the ball with respect to each receiving means may be different, or the mode of entering the ball may be different.

  In the gaming machine C9, the change in the profit obtained by the player is limited to one of the first receiving means or the second receiving means and the game ball is received, or the first receiving means and the second receiving means are changed. A game machine C10, which is generated depending on whether or not a game ball is accepted by both.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9, the player can easily launch the gaming ball in a predetermined firing mode by setting the magnitude of the profit obtained by the player. .

  It should be noted that the profit obtained by the player is not limited at all. For example, it may be easy to recognize the flowing game balls, or profits related to the game obtained by the flowing game balls (payout of prize balls, acquisition of jackpots, that the game state after the end of the jackpot becomes a stable state, The game state may be a normal state (falling down).

  In the gaming machine C9 or C10, the route forming unit is configured such that the portion from the first receiving unit and the second receiving unit to the passed unit is symmetrical.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C9 or C10, the possibility that the player suffers a disadvantage can be reduced even if the game ball is fired mainly on the left or right.

  In any one of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the route forming unit includes an accepting state changing unit configured to be capable of changing a state between an accepting state capable of accepting a flowing game ball and an unacceptable non-accepting state, The gaming machine C12, wherein the receiving mode changes according to the shape of the receiving state changing means or the mode of the status change.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the receiving state changes according to the shape of the receiving state changing means or the state of the state change. The effect of the skill level on the profits obtained for the player can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C12, the mode of the state change of the receiving state changing means is constituted by a plurality of types.

  According to the gaming machine C13, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C12, even when the game ball is fired in a fixed firing mode, the mode of receiving the game ball to the first receiving means and the second receiving means. Can be changed. Thereby, the profit obtained by the player can be adjusted from the state of the state change of the receiving state changing means.

<Points regarding the opening / closing member that moves parallel to the downward flow of the ball>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, a passed-through means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass therethrough, an introduction state capable of introducing a game ball to the path forming means, State switching means configured to be able to change state between a non-introduced state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the path forming means, and the direction of the displacement generated in the state change is caused by the downflow of the game ball. A gaming machine XA1 characterized by being arranged along a direction.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a large winning part 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a gaming ball toward a ball detection hole 431 (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the flowing direction of the gaming ball and the opening / closing direction of the opening / closing plate of the special winning part 300 are substantially perpendicular to each other, and the opening / closing operation is completed without involving the opening / closing of the rolling of the gaming ball. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening / closing plate (state switching means).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XA1, the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to be along the downflow direction of the game ball, so that the state in which the game ball is close to or in contact with the state switching means. By generating the displacement of the switching means, it is possible to change the rolling mode of the game ball. Thereby, the role of the state switching means can be improved.

  For example, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means is slid to the right while the game ball is on the top, so that the game ball moves in the forward direction of rolling rotation with respect to the game ball. Since a rotating load is applied, the game ball can be accelerated.

  Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means is slid to the left while the game ball is on the top, so that the rolling rotation of the game ball is performed. Since a load for rotating in the opposite direction is applied, the rotation of the game ball can be delayed.

  Further, when the state switching means slides so as to graze the lower end of the rolling game ball, a load having not only the rolling direction of the game ball but also a component in a direction orthogonal to the rolling direction is applied to the game ball. Because of this, it is possible to cause a complicated and irregular change in the manner in which the game balls flow down.

  Due to these effects on the flow-down state of the game ball, the flow-down state of the ball riding on the state switching means at the time of the opening / closing operation of the state switching means can be changed in various ways, so that the player visually recognizing the game ball gets bored. Without having to concentrate on the game.

  Further, the positional relationship between the opening / closing operation of the state switching means and the game balls is not limited at all. For example, the positional relationship may be such that the ball rubs against the side surface of the game ball, or the ball may collide against the game ball in the downflow direction.

  In the state switching means that is displaced in a manner of colliding with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, the closing operation may be performed in the direction opposite to the flowing direction of the game ball, and the game ball may be configured to be able to bounce off, or the closing operation may be performed in the forward direction of the flowing direction of the game ball, and the subsequent introduction of the game ball. May be configured to be regulated with low resistance.

  In the gaming machine XA1, the state change of the state switching means is configured to be executable while the state switching means and a game ball are in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine XA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XA1, the rotation of the gaming ball can be caused by the state change of the state switching means.

  The gaming machine XA3 of the gaming machine XA1 or XA2, wherein the state switching means includes a changing means for changing a direction of a load in a direction intersecting with the direction of the displacement.

  According to the gaming machine XA3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine XA1 or XA2, the load given to the game ball during the displacement of the state switching means can be released, and the load given to the state switching means can be reduced. .

<Points for the opening / closing member that allows the ball to flow in the first direction when opened and in the second direction when closed>
A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, a passed means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass therethrough, an introduction state capable of introducing a game ball to the passed means, State switching means configured to be changeable between a non-introduced state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the passed means, and the state switching means can guide the game ball in the first direction in the introduced state. The gaming machine XB1 is configured to be able to guide the gaming ball in the second direction in the non-introduced state.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a large winning part 300 capable of configuring a plurality of types of flow paths of a gaming ball toward a ball detection hole 431 (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when protruding forward, but does not contact the game ball when retracted to the rear side and freely falls without contacting the game ball. No guidance is given. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, in the state of being retracted to the rear side, it is necessary to prepare a portion (a frame portion or the like) for guiding the flow of the game ball other than the lower movable body 371, and for guiding the flow of the game ball. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of reducing the number of components (members).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XB1, since the state switching means is configured to guide the game ball in different directions between the introduced state and the non-introduced state, a special purpose for guiding the flow path of the game ball is provided. Since members can be eliminated, the number of necessary components (members) can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the flowing direction of the game ball in a limited space.

  Note that the relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited at all. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set left and right with respect to a game ball flowing down in the front-back direction. In this case, in front view, while the game ball is slightly displaced before being guided by the state switching unit, the difference (difference) in the direction after the guidance by the state switching unit is started is maximized. Can be achieved.

  The arrangement of the guide section that causes the operation of the state switching means to be guided is not limited at all. For example, a guide portion may be provided on a movable member provided in the state switching means, or the guide portion may be provided on a non-movable portion around the state switching means, and the game ball may be provided on the guide portion by the operation of the movable member. You may comprise so that it can be switched to the state which is close or easy to contact.

  When the guide portion is provided on the movable member, the design is not limited to the guide after the completion of the state switching between the introductory state and the non-introduced state, but also takes into account the effect on the game ball during the operation of switching the state. Is preferred.

  For example, when the state switching unit includes a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposing the flowing direction of the game ball, a surface (plane, curved surface, or the like) inclined with respect to the flowing direction is provided, rather than providing a planar wall perpendicular to the flowing direction. Providing a wall having a shape can make it easier to avoid a situation in which the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction in which the game ball flows backward. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid the backflow of the game ball.

  In the gaming machine XB1, the state change of the state switching means is caused by displacement in a third direction, and the third direction is orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. .

  According to the gaming machine XB2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XB1, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the state switching unit malfunctions due to the load applied from the guided gaming ball.

  In the gaming machine XB1 or XB2, the route configuration unit includes a pair of left and right routes, and the state switching unit includes a pair of guide units that can receive game balls from the pair of left and right routes, respectively. The gaming machine XB3, wherein the first direction and the second direction are symmetrical with each other.

  According to the gaming machine XB3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XB1 or XB2, the path along which the gaming ball flows can be complicated. In the pair of guides, the first direction and the second direction are configured symmetrically to each other, so that the displacement received by the state switching means due to the load applied to the pair of guides from the game ball is symmetrical in the left and right. be able to.

  Accordingly, for example, when a game ball is entered into a pair of left and right paths by a substantially equal number, the arrangement of the state switching means can be easily made uniform by the load received by the guide unit from the game ball.

  In the gaming machine XB3, the gaming machine XB4 is characterized in that the state switching means includes an overhang formed so as to overhang in a direction intersecting the third direction.

  According to the gaming machine XB4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XB3, the contact area with another member can be reduced by the overhang, and the displacement resistance of the state switching means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine XB3 or XB4, a contact means configured to be able to contact in the introduced state or the non-introduced state of the state switching means is provided. A gaming machine XB5 characterized in that the displacement can be corrected.

  According to the gaming machine XB5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XB3 or XB4, the load from the gaming ball can be received from either the left or right direction. It can be returned orderly by the action of the means.

<Separation, inversion, union, and rotation are a series of operations>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable so that a surface to be viewed is changed, the displacement means includes a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and in a displacement in a predetermined mode, the first displacement member is provided. A gaming machine D1 wherein a member and the second displacement member are configured to be relatively displaced.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a rotation base 214 provided at a distal end portion of a base arm 220 is configured to be rotatable a plurality of times (for example, see JP-A-2006-116782). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, although the rotation base 214 is rotationally displaced, there is a problem that it is difficult to maintain the attention to the displacement means because the surface seen by the player is the same.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the surface on which the displacement means is visually perceived can be changed in accordance with the displacement, so that attention to the displacement means can be maintained.

  In addition, since the first displacement member and the second displacement member are relatively displaced, the appearance of the displacement means can be changed, so that attention to the displacement means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1, the displacement in the predetermined mode includes a first displacement that approaches and separates from a gathering portion where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are gathered and arranged, and the first displacement member and the first displacement member. A gaming machine D2 comprising: at least a second displacement member and a second displacement that rotates with respect to the gathering portion.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily generated dynamically. That is, as the displacement based on the gathering portion, only the first displacement can easily reduce the displacement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member at the terminal end where the distance from the gathering portion is the shortest or the longest. Although the 1st displacement member and the 2nd displacement member seem to be stopped and there is a possibility that the production effect may be reduced, by mixing the second displacement, it is possible to generate a displacement in the rotation direction even at the end portion. Therefore, it is possible to improve the production effect.

  The gaming machine D3, wherein in the gaming machine D1 or D2, the displacement in the predetermined mode includes at least a third displacement in which a visible surface of the displacement means is reversed.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, by inverting the surface visually recognized by the third displacement, the decoration visually recognized by the player before and after the third displacement is significantly different. Can be made.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixable by suction or adhesion, and a load related to the fixation is the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A gaming machine D4 that operates in a direction that limits the displacement of a member.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the load related to the fixation acts in the direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so the load related to the fixation. In consideration of the above, the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be designed.

  For example, in the case of transmitting a driving force to a gear, when a deformation is caused mechanically without considering deformation of a shape, when a load related to fixing is added, a change in elasticity of a member due to the load becomes apparent. This can cause a delay in the displacement timing of the member.

  Further, the degree of fixation may be configured to be different depending on the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

  In this case, the effect of the fixation differs according to the surface to be visually recognized, so that the degree of fixation on the side to be visually recognized by the player can be increased or decreased.

  Thus, for example, with respect to the inverted surface of the same displacement means, one surface is firmly united and easily visible together, and the other surface is loosely united and easily visible in a state where relative displacement is easy. Can be.

  Also, for example, by configuring the degree of suction of the first displacement member and the second displacement member to be different for each fixing position, it is possible to configure a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member is different. it can.

  It should be noted that the mode in which adsorption is enabled is not limited at all. For example, an adhesive tape may be used, or an attractive force between a magnet and a metal part may be used. Further, the first reversing member or the second reversing member may be designed so that, for example, a fixing screw, a screw, or the like is used as the metal part to be attracted to the magnet.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacing means is configured to be displaceable in forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, is displaced in the forward direction in the first displacement mode, and in the reverse direction, the first displacement is performed. The gaming machine D5 is configured to be displaced in a second displacement mode different from the displacement mode, and to be displaced in the first displacement mode after being displaced in a predetermined mode.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is provided before the first displacement mode. Since the predetermined mode is configured as a displacement mode, the amount of displacement required for the displacement unit when the displacement unit is retracted can be reduced. Thereby, the attention power to the displacement means at the time of evacuation can be reduced, so that the attention power of the displacement means displaced at the production position can be relatively improved.

  In the conventional machine, since the rotation mode is the same in the forward and reverse directions, after extending to the effecting position (the position on the front side of the liquid crystal display area) and effecting, before retreating to the retreat position (the position outside the liquid crystal display area). It was necessary to rotate again several times in the opposite direction. In this case, there is a possibility that the problem that the line of sight easily gathers on the member retracted from the effect position.

  Note that the displacement mode is not limited at all. For example, the displacement may be a rotational displacement or a linear displacement. The displacement may be on a plane, may be over a plurality of planes, or may be three-dimensional.

  The gaming machine D6, wherein the displacing means includes releasing means configured to release the load transmission when the operation resistance becomes larger than a predetermined amount.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine D5, a change in the displacement mode of the displacement means can be caused by the magnitude of the operating resistance of the internal configuration of the displacement means.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, a light emitting unit that irradiates light to the displacement unit is provided, the displacement unit includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the The gaming machine D7, wherein the second displacement member is configured to be able to change the visual recognition mode of the light from the light emitting unit depending on whether the surface to be visually recognized is on one side or the other side.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means corresponds to the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member. Can be changed.

  For example, a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light individually, and a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light integrally. Can be changed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the game machine further includes a detection unit that detects an arrangement of the displacement unit, and the detection unit is configured to be capable of detecting whether or not the displacement of the displacement unit is in an allowable state. A gaming machine D8 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the state in which the displacement of the displacement means can be allowed can be detected by the detection means, so that the displacement means collides with the surrounding structure during the displacement. Can be avoided.

  In addition, since the displacement of the displacement means can be executed while detecting the section in which the displacement means can be displaced by the detection means, to a certain extent, the displacement mode including the enlargement / reduction after being displaced from the production position to the retreat position. By controlling so as to be displaced, it is possible to suppress an increase in attentional power to the displacement means when displacing from the production position to the retreat position in comparison with a case where displacement is performed in a displacement mode including enlargement / reduction from the start of displacement. .

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, a detection unit for detecting a state of the displacement unit is provided, and the detection unit is configured to be able to detect two or more types of numerical values for the displacement of the displacement unit. Gaming machine D9.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines D1 to D7, the number of detectors provided can be reduced. In addition, various modes are illustrated as the kind of numerical value about the displacement of the displacement means. For example, it may be a numerical value for the arrangement and posture of each of the different movable members, or a numerical value related to a change in the operation mode when the operation mode changes at a predetermined timing.

  Further, the arrangement of the detecting means is not limited at all. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure for detecting the arrangement and posture of the second displacement means connected to the displacement tip side of the displacement means.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member have one surface facing the player side. When the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one side toward the player, the first and second displacement members are configured so as to be able to perform a reversing operation. While the displacement member and the second displacement member can be distinguished from each other, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the other side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member Is a game machine D10.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D9, the reversing operation is performed regardless of the state of the first displacement member and the second displacement member when one side is directed to the player side. The player's expectation that the game will occur can be kept high.

<Points that change the easy-to-view surface by arranging the displacement means having a plurality of surfaces to be viewed>
Displacement means comprising a first viewable surface and a second viewable surface configured to be viewable, the displacement means depending on the arrangement, a first state in which the first viewable surface is easily viewable, A gaming machine E1 configured to be switchable between a second state in which the second viewable surface is easily visible.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including a reversing operation unit 71 configured to be reversible and configured to be able to change the appearance visually recognized by a player by changing a surface to be viewed (for example, And JP-A-2006-153095). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the reversal of the reversing operation section 71 is performed in a state where the position is fixed, so that the line of sight of the player cannot be changed due to a change in the surface to be viewed. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the player's line of sight.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the displacing means switches between a state in which the first visually recognizable surface is easily visible and a state in which the second visually recognizable surface is easily visible according to the arrangement. The line of sight of the player who wants to see the visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner along the path of the change in the arrangement of the displacement means.

  The gaming machine E2, wherein the gaming machine E1 is provided with an opening for opening the displacing means so as to be visible, and the displacing means is configured such that the opening side is easily visible.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the player who visually recognizes the back side through the opening can easily visually recognize the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement unit.

  In the gaming machine E2, the displacing means is disposed closer to the back side when the displacing means is disposed on the edge side of the opening than when it is disposed on the center side of the opening. .

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, when the displacing means is disposed at the center side of the opening, the displacing means can be largely visually recognized on the near side, while the displacing means is located on the edge of the opening. When placed, the movement of the line of sight when viewing the displacement means can be reduced. This makes it possible to achieve both the visibility of the displacement means and the suppression of fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means with his or her eyes.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the displacement unit includes a plurality of sets of the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface, and one set of the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface. A gaming machine E4 characterized in that it is difficult to visually recognize another set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface when the surface is visible.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, different characters and figures are applied to the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface for each set, so that the displacement means is provided. To allow a player who visually recognizes a different character or figure to be visually recognized, and that it is difficult to visually recognize a first visible surface and a second visible surface of a set not intended to be visually recognized. Thus, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the displacement means from being completely lost.

  For example, in the first set, a character or a graphic indicating that the lottery result is a big hit and a low expectation is displayed on the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface, and the second set includes the lottery result. Is displayed on the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface when a character or a graphic indicating that the expectation of the jackpot is high is displayed through the displacement means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. You can check the height. In this case, even after the displacement means has retreated from the front side of the display area of the display device, the display of the expectation of the jackpot by the displacement means can be maintained, so that the player who has taken his eyes off the liquid crystal display device can Also, it is possible to continue to display the display of the jackpot expectation.

  In addition, the aspect which is hard to visually recognize is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged on a surface (rear side surface, left and right outer surface, etc.) on the side different from the player side, or may be configured so as to reduce visibility by shielding with shielding means.

  In the gaming machine E4, the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface to be visually recognized is such that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are hardly recognized during the operation. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being constituted.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in the gaming machine E4, the first viewable surface displayed on the player side during the operation of switching the set of the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface to be viewed (before confirmation). In addition, it is possible to easily prevent the prediction of the set of the second visually recognizable surfaces. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention of the displacement means.

  Note that there is no limitation on the mode in which the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface are hardly recognized during the switching operation described above. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at a high speed to make it difficult to be recognized, or a part of the first viewable surface (the second viewable surface) and another part may be configured to be connectable and separable. The recognition may be made difficult by operating the part and the other parts in a separated state, or a part that is made relatively dark by setting the brightness of the light emitting means may be made difficult to be recognized.

  In this case, the state of the separated state is not limited at all. For example, during the above-described switching operation, only one of the first viewable surface (the second viewable surface) and the other portion is viewed, and the other side faces the rear side so as not to be viewed. Such a configuration may be employed, or a configuration may be employed in which a part thereof and the other part can be visually recognized at the same time, but the arrangement is shifted and visually recognized.

  In the gaming machine E5, an opening is provided to open the displacement means so that the displacement means can be visually recognized, and the switching operation is performed in a state where the displacement means is arranged at the center side of the opening. Gaming machine E6.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E5, the switching operation can be easily made visible to the player, and the attention to the switching operation can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E5 or E6, during the switching operation, one of the part of the first viewable surface and the other part faces a front side, and the other faces a side different from the front side. Gaming machine E7.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E5 or E6, a part of the first visually recognizable surface can be visually recognized during the operation, and the entire surface cannot be visually recognized. Possible surfaces can be made harder to recognize.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the game machine further includes a second displacement unit configured to shield at least a part of a line of sight to the second viewable surface, and the displacement unit together with the second displacement unit includes the second displacement unit. (1) A gaming machine E8 configured to be switchable to a third state for visually recognizing a viewable surface.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7, at least a part of the second viewable surface is hardly visually recognized by the second displacement means, so that the effect position of the displacement means can be determined. The degree of freedom in design can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the displacement unit is configured to change a surface visually recognized in a predetermined direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface according to the displacement. A gaming machine E9.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the surface viewed in the predetermined direction changes between the first viewable surface and the second viewable surface. It is possible to arbitrarily change a surface that is easily visible without depending on the amount of change in the line of sight of the user.

  The gaming machine E10, wherein the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9, the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state can be increased by changing the posture of the displacement means. it can.

  In the gaming machine E9 or E10, an auxiliary means is provided so as to be able to be disposed close to the displacement means. In the first state, the displacement means is disposed close to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means is disposed. Is a gaming machine E11 characterized by being located away from said auxiliary means.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E9 or E10, the auxiliary means is disposed in the vicinity of the displacement means, and the state in which the auxiliary means and the displacement means are visually recognized separately and the state in which the auxiliary means and the displacement means are visually recognized separately. It is possible to configure a plurality of impressions given to the player by the displacement means.

  The mode of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, the arrangement may be fixed or movable.

  In the gaming machine E11, the auxiliary means is configured to be switchable between a state in which the auxiliary means is visually recognized integrally with the displacement means and a state in which the auxiliary means is visually recognized separately from the displacement means. .

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E11, it is possible to switch whether the displacement means and the auxiliary means are visually recognized integrally or separately and visually recognized. Can be increased.

<Point where the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means and the displacement amount of the disposition means at the same point differs in the section>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable, disposition means having a first portion disposed on the displacement means, and support means for supporting a second portion of the disposition means, the support means being provided. Is a game machine F1 characterized in that the arrangement of the second part with respect to the first part during the displacement of the displacement means can be controlled.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a tiltable and displaceable base arm 220, a pivoting member 211 rotatably attached to a tip end side of the base arm 220, and the pivoting member 211 are rotated. And a driving motor 222 that generates a driving force for the rotation of the base arm 220, and is configured to be able to rotate the rotating role 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220 (for example, JP-A-2006-116782). Gazette). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the rotating role 211 is likely to wobble at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the rotating role 211 is rotated during the tilting displacement of the base arm 220, a malfunction may occur in the mechanism. As a result, since the rotational displacement of the rotating role 211 is assumed to be performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, the degree of freedom of the displacement is low.

  That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the displaceable portion.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the arranging means is supported by the displacement means and the support means at at least two points, and the two support points are configured to be relatively displaced during the displacement of the displacement means. Since the arrangement of the second portion with respect to the first portion can be controlled by the support means, the disposing means can be displaced during the displacement of the displacing means while the disposing means is stably supported. Can be. Thus, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the disposing means (the displaceable portion) can be increased.

  In addition, the aspect of the support means is not limited at all. For example, it may be supported by a guide groove formed in the fixed base means in a mode in which the displacement is limited, or may be supported by being connected to a displaceable second displacement means. Further, the control by the support means is not limited to the electronic control, but also includes mechanical control such as regulating (guiding) the displacement of the second portion by the wall.

  In the gaming machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be capable of displacing a first section and a second section, and the support means is configured to displace the second section when the displacement means displaces the first section. And a second range for supporting the second portion when the displacement means displaces the second section, wherein the second portion is displaced in the first range. A gaming machine F2, wherein a direction is different from a direction in which the second portion is displaced in the second range.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F1, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the arranging means can be made different. Since it is configured to allow the change in the displacement direction of the portion, even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly, the displacement of the disposing means can be made smooth.

  The gaming machine F3, wherein in the gaming machine F1 or F2, the support means includes a limiter for limiting displacement of the second portion.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the displacement of the second portion can be limited at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range. When the part is displaced from the side where the displacement is large to the side where the displacement is small, the second part can be easily stopped at the boundary position (restriction part) between the first range and the second range.

  The form of the load required for the displacement of the second portion with respect to the first portion is not limited at all. For example, the second portion may be pulled, or the second portion may be pushed.

  Note that the mode of the restriction unit is not limited at all. For example, a mode may be set in which the displacement resistance of the second portion is increased or decreased, or a mode in which the displacement direction of the second portion is switched.

  In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the first section is disposed closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the arrangement means based on the displacement means in the second section. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that the relative displacement amount is smaller than the relative displacement amount of the arranging means based on the displacement means in the first section.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is possible to configure a section where the relative displacement amount of the arranging means with respect to the displacing means is small at the position of the displacement means. Since it is possible, in addition to the displacement end position of the displacement means, it is possible to provide a position where the displacement means and the disposing means can be easily visually recognized integrally. Easy positions can be increased.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the gaming machine F5 is configured to be capable of changing (the ratio of) the displacement speed of the second portion based on the displacement speed of the first portion.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the second portion of the arranging means on the support means side Can be changed, so that an operation effect in which the displacement speed of the arranging means is made variable by simple driving control (constant speed driving) of the driving means can be configured.

  The gaming machine F6 according to any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, wherein the support means is configured to reduce a displacement speed at a displacement end of the second portion.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 to F5, it is possible to prevent the second portion from rebounding, and to easily stop the arrangement means at the end of displacement.

  Note that there is no limitation on the technique for preventing the second portion from jumping back. For example, a method of reducing the displacement speed of the second portion at the displacement end (for example, the displacement amount of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) may be used. A method may be used in which the displacement of the second portion is regulated by a geometrical measure such as raising a wall in the direction of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is stopped.

  Further, the invention is not limited to the method of reducing the displacement amount of the second portion, and the displacement resistance of the second portion may be increased. For example, a load may be applied by a magnetic force or the like at the end of displacement of the second portion to improve the displacement resistance of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be improved by the urging force of a coil spring or the like. good.

  In the gaming machine F6, the support unit may include a displacement trajectory of a displacement of the second portion accompanying a displacement of the first portion, and a displacement trajectory of the second portion when the first portion stops at a displacement end. A gaming machine F7, wherein the displacement trajectory of the displacement intersects.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F6, the support means having a function of guiding the displacement of the second portion accompanying the displacement of the first portion causes the third portion when the first portion stops. The return displacement (bound) of the portion 2 can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, the game machine further includes a supported unit that is displaceably supported by the arrangement unit, and the supported unit has a relative displacement amount of the arrangement unit with respect to the displacement unit. A gaming machine F8 configured to be displaced by a corresponding displacement amount.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a complicated effect can be executed by the supported means that is displaced jointly with the arranging means.

  The mode of displacement of the supported means is not limited at all. For example, the disposition means may be displaced so as to run in parallel with the disposition means on a predetermined plane on which the disposition means is displaced. , A slide displacement mode (for example, a rotational displacement mode about a predetermined axis) may be used.

  It should be noted that the mode of displacement of the arranging means with respect to the amount of displacement of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, the posture may be changed, or the displacement may be performed while maintaining the posture.

  In the gaming machine F8, while the first portion is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second portion is provided with a section capable of reciprocating displacement in a direction intersecting a displacement trajectory of the first portion. Gaming machine F9.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F8, the relative displacement of the second portion with respect to the first portion changes while the first portion is being displaced (for example, after the increase). Since the position of the second portion is maintained, the displacement amount of the supported means can be increased while maintaining the arrangement of the second portion.

  In the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement speed of the (relative) rotation of the supported means with respect to the arrangement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means. F10.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement mode of the supported device can be made equivalent to the displacement device with the arrangement device interposed therebetween. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to the player as if the supported means is being displaced by the unique driving means.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the arranging means includes a posture changing means for changing a posture so as to switch a surface facing a player side between a first surface and a second surface according to its own displacement, The attitude changing means is configured such that the first surface or the second surface is oriented toward a player when the second portion is disposed at a displacement end. Machine F11.

  According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the first surface or the second surface of the posture changing means is directed toward the player, so that the second portion is at the displacement end. Since the player can recognize that the player has arrived, the end of the effect operation by the displacement means can be easily understood.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F11, the electric wiring is configured to be inserted through the second part to the arranging means, and the electric wiring is arranged inside and fixed to the second part. Arranging means, wherein the arranging means includes an opening through which the electric wiring can be inserted, and the opening is configured to be displaceable so as to avoid contact of the electric wiring with a peripheral portion formed around the electric wiring. A gaming machine F12 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F11, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring from coming into contact with the surrounding portion.

  The arranging means may be configured as a means for uniting the plurality of members when the second portion is formed of a plurality of members, or may be configured when a separate member is provided in the second portion. It may be configured as means for preventing the separate member from falling off from the second portion.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1 to XA3, XB1 to XB5, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F12, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1 to XA3, XB1 to XB5, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F12, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Gaming machine Z2. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1 to XA3, XB1 to XB5, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, and F1 to F12, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being fused. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board (part of area configuration means)
65b Opening / closing plate (part of introduction means, receiving state changing means, avoidance means)
86 Center frame (open part)
141 Prior design member (part of partitioning means and avoidance means)
163b Ball passage hole (first receiving means, second receiving means)
312 opening (second predetermined part, ball receiving part)
317 Front and rear long projecting part (part of the first flow-down path, part of the projecting part, second projecting part, part of the state switching means)
318 Left and right inner projections (part of branching means, part of projection, first projection, part of state switching means)
319 Left and right outer protruding parts (part of the second flow path, part of the state switching means)
310 Upper member (part of route configuration means)
330 Middle member (part of delay means, part of route construction means)
334 first flow path constituent part (part of path constituent means, front and rear flow path part)
335 second flow path constituent part (predetermined part, part of path constituent means, left-right path)
336 Third flow path constituent part (part of path constituent means, front / rear path, front / rear flow part)
351 Light emitting means 370 Slide displacement member (part of branching means, part of switching means, part of state switching means)
380 Lower member (part of route configuration means)
600 first operation unit (displacement means)
616 Guide slot (supporting means)
616a Linear part (part of support means, first area, restriction part)
616b Curved part (part of support means, second area, restriction part)
620 Rotating member (displacement means)
640 Supported member (part of arrangement means)
642 tubular part (first part)
652 Front rotating member (supported means)
652b Overhang decoration part (part of auxiliary means)
660 Second decorative rotating member (posture changing means)
661a First production surface (first visible surface, first surface)
661b Second production surface (second visible surface, second surface)
670 Decoration fixing member (part of auxiliary means)
700 second operation unit (displacement means)
787a1 First main decorative surface (part of first visible surface)
787a2 First auxiliary decorative surface (part of second visible surface)
787b1 Second main decorative surface (part of first visible surface)
787b2 Second auxiliary decorative surface (part of second visible surface)
800 third operation unit (displacement means, second displacement means)
813 Detection sensor (detection means)
823b Outside light emitting unit (light emitting means)
840 Outer rotating member (part of collecting part)
866 Torque limiter (release means)
870 First decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
875 1st covering part (part of the surface to be visually recognized)
880 second decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
885 2nd covering part (part of the surface to be visually recognized)
C1 color (part of installation means, second part)
C2 Dish-shaped lid part (part of arrangement means, second part)
P1 ball (part of displaceable means)
SE11 Probable change detection sensor (part of passing means)
SE12 Normal detection sensor (part of the passing means)

Claims (1)

A path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, a passed-through means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass therethrough, an introduction state capable of introducing a game ball to the path forming means, State switching means configured to be able to change the state between a non-introduced state in which a game ball cannot be introduced to the path forming means,
The gaming machine, wherein the state switching means is configured such that a direction of displacement generated in the state change is along a flowing direction of the game ball.

Images